Agfa Drystar-5300 PDF

Technical
Documentation
Order No.: DD+DIS008.04E
Drystar 5300
*1WQ93Q1*
1 Piece WQ93Q MA1
Type 5365 / 100
1st Edition
POWE
R
printed in Germany 03 / 2004

Agfa Group Confidential
Technical
Documentation
Drystar 5300
*1WQ93Q1*
1 Piece WQ93Q MA1
Type 5365 / 100
1st Edition To order spare parts and Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 – 3760
spare part assortments: Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 – 7388
To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7271
Caution:
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified
electrician.
POWE
R
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified

technician.
CE Declaration:
The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed
without explicit consens of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
AGFA-GEVAERT AG - MI CSO / Information & Projects

Tegernseer Landstr. 161 D-81539 München
printed in Germany 03 / 2004

Agfa Group Confidential
OVERVIEW Pictograms and Conventionen for this Documentation
0. Orderlist, List of effective In this documentation some special conventions (pictograms, writing styles) are used, to
page, notes support, that you can easily recognize and find the required information.
1. Controls, Connections and

Set Up Procedure Meaning of the Pictograms
2. Functional Description High Voltage ! Waiting Time
3. Repair and Service

Attention ! Required
3.1 Machine specific safety
Tools
intructions and hints for repair
work
Info Removal
3.2 Machine specific tools, Software
tools and auxiliary means
3.3 Troubleshooting Assembly
3.4 Electrical and mechanical Hint
codes, fuse tables Mechanical Adjustment
3.5 Replacement of parts Required
Spare Part
3.6 Calibrations and adjustments
Electrical Adjustment
3.7 Software menues, Settings
3.8 Software-Releases, Patches Required
Calibration
Time
3.9 Frequently Asked Questions
4. Reference and Circuit

Key-Operator menu
Diagrams
5. Spare Parts List

Service Menu
6. Accessories
7. Field Modifications
8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Modifications
Activity Writing style Example

9. Maintenance
Explanation for an action, Switch on the device Switch on the device

10. Fieldservice Bulletins
Activity with the mouse or return <omni-cd.exe> Double click the icon
11. Installation Planning key <omni-cd.exe>
1 2 3
required text entry via key vips Enter vips and click on
12. Glossary and Key Word Index board <Continue>
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Document No: DD+DIS238.06E
Generic Safety Directions

for HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this Document
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3 07-2009 • Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the
corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
• Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
• Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
• Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
• Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
• Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 3
07-2009 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 11849633
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa – Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
• Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
• When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
• Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
• Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
• Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
• Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
• Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
• Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
• Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
• Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
• Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
• Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
• Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
• Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
• IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
• ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
• IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
• When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form “IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation” for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
1
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
• Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
• Do not look into the laser beam.
• Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
• Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
• Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
• Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
• Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

DD+DIS346.05E Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Chapter 1:
List of contents
1 General Safety Instructions ............................................................................. 1

1.1 Safety Precautions ....................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Security precautions .................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Safety compliance ........................................................................................................ 4
1.4 Privacy and security ..................................................................................................... 5
2 Installation Prerequisites ................................................................................. 7

2.1 Check of Installation Site Prerequisites ..................................................................... 7
2.2 Comparison of Voltage indicated on Type Label with supplied Voltage in the
Installation Room.......................................................................................................... 8
2.3 Check of Shipment Completeness.............................................................................. 8
2.4 Printer Positioning........................................................................................................ 9
2.5 Transport Protection Locks Removal ......................................................................... 9
2.6 Cable Connection ....................................................................................................... 10
2.7 For Installations in China: Warning Label Attachment ........................................... 10
3 Printer Setup ................................................................................................... 11

3.1 Film Positioner Unit Adjustment to 11x14" if required ........................................... 11
3.2 Film Loading ............................................................................................................... 12
4 Printer Installation Wizard.............................................................................. 16
5 Printer Settings ............................................................................................... 18

5.1 Film Calibration........................................................................................................... 19
5.2 Default Densitometer.................................................................................................. 20
5.3 Film View Adjustment................................................................................................. 21
5.4 Beep on empty Tray Adjustment............................................................................... 22
5.5 Missing RF Tag Behavior Adjustment ...................................................................... 23
5.6 Entering Site Data ....................................................................................................... 24
6 Film Calibration............................................................................................... 25
7 Printer - Modality Connection........................................................................ 26

7.1 Modality set-up............................................................................................................ 26
Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document.
Edition 1, Revision 10 Drystar 5300 Chapter 1 / I
2006-01-26 Type 5365 Agfa Company Confidential
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures DD+DIS346.05E
7.2 Logical Printers Set-up ...............................................................................................27

7.3 Printing of diagnostic and / or Test Images..............................................................31
7.4 Image Adjustments .....................................................................................................32
7.4.1 Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document ......33
7.4.2 Image Adjustments at the Modality .................................................................33
7.4.2.1 Contrast Adjustment.................................................................................................. 33
7.4.2.2 Sharpness Adjustment .............................................................................................. 34
7.4.3 Image Adjustments at the Printer ....................................................................35
8 Acceptance Test ............................................................................................. 37
9 Completion of installation.............................................................................. 38
9.1 Customer Instruction ..................................................................................................38
9.2 Backup of Printer Settings .........................................................................................39
10 Appendix .......................................................................................................... A
10.1 Installation Checklist ................................................................................................... A
10.2 Removal of Transport Protection ............................................................................... C
10.3 Image Adjustments Overview ..................................................................................... E

Chapter 1 / II Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 10
Agfa Company Confidential Type 5365 2006-01-26
1 General Safety Instructions

1.1 Safety Precautions
The Drystar 5300 must only be operated according to its specifications and
its intended use. Any operation not corresponding to the specifications or
intended use may result in hazards, which in turn may lead to serious injuries
or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks). AGFA will not assume any
liability whatsoever in these cases.
All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which
could be mixed up with diagnostic relevant information. If there is any doubt
that the diagnostic information could not be absolutely true, additional
investigations must be performed to get a clear diagnostic.
When operating or maintaining the Drystar 5300, always observe the following
safety guidelines:
• Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by qualified personnel
only!
• Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features.
• Ventilation openings should not be covered.
• Always switch off the Drystar 5300 and disconnect the power cord from
the outlet before carrying out any maintenance work.
Film jam removal or cleaning the printer thermal head can be done without
switching the power off. Nevertheless, care should be taken and the
following instructions should be respected:
Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside of
the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is given
below.

Edition 1, Revision 10 Drystar 5300 Chapter 1 / 1
Safety warning, indicating that the Drystar 5300 manuals should

be consulted before making any connections to other equipment.
The use of accessory equipment not complying with the
equivalent safety requirements of this printer may lead to a
reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration
relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity,
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory
equipment has been performed in accordance with the
appropriate IEC 601-1 and IEC 601-1-2 harmonized national
standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical
electrical systems standard IEC 601-1-2. The party that makes
the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible
for complying with the systems standard.
If required contact your local service organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any
covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the Thermal Print Head.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the DRYSTAR 5300 complies within the limits for
type B equipment.
Supplementary protective earth connector:
Provides a connection between the DRYSTAR 5300 and the
potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found in
medical environments. This plug should never be unplugged
before the power is turned off and the power plug has been
removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the printer and other equipment
which might exhibit minor ground potential differences. These
differences may degrade the quality of communication between
different equipment. Never remove connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground)
Provides a connection between the printer and the protective
earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because this
will have a negative influence on the leakage current.
Power/Reset Button
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall
outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.

Chapter 1 / 2 Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 10
Precautions for use in USA only:

Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the
printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a
120 V/60 Hz source.
Transport after installation

Before moving the printer, always switch off the machine. The Drystar 5300
should always be transported by 2 persons. When doing this, the stability
and the structure of the table top have to be taken into account. The printer
should not be placed on a soft surface, since this might prevent appropriate
ventilation and cause overheating. The printer must only be transported with
all covers closed. The appliance may not be transported continuously from
one location to the other. Do not lift the printer by the output tray.
Waste disposal and environmental regulations

This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or
on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as
household waste.
Instead it shall be handled over to the applicable collection point for the
recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. For more detailed
information about take-back and recycling of this product, please contact
your local Agfa service organization.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health,
which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this
product. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. If
your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accumulators please
dispose these separately according to your local requirements.
1.2 Security precautions

CAUTION (U.S.A. only): In accordance with U.S. Law, this device can only
be sold to or ordered by a licensed physician.
Printed images should be treated as patient records and should only be

viewed by authorized personnel.
If the power to the printer is unexpectedly interrupted, ensure that

unprinted images are not deleted from the modality prior to printing. To
avoid loss of images in such conditions, a UPS (Uninterruptible Power
Supply) needs to be supplied to the printer.

1.3 Safety compliance
The Drystar 5300 has been tested and found to comply with the following
international standards and regulations:
• the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC
• CFR Part 21
• The Drystar 5300 contains an automatic QC feature that has been
designed to comply with the grayscale reproduction constancy test,
according to the international standard IEC 1223-2-4.
Safety standards
• IEC 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• EN 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• UL 60601-1
• CSA 22.2 No. 601.1-M90
• GB4943-2001 (for CCC-Mark)
Radio-interference regulations (interference suppression)

• FCC Rules 47 CFR part 15 subpart B
• IEC 60601-1-2
• CISPR 11, class A
• IEC 61000-4-3
• IEC 61000-4-4
• IEC 61000-4-5
• IEC 61000-4-6
• IEC 61000-3-2
• IEC 61000-3-3
• IEC 61000-4-11
• ETSI 300330
• GB9254-1998(Class A) (for CCC-Mark)
• GB17625.1-2003 (for CCC-Mark)

Labels:
The Drystar 5300 carries the CE, TÜV, cULus and CCC labels.
1 CCC label
2 CE, TÜV and cULus label
1.4 Privacy and security
Within the healthcare industry, several standardization efforts are ongoing as

a response to Privacy and Security legislation and regulations. The purpose of
this standardization for hospitals and vendors is to enable information sharing,
interoperability and to support the workflow of hospitals in a multiple vendor
environment.
In order to allow hospitals to comply with HIPAA regulations (Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act) and to meet the IHE standards (Integrated
Healthcare Enterprise) some security features are included in the user
interface of the Drystar 5300 (available via the web pages only: under
‘Security tools’
• User authentication. The administrator can configure different user
accounts. Each account consists of a user name and a password.
• Audit logging. This implies logging to a central log server of specific
Drystar 5300 ‘actions’, e.g. start-up/shut down, user authentication
(failures), received print job ID information, etc.
• Node authentication, using certificates. Working with SSL (Secure
Sockets Layer) allows secure communications over an insecure network.
SSL is the security layer on top of TCP/IP.
The first two functions are available when access to the Administrator is
granted (i.e. when the Administrator password has been correctly entered). To
activate the SSL, please contact your Agfa representative.

Node authentication, certificates and Certification Authority

Each device - connected to a network - will receive a unique identifier: the
X.509 certificate, a digital passport. Any device on the network is only allowed
to communicate with another node of which it is holding the certificate in a
‘communication allowed’ table.
A Certification Authority (CA) is responsible for creating a certificate. The CA
can be the hospital, Agfa or a third party.
This CA distributes the certificate to the hospital security responsible or
service technician, who for his part:
• Imports the device certificate, created by the CA.
• Imports the certificates of all peer devices with which communication is
authorized, i.e. creates the list of ‘communication allowed’ device
certificates.

The Installation Checklist in the appendix, page A, of this chapter gives an

overview of all steps and guides through the complete installation process.
2 Installation Prerequisites
The purpose of this section is to show the required tasks before installation to
guarantee a smooth DRYSTAR 5300 installation.
The following table lists these tasks:
Task Details see…

Check installation site prerequisites 2.1
Compare voltage indicated on type label with available 2.2
power supply
Check shipment completeness 2.3
Put the printer on a solid table 2.4
Remove transport protection locks 2.5
Connect the cables 2.6
For China only: Stick Chinese warning label above 2.7
existing one.
The time required for the steps within this section should Task code:
be entered in the service / installation report under task
code INS.
2.1 Check of Installation Site Prerequisites
• Take care that all prerequisites described in the "Installation readiness

checklist" are fulfilled.
This checklist is available at the end of Chapter 11, Installation Planning.

2.2 Comparison of Voltage indicated on Type Label with supplied

Voltage in the Installation Room
The type label is located inside the

printer and visible when you open the
front door. Refer to Figure 1.
(1) Compare the voltage and current

indicated on type label with the
supplied voltage and current in
the installation room. Refer to the
note below.
5365_Reg01_001_e.eps
Figure 1
The printer has an "auto switching" power supply built in. This adapts itself to
the input voltage. The input voltage has to be in the range of 100/240 V (AC),
50/60 Hz.
2.3 Check of Shipment Completeness
• Compare the shipment with the packing list.

• In case it is not complete, inform the national service manager. He will
initiate the required steps.
• Additionally, note any missing item(s) in the installation report.

2.4 Printer Positioning
Caution:
• The printer is very heavy: It's weight is 52 kg (115 lb)
• Due to its weight injuries are possible when lifting the printer from
the pallet
• Use two people to lift the printer from the pallet to avoid injuries.
(1) Put the printer at its final

location on a solid table
(2) Align it with the table edge.
Figure 2
2.5 Transport Protection Locks Removal
Remove the transport protection locks.

Refer to Appendix, section 10.2

2.6 Cable Connection

(1) Connect the power cable
Figure 3
(2) Connect the network cable.
Figure 4
2.7 For Installations in China: Warning Label Attachment
(1) For installations in China only:

Stick the Chinese warning label
(part of delivery) over the
existing one.
Figure 5

3 Printer Setup
The purpose of this section is to show the required steps of the mechanical
printer set-up.
The following table lists these tasks:
Task Details: see…

Adjust film positioner unit to 11x14" if required 3.1
Load films 3.2
3.1 Film Positioner Unit Adjustment to 11x14" if required
• To adjust the film positioner unit to 11x14" films is only required in case
the customer is using 11x14" films instead of 14x17" films (14x17" =
default).
(1) Take the output tray adjustment

tool from the accessories box. 2
(2) Push the tool down into the output
tray holes [1].
(3) Push the output tray bracket into
position until it clicks [2]. Click!
Figure 6
(4) Remove 3 screws underneath the

input tray.
(5) Lower the film positioner unit.
Figure 7

(6) Loosen the wire harness from its

positioners.
(7) Push the wire harness into the
printer housing.
Figure 8
(8) Put and hold film positioner into

place.
(9) Remount 3 screws.
Figure 9
3.2 Film Loading
(1) Open the input tray.
Figure 10

(2) Open the film pack.
Note: make sure not to open the pack

above the input tray (risk of dust
particles falling into the tray)!
Figure 11
(3) Place the new film pack in the

input tray.
Figure 12
(4) Remove the sticker completely

from the film pack flap.
Figure 13
(5) Slide the film further into the

tray.
Figure 14

(6) Pull the plastic bag from the

film.
Figure 15
(7) Pull the tape from around the

film.
Figure 16
(8) Place the correct film

identification sticker that you
find in the accessories box.
Figure 17
(9) Close the input tray.
Figure 18

(10) Place the correct film

identification sticker that you
find in the accessories box.
Figure 19
• When a new film is loaded, the

Film Identification-TAG is read
and the printer settings are
automatically adjusted.
Note: the Film Identification TAG is

located on the rear of the film pack:
Figure 20 shows the film pack
upside-down.
Figure 20

4 Printer Installation Wizard

The purpose of this section is to show the most important settings of the
printer during installation via Installation Wizard.
The time required for the steps within this subsection should Task code:
be entered in the service/installation report under task code
INS.
The Printer Installation Wizard guides step by step through different

parameters.
(1) Press the POWER button to
switch the printer on. Please WAIT
Self test proceeding
62%
A self test of the display is
performed, followed by a software
self test.
(2) After approx. 4 minutes the
message "Warming Up" appears.
Now it is possible to enter the
Key-Operator menu.
Figure 21
(3) In the Key-operator menu select Printer Installation Wizard

'9 Installation - 2 Printer Install. Key-operator
menu
Wizard'
9 Installation
Figure 22 beneath lists the
parameters which have to be entered 2 Printer Install. Wizard
Language
Date and Time
A more detailed description of the PRINTER IP-ADDRESS
printer Installation Wizard is available NETMASK
ROUTER IP-ADDRESS
in the Drystar 5300 Reference CALLED AE_TITLE
Hostname
Manual in section 'Using the Domain name
installation wizard'. Daily used modality name
Brand
The Reference Manual is part of Modality Type
CALLING AE_TITLE('modality name')
delivery and available on MEDNET, Preferred film type
Save configuration
HealthCare Library. Reset
5365_Reg01_001_e.cdr
Figure 22

Remark concerning necessity of PC connection:

All adjustments at the printer can be made via browser connection.
Most adjustments can also be made via key-operator menu.
In following cases a PC network connection is mandatory, as these settings
only can be made via browser pages.
• To enter site specific data
• To configure Logical printers
• To define a host profile for special Image or Connectivity settings
(Annotations, OEM Lut etc.)
The example screens for configuration user interfaces are further on

browser related. The path to access the screens is the same for local
keypad and browser.
The way of entering data is more complex at the local keypad, as all data
have to be entered via the available four navigation keys, the escape and
confirm key.
The printer default IP address is 169.254.10.10.

5 Printer Settings
The purpose of this section is to show additional settings of the printer that are
not covered by the Printer Installation Wizard.
The following table lists these settings.
Printer Setting Importance Accessible via ...* Details see...

Film calibration optional 5.1
Default densitometer optional 5.2
Film view optional 5.3
Beep on empty tray optional 5.4
RF Tag optional 5.5
Site data mandatory 5.6
*
Access via key-operator menu at the local keypad
Access via browser pages

(Service Engineer Tools or Key-Operator tools or Connectivity Tools)
INS.

5.1 Film Calibration
Accessible via menu: Key-operator menu - 2 Change settings - 4 Image

Quality - 1 General
Purpose of the setting: A) Define whether automatic calibration shall be

executed at insertion of a new film pack
B) If set on ON, define the number of filmpacks,
after which the film calibration shall be
executed.
Default value: ON - every 5 filmpacks
Example browser
Welcome to this
screen: DryStar 5300 printer
Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Default film calibration off

on
Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924

Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
Welcome to this
DryStar 5300 printer

Select frequency
Every 5 packs
536501fa.cdr
Figure 23

5.2 Default Densitometer

Quality - 1 General
Purpose of the setting: Define a default densitometer. Density values

displayed during calibration or the QC procedure
will be displayed re-calculated for this default
densitometer.
Default value: Macbeth TR924
Example browser
screen: Welcome to this

on
Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924

Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
536501fb.cdr
Figure 24

5.3 Film View Adjustment
Accessible via menu: 2 Change settings - 2 Input tray
Purpose of the setting: Change the film view to 'Back' in case the film curl
is desired to be towards the light box
Default value: Normal
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change input tray settings
Film view Normal

Back
Tag film format 14x17"
Overruling to film format 14x17"

11x14"
Tag film type DT2B
Drystar DT2B
Overruling to film type
Drystar DT2C

536501fx.cdr
Figure 25

5.4 Beep on empty Tray Adjustment
Accessible via menu: Key-operator menu - 2 Change settings - 1

General
Purpose of the setting: Adjust whether or not the customer shall be

informed via audible beeps about an empty tray.
Default value: Audible alarm on - beep 5 times
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change general settings

Date: 19 Oct. 2004
Time: 08 30 00
Language English
Chinese Simpl.
Japanese
Beep on empty tray 5 beeps

Keypad contrast (60 ... 80) 68 Typical 68
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50
* Site name
* Site address
* City
* Country code (tel)
* Telephone
Modem
* Department
* Contact person
* Delivery address
E-mail address
Comments
536501ff.cdr
Figure 26

5.5 Missing RF Tag Behavior Adjustment
Accessible via menu: Service menu - 2 Change settings - 2 Input Tray
Purpose of the setting: Define the behavior of the printer in case the RF
tag is not readable or available
Default value: Printing with Dmax=2.00
Example browser
Welcome to this
Service- Change input tray settings
If RF-tag is missing or malfunctioning

Printing with Dmax=2.00
Printing not possible
Film view Normal

Back
Tag film format 14x17"
Overruling to film format 14x17"

11x14"
Tag film type DT2B
Drystar DT2B
Drystar DT2C

536501fy.cdr
Figure 27

5.6 Entering Site Data
Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer tools - Enter

key-operator command session - 2 Change
settings - 1 General
Purpose: Fill in site data to have an entry in the infocounter
about the installation site.
Default value: None
• It is mandatory to fill in site data. Otherwise after each switch on / reboot

of the printer a hint is displayed to enter the site data.
Example browser
screen: Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change general settings

Date: 19 Oct. 2004
Time: 08 30 00
Language English
Chinese Simpl.
Japanese

Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50
* Site name
* Site address
* City
* Country code (tel)
* Telephone
Modem
* Department
* Contact person
* Delivery address
E-mail address
Comments
536501fz.cdr
Figure 28

6 Film Calibration
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for film
calibration
(1) Load the films the customer will

use. Refer to note below.
(2) Select in key-operator menu
In order to be useable this film should be absolutely dust free within the marked region!
'6 Calibration - 1 Film
Calibration'
(3) Follow the instructions on the
display.
The calibration film will be
printed and measured
automatically by the printer
(see Figure 29)
536501ga.cdr
Figure 29
The films delivered with the printer may only be used for test purposes.
INS.

7 Printer - Modality Connection

The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for
connection of the printer to the modality.
The following table lists these tasks.
Task Importance Accessible via * ... Details see...

Let the modality be mandatory Console of the 7.1
set-up modality
Set-up logical optional Browser pages 7.2
printers
Print diagnostic mandatory Console of the 7.3

and/or test images modality and / or
printer service menu
Adjust image optional Key-operator menu 7.4

settings and Browser pages
SIC.
*
Access via key-operator menu at the local keypad
Access via browser pages

(Service Engineer Tools or Key-Operator tools or Connectivity Tools)
7.1 Modality set-up
Each modality, from which the customer wants to print, needs the printer
DICOM network data, in order to be able to print on the printer.
(1) Let the printer be set-up at the modality.

(2) Tell the modality service engineer the following printer parameters
• Printer Type (Agfa Drystar 5300)
• IP address
• Called AE-title
• Available film formats

7.2 Logical Printers Set-up
(1) Check, whether the printer requires the "logical printer setup", i.e. to
setup more than one AE title for the printer. See flowchart below:
Logical Printer
Setup Decision
Flowchart
Check whether modality supports

more than one application (e.g. US + CR)
No Okay. Logical
Modality supports
Printer Setup not
> 1 application ?
required.
Yes
Check whether images of

different applications can
be adapted to required settings.
Example. US: Dmax 2.8; LUT: Kanamori
CT: Dmax: 3.1, LUT: linear
Adjustment Okay. Logical Printer

Yes Setup not required.
at modality
possible? Perform adjustments
at modality.
No
Create two logical printers.
Proceeding see this section.
536501mm.cdr
Figure 30

Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer Tools - DICOM

profile editor - Setup DICOM print SCP Servers
Purpose: Define more than one logical printer. This may be

required in case a modality sends images from
different applications to the printer. See also Info
next page
Default value: • Only one logical printer.

• Internal name: DEFAULT_SCP
• Called AE title: DS5300
Example browser HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup
screen: Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device:

One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom
print associations
Dicom Print SCP
Internal Name: DEFAULT_SCP

Called AE title: DS5300
Listen at Port: 104
Max. allowed associations: 10
Secure channel (SSL):
Comments:
OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel Changes require reboot
5365_Reg01_003_e.cdr
Figure 31
• The Called AE title is defined during the execution of the printer

installation wizard. It can also be adapted in the "DICOM Print SCP
Setup" screen.
• The number of logical SCP printers is not limited. As each configured

SCP server consumes resources of the printer, use as little SCP servers
as possible. Rule of thumb: Define max. 4 logical printers.

Enclosed an example where it is required to configure two logical SCP

printers:
• Printing is initiated at a PACS workstation.
• Two types of modalities as input.
o US images: Interpolation cubic bell with
smoothfactor 1,1
o CT images: Interpolation highres cubic with
smoothfactor -0.9.
Problem:
The PACS workstation has one AE title only. The Drystar 5300 does not
recognize, for which type of modality (CT or US) the user wants to print.
Solution (refer to "Figure 32: Example for logical printer setup" next page):
• Create one logical printer 'Drystar5300US' and one 'Drystar5300CT.
• Create two different host profiles for the two logical printers with the
required settings.
• In the PACS workstation setup both printers: The user has to select the
proper logical printer.

Required setting:
Print Cubic Bell 0.9
DS5300CT CT
DS5300CT
DS5300US
PACS Console
Required setting:
AE Title: PACS Ultrasound
Cubic Bell 1.1
AE Title 1: DS5300CT
AE Title 2: DS5300US
Logical Printer Setup (Dicom Print SCP Setup) in Drystar 5300
HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup
Dicom Print SCP Dicom Print SCP
Internal Name: DEFAULT_SCP Internal Name: US Printer

Called AE title: DS5300CT Called AE title: DS5300US
Listen at Port: 104 Listen at Port: 105
Max. allowed associations: 10 Max. allowed associations: 10
Secure channel (SSL): Secure channel (SSL):
Comments: Comments:
OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel
DICOM Host Profile Setup in Drystar 5300

HELP Host Profile: CR QS HELP Host Profile: CR QS Mammo
Nick Name: CT PACS Nick Name: US PACS

Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': PACS Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': PACS
Use this profile only for local SCP server: DEFAULT SCP Use this profile only for local SCP server: US Printer
........................................................... ...........................................................
........................................................... ...........................................................
Kernel: custom Edit Custom cubicBell 0.9 Kernel: custom Edit Custom cubicBell 1.1
........................................................... ...........................................................
........................................................... ...........................................................
........................................................... ...........................................................
........................................................... ...........................................................
OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
536401mr.cdr
Figure 32: Example for logical printer setup

In the example of Figure 32 the checkboxes before the "Kernel" parameters

are set.
This setting prevents, that the modality can overrule the adjusted parameter.
It always depends on the application, whether this is desired or not.
This has to be discussed with the modality service engineer and/or the
customer. See also section 7.4.3.
7.3 Printing of diagnostic and / or Test Images
(1) In the service menu select "3 Print Image - 1 Test images"
(2) Print a few medical_image and STI1 test images
(3) Check the image quality of the test images
(4) Print a few diagnostic images from the connected modalities.
(5) Compare them at the light box with the image on the monitor

7.4 Image Adjustments
For systematic image adjustment follow the flowchart below:
Image Adjustment
Flowchart
Make adjustments as described in

Connectivity Yes Connectivity Release Document.
Release Document
Refer to 6.4.1
available?
When finished, continue with next step.
No
Customer is Yes
Okay. No further image
satisfied with image adjustments required.
quality?
No
Required image Yes

Make adjustments at the modality.
adjustments can be Refer to 6.4.2
made at modality?
No No Customer is
satisfied with image
adjustments?
Perform image Yes

adjustments at the printer.
Refer to 6.4.3
536401mp.cdr Okay. No further image
adjustments required.
Figure 33

7.4.1 Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document
(1) In case a Connectivity Release Document for the Printer - Modality

Combination exists, perform the image adjustments as described there.
(2) When finished, print test images from the modality.
(3) Check the image quality together with the customer
(4) In case the image quality is not satisfying continue as described in the
flowchart (refer to Figure 33).
Connectivity Release Documents describe all parameters and required

adjustments to guarantee:
• Communication between modality and the printer
• Image adjustment at the modality and / or the printer.
Connectivity Release Documents are available in MEDNET, HealthCare

MEDNET Path Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application
7.4.2 Image Adjustments at the Modality
The Image adjustments at the modality are split up in contrast (refer to 7.4.2.1)
and sharpness adjustments (refer to 7.4.2.2):
7.4.2.1 Contrast Adjustment
(1) Select the required taste LUT (Look Up Table) at the modality. If possible
use the "Kanamori Taste LUT".
The Look-Up-Table is responsible for the contrast of the image (in

combination with Dmin and Dmax) and may be named at the modality as
follows:
• Taste LUT
• Perception LUT
• Correction LUT
• Presentation LUT

7.4.2.2 Sharpness Adjustment
(1) Check the DICOM conformance statement whether the modality sends
the images in page mode or image mode
(2) Select the required smooth factor at the modality to define the sharpness
of the image. Refer to Figure 34.
(3) When finished, print test images from the modality.
(4) Check the image quality together with the customer
(5) In case the image quality is not satisfying continue as described in the
flowchart (refer to Figure 33).
Interpolation Smooth Factors (DICOM values)
299 251 245 235

200
Cubic Bell
199 148 143 138 101

Cubic High Res
less sharp sharp too sharp
536401XK.CDR
Legend
Limits
Default
299 251 245 235 200
Useable values
Figure 34
Use Cubic Bell interpolation, when the modality sends the images in Page
Mode (images already composed for the film).
Use Cubic High Res interpolation, when the modality sends the images in
Image Mode (printer composes the different images for the film).

7.4.3 Image Adjustments at the Printer
• Via key-operator menu only the parameters Look-up table, Interpolation

and Dmax can be adjusted.
• Before these parameters can be changed, the modality has to be
configured at the printer. This is done either via Printer Installation Wizard
or via key-operator function "2 Change settings - 3 Network (DICOM) - 8
Add modality".
• This creates a DICOM Host Profile with the settings as defined in the
printer modality database (Corresponding printer parameter of the
Installation wizard or "Add modality" function: "Brand").
Important remark: Changing parameter via key-operator menu does not
automatically ensure that the value is applied.
Two situations can be distinguished
o In case the modality does not send a parameter (e.g. no Dmax value
sent), the value set in the printer is applied to the modality print job.
o In case the modality sends a parameter value, (e.g. Dmax = 2.8 O.D.)
this value still has priority above the value set in the printer. Even
when an empty value (" ") is sent.
This means, the value sent by the modality has higher priority then the value
set in the printer, and therefore it is always preferred to set the required
parameter value at the side of the modality.
If this cannot be done contact your local Application Specialist.


Quality - <Modality XYZ>
Purpose: Adjust Image Quality in case it cannot be adapted

at the modality
Default value: • Look-up table: Kanamori.
• Interpolation: Cubic HiRes -0.7.
• Dmax 3.10
Example screens:
Welcome to this Welcome to this

DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Daily used name CT2 Select kanamori like value:

Modality AE-title CT2_ARC 100
Linear
*
Look Up Table: Select abosulte smoothing factor: (advised = -0.7)
Kanamori
Kanamorilike -0.7
Interpolation:
**
Replication
Linear Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
CubicHi-res
CubicBell 536601fs.cdr
Maximum density: 280

285
290
295
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values) **
Possible Look up table settings 1.1 0.9 0.7

* 5.9 0.1
Cubic Bell
Dmax
Kanamori curve and
Kanamori like value 4.9 -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 -4.9
Cubic High Res
220 200
100 less sharp sharp too sharp
mori 75
Kana Legend
Dmin Input Limits
0 255 Default
Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori 5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1
Kanamori_like 200 = linear
Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic Reasonable values
Figure 35: Image Adjustments at the Printer

8 Acceptance Test
Purpose of the acceptance test:
Proof of printer reproduction capability of image on the monitor
Check according to criteria defined by

National Acceptance Test Procedure
Console
5365_Reg01_002_e.cdr
Figure 36
Perform the acceptance test according to national regulations.
Example for Germany: DIN6868 Part 56
The German DIN6868 Part 56 is similar to the Image Quality Control

procedure based on IEC1223-2-4.
The Image Quality Control procedure based on IEC 1223-2-4 is described in
the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E.
The time required for the steps within this subsection Taskcode:
should be entered in the service/installation report under
task code APPL.

9 Completion of installation
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for customer
instruction and backup of printer settings.
The following table lists these tasks.
Task Importance Accessible via ... Details see...

Instruct the Customer in mandatory -- 9.1
operation of the printer
Save settings on backup mandatory Key-operator 9.2
CF card menu
9.1 Customer Instruction
(1) Instruct the customer in following activities:
Activity Refer to User or

Reference Manual ....
Switching on the printer: Warm up time 5 min. User manual: "Switching on
the Drystar 5300"
Switching off the printer. It can take up to 20 User Manual: "Switching off
secs. until the printer switches off the Drystar 5300"
Loading films: RF tag and its function User Manual: "Loading
films"
Removing film jams Reference manual
"Troubleshooting: Clearing
of film jams"
Show dust stripes on a previous test film and Reference manual
how to prevent: "Troubleshooting Checklist"
• Keep printer always closed
• Clean TH resistor line with alcohol and
lint free cloth when dust stripes appear or
when printer displays "Printhead cleaning
(2) Hand over the user and reference manual to the customer
The time required for the steps within this subsection Taskcode:
should be entered in the service/installation report under
task code APPL.

9.2 Backup of Printer Settings
(1) Open the film tray to take out

the CF card for storage of the
machine specific data.
(2) Select Key-operator menu "4
Save Configuration"
(3) Follow the further instructions on
the LCD display
Figure 37
INS.

10 Appendix
10.1 Installation Checklist
Purpose of the installation checklist:

• to give an overview of all steps, that are required for the installation of the
printer
• to provide a reference to the corresponding section of the "Controls,
Connections and Set Up Procedure section", where the topic is further
explained.
# Step Task refer to Okay

Code section
Installation Prerequisites:
1. Check installation site prerequisites INS 2.1
2. Compare voltage indicated on type INS 2.2
label with available power supply
3. Check shipment completeness INS 2.3
4. Put the printer on a solid table INS 2.4
5. Remove transport protection locks INS 2.5
6. Connect the cables INS 2.6
7. For China only: Stick Chinese INS 2.7
warning label above existing one.
Printer Setup:
8. Adjust film positioner unit to 11x14" if INS 3.1
required
9. Load films INS 3.2
Printer Installation Wizard:

10. Go through printer installation wizard INS 4

Edition 1, Revision 10 Drystar 5300 Chapter 1 / A
# Step Task refer to ..... Okay

Code
Printer settings:
11. Adjust Film calibration (optional) APPL 5.1
12. Select Default densitometer (optional) APPL 5.2
13. Set Film view (optional) APPL 5.3
14. Adjust Beeps on empty tray (optional) APPL 5.4
15. Adjust behavior for unreadable RF APPL 5.5
Tag (optional)
16. Enter site data APPL 5.6
Film calibration
17. Perform a film calibration INS 6
Printer - Modality connection

18. Let the modality be set-up SIC 7.1
19. Set-up logical printers (optional) SIC 7.2
20. Print diagnostic and/or test images SIC 7.3
21. Adjust image settings (optional) APPL 7.4
Acceptance Test
22. Perform acceptance test APPL 8
Completion of installation
23. Instruct the Customer in operation of APPL 9.1
the printer
24. Save settings on backup CF card INS 9.2

Chapter 1 / B Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 10
10.2 Removal of Transport Protection
1 Open top cover. 2 Take wire cutter.
3 Cut 4 red straps. 4 Open hold-down bracket.
5 Remove foam sheet. 6 Close hold-down bracket.

Edition 1, Revision 10 Drystar 5300 Chapter 1 / C
7 Close top cover. 8 Open input tray.
9 Remove foam block from input tray. 10 Close input tray.
11 Remove drum screw.

Chapter 1 / D Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 10
10.3 Image Adjustments Overview
Step 1: Get up-to-date Connectivity Release Document

from MedNet, HealthCare Library
Path: General Info Connectivity & Application

Perform image adjustments as described at the Modality
and/or the Printer
Continue with Step 2, in case
the customer is not satisfied with the image or
for this modality no Connectivity Release Document exists
In case the printer is part of a solution (e.g. DR Mammography

Solution), refer to the solution specific requirements
concerning image adjustments.
Step 2: Try to adjust Contrast and Sharpness at the Modality
1
Contrast Use Kanamori Taste LUT
Adjustment If available also Dmax
Cubic High Res + smoothfactor 2

Sharpness (modality sends in image mode) or
Adjustment
Cubic Bell + smoothfactor 2
(modality sends in page mode)
Interpolation Smooth Factors (DICOM values)3

Software > SW Rel. 2
299 251 245 235

200
Cubic Bell
199 148 143 138 101

Cubic High Res
Legend
Limits
Default
1
251 245 235
Refer to note 1 next page
299 200 2
3
Useable value range Refer to note 3 next page
536501mh.cdr

Edition 1, Revision 10 Drystar 5300 Chapter 1 / E
Contrast and Sharpness adjustment at the Modality
1 The Look-Up-Table, which is responsible (in combination with Dmin and

Dmax) for the contrast of the image, may be named at the modality
Taste LUT
Perception LUT
Correction LUT
Presentation LUT
In case of "Presentation LUT" selection,

also enter lightbox illumination
and reflected ambient light.
2 Autoswitch to cubic bell functionality of the printer:

When the modality sends the images in page mode, no image scaling
(i.e. magnification or reduction) is required.
Cubic HighRes interpolation type does not sharpen the image
in this case.
Interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' sharpnes the image however,
independant whether scaling is required or not.
In case the Interpolation Type is adjusted to 'cubic high res' in the user
profile (= default), the printer switches to Cubic Bell automatically.
This mechanism can be adjusted in the "Controller Setup" Window.
HOME HELP Controller Setup

Access to this window:
Reduction icon on image: yes
Browser Pages
Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes:
Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes Service Tools

Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.9 ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
Scaling Setup
OK Changes require reboot
3 At printers with Software < SW Rel. 2 the interpolation smoothfactor

setting is different compared to printers with Software > SW Rel. 2.

Software < SW Rel. 2
299 221 217 207

200
Cubic Bell
199 135 125 115 101

Cubic High Res
536501mh.cdr

Chapter 1 / F Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 10
Step 3: In case Contrast and Sharpness adjustment

at the Modality not possible, adjust it at printer.
Can be made via
local keypad (see below)
Service Engineer Browser pages
(only via local Application Specialist)
Contrast and Sharpness adjustment

via key-operator menu "Image Quality"
Access via Keypad or Browser
Key-Operator Menu
3 Change Settings
5 Image Quality
Kanamori
Linear
Contrast *
<select Modality>
Kanamori_like
Adjustment
2 Select Other Cubic Bell
Cubic High Res
Linear
1 Look up table Replication
2 Interpolation
Sharpness* 2.80 - 3.20 O.D.
3 Dmax
Adjustment
*Refer to notes next page

Edition 1, Revision 10 Drystar 5300 Chapter 1 / G
Contrast and Sharpness adjustment at the printer
Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values)

5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1

Cubic Bell
4.9 -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 -4.9

Cubic High Res
At printers with Software < SW Rel. 2 the interpolation smoothfactor

Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel Values)
0.5 0.35 0.15 0.1

5.9
Cubic Bell
4.9 -1.7 -2.5 -3.3 -4.9

Cubic High Res
Perception LUT / Look up table settings at the Printer
Dmax
Kanamori curve and
Kanamori like value
220 Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori
200 Kanamori_like 200 = linear
100
Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic
mori 75
Kana
Dmin Input
0 255
Legend
Limits
Default
4.9 -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 -4.9
Useable values
536501mh.cdr

Chapter 1 / H Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 10
HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Functional Description
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365/100
► Purpose of this document

This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies always under normal conditions without any problems (nominal functional
sequence).
Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.

Revision Date compared to previous version 1.0
1.1 06 - 2007 • Added information about calibrations, diagnostic
software and thermal model.
Details see sections 4, 6 and 7.
• Removed information about flowcharts of module error
handling
Document Title
n.a. n.a.

06 - 2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 15946877

eq_02_functional_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
DD+DIS008.04E Functional Description
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.

Edition 1, Revision 1 DRYSTAR 5300 Chapter 2 / 2

06 - 2007 Type 5365/100 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
2 COMPARISON TO OTHER AGFA B&W PRINTERS ..............................................................5
2.1 Technical data...........................................................................................................................5
3 FILM CYCLE.............................................................................................................................6
3.1 Backside Printing recognition..................................................................................................13
4 CALIBRATIONS .....................................................................................................................14
5 MODULES ..............................................................................................................................15
5.1 Printer modules .......................................................................................................................15
5.2 Hardware.................................................................................................................................17
5.3 Modules and E-Lables ............................................................................................................19
6 DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE ....................................................................................................21

7 THERMAL MODEL.................................................................................................................23


1 INTRODUCTION
Purpose of the printer

• Medium resolution (320 dpi) DICOM network printer for 11x14"
and 14x17" films
Printing principle
• Direct thermal on thermo-sensitive, dry films. Blue based or clear based.
• 1 input tray and 1 output tray.
Main application
• Well suited to all medical applications, especially CT applications. Cannot be used
for mammography.
Connections
• Network connection only.
Service Concept
• Customer installable;
• No service PC needed for basic installation, maintenance and service, but is
convenient for entering detailed host profile settings, and needed for site data;
• Replacements mainly on Module level.
• All switches, sensors and motors are monitored via current measurement on main
engine controller (Vilis CPU);
• If online diagnosis does not detect the exact reason for the error, an offline check of
the modules can be performed via browser pages.
Digitizer:
ADC Compact +
Service
Host
ADC QS
Ultrasound
53
6 30
2a
d .cd
r
Printer
Figure 1: Typical network installation of a Drystar 5300


2 Comparison to other AGFA B&W printers

2.1 Technical data
POWER
Drystar 5300 Drystar 5302 Drystar 5500 (SW

(SW 2.0X) (SW 1.8X) 4.XX) / Drystar 5503
Weight 55 kg 90 kg 188 kg / 193 Kg
Power 100-240V, 50/60 Hz; 100-240V, 50/60 Hz; 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz;
Requirements 70W (standby), 70W (standby), 200W (standby),
250W (printing); 250W (printing); 450W (printing),
530 (peak) 530 (peak) 700 W (peak);
Auto switching power Auto switching power Auto switching power
supply supply supply
Throughput: 70/h (14x17") up to 75/h (14x17") up to 100/h (14x17") up to
86/h (11x14“) 140/h (8x10“) 160/h (8x10“)
Max. Density: > 3.0 O.D. > 3.0 O.D. ≥ 3.6 O.D.
(with Mammo license)
Resolution: 320 dpi 320 dpi 508 dpi
Number of 4480 4480 7104
resistors in TPH:
Grey levels 4096 out of 65535 4096 out of 65535 4096 out of 65535
Warm-up time: 3 minutes → queuing 4 minutes → queuing 3 minutes → queuing
5 minutes → printing 7 minutes → printing 5 minutes → printing
Available films DT2B / C DT2B / C DT2B / C + DT2M
Densitometer Fixed (CDM) Fixed (CDM) Horizontal scanning
(MDM)
Access time max. 75 secs. max. 77 secs max . 76 secs.
Film formats (inch) 11x14, 14x17 8x10, 10x12, 11x14, 8x10, 10x12, 11x14,
14x14, 14x17 14x14, 14x17
Film formats used 1 2 2 in Drystar 5500
simultaneously 3 in Drystar 5503
Max. diagnostic 4256 x 5174 (14 x17") 4358 x 5232 (14 x17") 6922 x 8368 (14 x17")
area 12 bit 12 bit 12 bit
→ 44 MB → 46 MB → 116 MB
Applications All medical All medical All medical
applications, except applications, except applications, incl.
mammography mammography mammography


3 Film Cycle
filmrun1.cdr
Figure 2: Filmrun through the printer
Description of one film cycle:
An image is sent from the imaging device to

the Drystar 5300. The user presses "Print"
on the console of the host system or
transmits images from an archive to the
Drystar 5300.
Figure 3


The image in DICOM format is sent via

network to the Drystar 5300, where it is
received by the Vilis / Themis / RAM
module and stored as 12 bit/pixel raw data
on the Themis board into the RAM.
Figure 4
As soon as all the individual images

pertaining to a specific film printout are
loaded, the image information is composed.
This image information which is ready for
printing is also referred to as Image
Composition Map (ICM). In contrast to
other printers, such as the Drystar 5500, for
example, the ICM is only created and
stored in the RAM of the Themis board and
not on the hard disk, as this is replaced by
a CF card.
Figure 5


Not only the individual images, but the

complete images of the image-queue are in
the RAM. The consequence is, that in case
of a sudden loss of power all images of the
queue are lost. When the Drystar is
switched off by means of the On/Off button,
the power supply starts the shutdown only
after all images in the queue were printed
out.
Figure 6
The RAM memory is 512 MB, which is

sufficient for the regular usage. In
connection with some modalities however
problems may occur, if the RAM of the
Drystar 5300 is full and no images can be
accepted. Generally the modalities are
informed of this state via DICOM messages
and they will wait with the new image
transfer. Some modalities cannot process
this DICOM message and emit a warning
message. This problem can be avoided by
using a HIPAX DICOM Print Broker or by
enlarging the memory size by the optional
1 GB RAM module.
Figure 7


Depending on the image size, the installed

RAM memory (512 MB or optional 1 GB
RAM) and the way of image data transfer
(image mode or page mode) the printer is
capable to keep between 13 and 645
images. The Installation Planning document
(Refer to chapter 11) lists the possible
amount of queued images in chapter
"Accessories". If the limit for the image
queue is reached, the printer cannot accept
any image data anymore.
Figure 8
Via the optional HIPAX DICOM Printbroker
it is possible to extend the memory size of
the queue to several GB.
When creating the Image Composition Map

(ICM), the Themis board executes a variety
of compensations specific to the thermal
head and image processing algorithms
depending on the image quality settings.
Figure 9
Each pixel value of the image on the Image

Composition Map translates into a certain
electrical voltage, which is composed for
each of the 4480 resistors.
Figure 10


As soon as the image is completely

composed on RAM, the pickup motor M3
takes a film sheet from the input tray and
transports it to the (two redundant) film
detection sensors S4 and S13, the input
sensors of the TPH.
Figure 11
The cam drive motor M2 starts and moves

the thermal head towards the drum.
Figure 12


Simultaneously, the pickup motor M3

moves a few turns backward. The film is
now free for further transport by the print
drum.
Figure 13
The drum motor M1 starts. Meanwhile, the

cam drive motor M2 has narrowed the
distance between thermal head and drum
that much that the film is picked up by the
drum. The film edge is already approx. 5
mm behind the TH heater line.
Figure 14


Now 42 lines black frame are printed

followed by the diagnostic information.
Figure 15
The film is transported towards the "Output

module.” The CDM (Contactless
Densitometer) checks whether the film was
inserted the right way. This is called
"Backside Printing Recognition". See
section 3.1.
The "output sensor S5" detects the film.
Figure 16
When printing is finished the cam drive

motor M2 moves back into home position
and drum motor M1 stops.
Figure 17


The output motor M4 transports the film out

of the printer into the output tray. The print
cycle is finished.
Figure 18
3.1 Backside Printing recognition
The printer checks when the film arrives at the CDM, whether a small rectangle in the
center of the film, at the very beginning of the printable area, has Dmax.
In case the density is below a certain threshold, the film must have been inserted wrong.
The printer stops printing, informs the user of back-side printing, to check the correct
positioning of the film and to remove the film jam.
Black Rectangle for
Backside Printing Recognition
Distance
TH - CDM
Film printed on the

Diagnostic Area Non-Emulsion side
("Backside").
Border
(O.D. between Dmin and Dmax; Backside printing
Refer to Host Profile parameter "Border Density")
Remove film jam
536602dc.cdr
Figure 19: Backside printing recognition


NOTE:
The emulsion side in general is slightly smoother Noise
than the backing layer. This can be heard by (dB)
wiping over it → The backing layer makes much Backing layer
more noise. Emulsion layer
The backing layer has to be on top when the film

is laying in the tray.
4 Calibrations
The following table lists the different Drystar 5300 calibrations:
CDM Calibration TH Profile Calibration Film Calibration
Film printed
Purpose To determine new reference To reduce vertical macro banding To measure the film sensitometry
values for the CDM. This is done (vertical density irregularities). and to use these values for
via an external densitometer. Only macro density internal reference, so that the
compensation is possible (in printer behaves linear regarding
opposite to micro compensation density reproduction. In addition,
in production) the maximum density is adapted
To be done ..... • Whenever the internal • Unacceptable line artifacts • At maintenance
densitometer has to be visible in medical service test
• To compensate small density
adapted to an external image
variations of the new film,
densitometer (for image quality
when a new film package is
control)
used.
• if density reproduction check is
not ok
• After output module
replacement
Automatically No No yes, but only if switched on*
done ...
* to be switched on via menu '2 Change settings - 4 Image Quality - 1 General - Select Default for Film Calibration'.


5 Modules
This section is divided in following sub-sections:
Item Section
Printer modules 5.1
Hardware 5.2
Modules and E-Lables 5.3
5.1 Printer modules
Figure 20: Printer Modules


# Name E-Label* Purpose Also used in MOD #

1 TPH filter Module - Dust filter for TPH cooling fan Drystar 5302 MOD20
2 TPH cooling fan - TPH cooling - MOD12
3 Print Drum Module Yes Film drive during printing - MOD03
4 OSB Switch board - TH power Drystar 5302 MOD21
4 Thermal Head Yes Image transfer to film Drystar 5302 MOD04
6 Drum drive module Yes Drum drive Drystar 5302 MOD06
7 Power Supply Yes Main power supply for all consumers - MOD08
8 Pickup module Yes Film drive out of film tray towards TH - MOD02
9 Display Module Yes User Interface Drystar 5302 MOD09
10 Input Block Module Yes Tag reading; empty film detection - MOD01
11 Output Module Yes Film transport out of printer. Density - MOD05

measurement with integrated CDM
12 Cam shaft drive Module - TH position adjustment (printing / film - MOD11
transport in and out of TH section)
13 Input Sensors Module - Filmrun check before print drum - MOD10
14 RAM Module - Keeps operating system and queue Drystar 5302 MOD15
15 Themis Module** - CPU (Image processing) Drystar 5302 MOD14
16 Vilis Module Yes CPU (Film run) - MOD07
*For description of E-Label refer to section 5.3.

**In SW < Rel. 2.0.0_C1 the Themis and RAM module are part of MOD07: Vilis/Themis/RAM module.
NOTE:
This list does not show all spare parts. Parts that have no real function during printing,
like the covers or hand grips are not listed. Refer to chapter 5 for a complete spare
parts list.


5.2 Hardware
This section shows an overview of all hardware components and lists their purpose.
Key 6 board Vilis Board Internal

CF card
Display 128 MB
RS232
ETH IDE
External
Sensors CF drive
Motors
Power Supply
Data RS232
Thermal Head Themis board
Power 512 MB RAM
OSB Board
536502da.cdr
Figure 21: Hardware Components Overview
Hardware Component Description

Themis Board • CPU. Keeps the operating system and application
software in RAM (518 MB or optional 1 GB) during
operation.
• Keeps a flash EPROM for Bootup
• Performs image processing
Vilis Board • Controls all sensors and motors
• Controls the power supply
• Provides for following connections:
- CF card reader
- Ethernet 10/100 Mb/sec. twisted pair interface
- RS232 service port


Key 6 Board • Controls the display with 122 (width) x

32 (height) pixels
• Controls all buttons and LEDs
required for operation
Internal CF card • Keeps the operating system and all
application software.
External CF drive • To save or install data via CF card
type II
Thermal head • Transfers the diagnostic data (pixels)
via heating elements to the heat
sensitive film
OSB board • Switch board for the different TH
heating elements
• Provides the power for heating up the
resistor elements
Power supply • Supplies all voltages for the printer
(+3,3 V, + 5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +20 V,
+24 V, + 55V)
• Connected via RS232 interface to the
Vilis Board, to allow saving temporary
data before switch off


5.3 Modules and E-Lables
The E-Label is a small EPROM attached to the module, which keeps information about
the module, like e.g.
• Name
• Hardware Version
• Nr. of print cycles
• Last error code
An example for the readout of an E-Label is given in Figure 23
In case the E-label is defective or not connected the printer issues a warning message.
Printing is possible however also without E-label.
The table in section 5.1 lists, which module has an E-Label.
Figure 22: Example for E-Label at Power Supply


_____________________________
Name....................................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/name
Name....................................Value OUTPUT ASSY
HardwareVersion.................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/hardwareVersion
HardwareVersion.................Value 3
OrderNumber.......................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/orderNumber
OrderNumber.......................Value
PartNumber..........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/partNumber
PartNumber..........................Value
RdeNumber..........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rdeNumber
RdeNumber..........................Value A333462.3
SerialNumber.......................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/serialNumber
SerialNumber.......................Value 40
FirstUseDate........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/firstUseDate
FirstUseDate........................Value
LastUseDate........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastUseDate
LastUseDate........................Value
HoursOfOperation...............Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/hoursOfOperation
HoursOfOperation...............Value 1876
NrOfCycles...........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/nrOfCycles
NrOfCycles...........................Value 21166
LastRepairDate....................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastRepairDate
LastRepairDate....................Value
RepairSiteName...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/repairSiteName
RepairSiteName...................Value
NrOfRepairs.........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/nrOfRepairs
NrOfRepairs.........................Value 0
LastRepairCode...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastRepairCode
LastRepairCode...................Value
LastModuleSpecificErrors...Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastModuleSpecificErrors
LastModuleSpecificErrors...Value HC205007
NominalCalIntensity............Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/nominalCalIntensity
NominalCalIntensity............Value 9500
MinCalIntensity...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/minCalIntensity
MinCalIntensity...................Value 8500
MaxCalIntensity...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/maxCalIntensity
MaxCalIntensity...................Value 10500
_____________________________
RandomUri
RandomValue
backToMain produce request randomRequest reconfigureThisELabel
Figure 23: Example for E-Label content


6 Diagnostic Software
An online diagnosis software is permanently monitoring the correct feedback signal and
timing of the motors and sensors which are connected to the Vilis Board.
In case of a mismatch an error is issued.
Example message:
MOD04
Please replace module
Application Online Vilis CPU

Printer Software Diagnosis
Software
Operating System
536502aa.cdr
Figure 24
Errors are internally divided into • incidents

• warnings
• defects


In general incidents are user clearable, warnings are "key-operator"

(= experienced user or hospital technician) clearable, whereas defects have to be
repaired by service personnel.
Warnings and error messages are written into the infocounter.
Errors: Classification and treatment

Filmrun
Step 1
user
clearable
Message in plain text.

Online E.g. 'close upper cover'
Diagnosis
key-operator
clearable
incident
everything no warning Message in plain text:
okay? E.g. CDM not calibrated
defect
yes
Infocounter
service
clearable
Filmrun
Step n Error message:
HC10907:
Suspension motor M3 not
connected or malfunctioning
536602af.cdr
Figure 25


7 Thermal Model
• The thermal model is a mathematical description of the interaction

Film – print head.
• The thermal model uses parameters like film thickness, thermal conductivity of the
film, TH temperature; environmental temperature, print speed and resolution of the
print head.
• There are two versions of the thermal model: Thermal Model V1 and its successor,
the TMML. See also table below.
• The TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; known as 'A # Sharp') is an improved
thermal model compared to Thermal Model V1 causing a more precise
reproduction of the image. It is available in the printer as of SW Rel. 2.0.0_C1.
Heat of following
pixel
Heat of previous Drum
pixel temperature
Heat of neighbor
pixel TH temperature
Thermal Model
Mathematical
Pixel Stream Thermal Model
Description of Pixel Stream
Interaction Film - TH
Parameter Z Thermal conductivity

film
Parameter Y
Thermal sensitivity
film
Parameter X
Figure 26
Thermal Model Used in SW Comment

V1 1.8X and 1.9X Also used in
• Drystar 3000
• Drystar 4500 < SW Rel. 3
• Drystar 5500 < SW Rel. 3
TMML ≥ 2.X Also named "A#sharp". Excellent image
sharpness


Repair and Service
DD+DIS008.04E Machine specific safety instructions and hints for repair work
Chapter 3.1:
List of contents
1 Machine specific safety equipment, precautions

and hints .................................................................... 1
1.1 Safety equipment for repair work........................................... 1
1.2 Safety precautions of the printer ........................................... 1
1.2.1 Safety switch ....................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable .............................................................. 3
1.3 Guidelines regarding safety during service work................. 4
1.3.1 General safety guidelines for service work ......................................... 4
1.3.2 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements................. 4
1.3.3 Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection.......................... 5
1.3.4 Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head.......................... 5
2 Safety check upon completion of the repair work . 6
2.1.1 Visual check ........................................................................................ 6
2.1.2 Electrical check ................................................................................... 7
2.1.3 Practical example for Drystar 5300: .................................................... 8
Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5300 Chapter 3.1 / I

(Type 5635/100) Agfa Group Confidential
Repair and Service
1 Machine specific safety equipment, precautions and

hints
This section describes all machine specific safety aspects to be considered
during repair work on the printer.
It is divided into the following sub-sections:
Sub-section Details see..

Safety equipment for repair work 1.1
Safety precautions of the printer 1.2
Guidelines regarding safety during repair work 1.3
1.1 Safety equipment for repair work
During repair work at printed circuit boards it is mandatory to wear an anti-

static wrist strap (order no.: CM+9.9999 0830.0).
This avoids static discharges on electronic components. Static discharges
can lead to defective components on the printed circuit boards.
1.2 Safety precautions of the printer
This section describes all machine specific safety precautions built into the
printer.
It lists following safety precautions:
Safety precaution Details see..

Safety switch 1.2.1
Supplementary ground cable 1.2.2
Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5300 Chapter 3.1 / 1

Repair and Service
Machine specific safety instructions and hints for repair work DD+DIS008.04E
1.2.1 Safety switch
• The machine has one safety

switch, located below the top
cover.
• It serves as a safety feature if a
someone opens the machine (e.g.
to remove a film jam).
When the top cover is opened, the
safety switch is activated.
It cuts off the voltage to all motors,

and the print head.
5365_Reg03_01_001_e.eps
Figure 1
For service purposes the safety switch, SW1 can be overridden by

means of a service key (refer to Figure 1). In this case there is a risk of
injuries by moving mechanical or current-carrying electrical parts.
Before the printer is closed the service key must be removed again,
otherwise the mechanism of the safety switch may get damaged.
Chapter 3.1 / 2 DRYSTAR 5300 Edition 1, Revision 0

Agfa Group Confidential (Type 5635/100)
Repair and Service
1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable
To meet the regulations for the printer according to the machine standards
EN60601-1 there is usually no Supplementary ground cable required. This
also applies to installations in the patient's room.
Exception:
• The printer is located in the patient's room AND is connected to
equipment not corresponding to EN60601-1.
In this case a Supplementary ground

cable must be connected to the
provided connector at the back of the
printer.
For this purpose a Supplementary

ground cable is required which is not
included in the machine shipment.
Specifications of the cable:

• green/yellow color, 5365_Reg03_01_002_e.eps
• cross-section of 4 mm2.
Figure 2

Repair and Service
1.3 Guidelines regarding safety during service work
This section describes the safety guidelines to be considered during service

work.
Safety precaution Details see..

General safety guidelines for service work 1.3.1
Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements 1.3.2
Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection 1.3.3
Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head 1.3.4
1.3.1 General safety guidelines for service work
The following points must be observed during all repair or maintenance work:
Make sure to always disconnect the machine to be repaired or maintained
from the mains.
• Caution: Even when the machine is switched off, as long as it has not
been disconnected from the mains some components may still be
supplied.
• Caution: If the mains connection is absolutely necessary for the
respective action (repair and maintenance work), this job must only be
done by trained personnel.
• Before printer service or replacing conductive parts always switch off the
printer and disconnect the power.
• Before switching the printer off make sure that there are no films being
printed at this time.
• Replace defective parts with original spare parts only.
1.3.2 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements
When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must
be observed:
• Always switch off the printer and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
• When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never
touch any parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
• PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry
a PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
• Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected
from electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.

Repair and Service
1.3.3 Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection
Most of the Service PCs are not in compliance with the EN60601-1
standards. Therefore a Service PC which is to be connected via RS232 or
RJ45 interface to a printer must not be connected to the mains but must be
operated on its internal battery supply (low voltage). Only in this case the
printer keeps its EN60601-1 compliance.
However, if the service PC is connected to the RS232 or RJ45 interface and
has to be connected to the mains, take care, that nobody touches the printer.
1.3.4 Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head
During operation the Thermal Print

Head gets hot (up to 70 °C).
• Avoid contact with the Thermal

Print Head due to the risk of burn.
• Observe the corresponding sticker
on the Thermal Print Head.
5365_reg003_01_003_e.eps
Figure 3

Repair and Service
2 Safety check upon completion of the repair work

Upon completion of any repair job, especially after replacing or installing
conductive parts, check the following points as a routine safety check.
Country specific regulations must be observed as well.
Safety check Details see..

Visual check 2.1.1
Electrical check 2.1.2
2.1.1 Visual check

• Make sure that the power cord and the cables inside the machine do not
show any signs of damage.
• Make sure that the ventilation slots before the print head and the power
supply are free and that the print head and power supply ventilation is
working properly.
• Make sure, that no obstacles can cause stumbling (e.g. cables), and no
defective covers, sharp edges or parts sticking out in the vicinity of the
machine can cause injuries.
• Make sure that no smoldering spots or wrong cabling is visible.
• Make sure that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present.

Repair and Service
2.1.2 Electrical check
In case of repairs in on parts of the mains supply check the protective earth
resistance according to the national regulations. See Figure 4.
Example Germany 1
(according to Standard
VDE 0701 part 1):
1. Internal circuit of the machine to
PE
be tested. 3 4
2. Gauge to measure the grounding
resistance. 2
3. Connection between the gauge
and the machine ground
4. Connection between the gauge 5365_reg03_01_004_e.eps
and conductive, touchable parts in

the machine.
Figure 4

Repair and Service
2.1.3 Practical example for Drystar 5300:
• Use a multimeter that is capable to measure a resistance < 1 Ohm.

• Put one probe at the ground connector of the mains input.
• Put the other probe at a few metallic parts that the customer can touch
(in the example in Figure 5 the frame below the rear cover).
• The electrical resistance has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement is > 0.1 Ohm, check
the printer for loose grounding connections !
Example
5365_Reg03_01_005_e.eps
Figure 5

Repair and Service
DD+DIS346.05E Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means
Chapter 3.2
List of Contents
1 Machine specific Tools.............................................................................. 1

1.1 Mandatory Tools ....................................................................................................1
1.2 Optional Tools ........................................................................................................2
1.2.1 Minimum Configuration of the Service PC ...............................................................3
1.2.2 Recommended Configuration of the Service PC .....................................................3
2 Software Tools ........................................................................................... 4
2.1 Key-operator Menu on the local Keypad .............................................................5
2.2 Infocounter .............................................................................................................5
2.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report .............................................7
2.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command session ...............................................8
2.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter ..............................................................................8
2.3 Test Images ..........................................................................................................10
2.3.1 Testimage STI1......................................................................................................11
2.3.2 Testimage STI2......................................................................................................13
2.3.3 Testimage SMPTE .................................................................................................14
2.3.4 Testimage Medical_Image .....................................................................................16
2.3.5 Testimage LinCheck ..............................................................................................17
2.3.6 Testimage TQ-18 ...................................................................................................18
2.4 Show Error Codes................................................................................................19
2.5 Web Pages ............................................................................................................19
2.5.1 Operator Tools .......................................................................................................21
2.5.2 Key-Operator Tools................................................................................................22
2.5.3 Service Engineer Tools ..........................................................................................23
2.5.4 Connection to the Web Pages ...............................................................................26
2.6 Printer Logging ....................................................................................................30
2.6.1 Required Information for the Support Center .........................................................30
2.6.2 Printer Bootup-Message ........................................................................................32
2.7 ADVP .....................................................................................................................36
3 Software Installation.................................................................................38
3.1 SW Update: Loading a SW Patch .......................................................................38
3.1.1 Software Update via CF card .................................................................................39
3.1.2 Software Update via a remote Computer...............................................................39
3.2 Emergency SW Installation on a new, empty internal CF Card .......................40
3.3 Emergency SW Installation on a Printer in "Error - System Failure" State ....42

Edition 1, Revision 7 Drystar 5300 Chapter 3.2/I
2006-01-26 Type 5365/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
1 Machine specific Tools

In addition to the conventional service tools which every service engineer has
in his toolbox, the following tools are required for service on the printer:
1.1 Mandatory Tools

The mandatory tools are required for repair, troubleshooting or maintenance of
the printer.
Tool Part Number Purpose
Anti-static wrist strap CM+9.9999.0830.0 To avoid static discharges
on electronic components
Cleaning tissue (box of 50 CM+309931.0 To clean the TH
pieces)
Densitometer* To be bought locally To perform CDM
calibration
Ink Eraser 'Pelikan' 10+999991176.0 For the 'dry TH cleaning'

procedure
Loop 8x CM+9.9579.9904.0 To check image quality of

films at the lightbox
Service key CM+9.0426.6309.0 To override the safety

switch
Standard ruler (1mm) Commercially For horizontal image
available adjustment
*As DT film used in the Drystar printers has a slightly different color
compared to conventional films, different densitometers give different density
readings, depending on the light source.
To make a correct density measurement use only a calibrated densitometer

MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag
D200-2. Other densitometers are not supported.

Edition 1, Revision 7 Drystar 5300 Chapter 3.2/1
Repair and Service
Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means DD+DIS346.05E
1.2 Optional Tools

The optional tools are required in exceptional cases only.
Tool Part Number Purpose
Crossed network EB+72010270 To get access to the printer
cable or commercially homepage, in case access via the
available hospital network is not possible.
RS232 null-modem EB+44160021 To get access to the printers
cable for the Service terminal level. Only required in
PC (SUB D 9F/9F) exceptional cases for
troubleshooting.
Compact Flash EB+72010600 To read/write the CF-cards on a
reader/writer USB Desktop/Service PC.
PCMCIA CF-card EB+72010160 To read/write the CF-card on the
adapter Service PC.
External CF-card CM+343356.0 To install and/or save software &
128 MB data.
Service PC Commercially To perform different service actions
available. (access to the printer homepage;
evaluate infocounter etc.)
See also 1.2.1
and 1.2.2 on
page 3.

Chapter 3.2/2 Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 7
Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5365/100) 2006-01-26
Repair and Service
1.2.1 Minimum Configuration of the Service PC

The following specification is an absolute minimum configuration for the
Service PC:
Type Laptop
Screen VGA compatible, 800x600 Pixel
Mouse integrated
CPU Pentium, 133 MHz
RAM 64 Mbytes
Hard disk 2 Gbytes
Disk drive 3.5 ‘ – 1.44 Mbytes
CD-ROM drive 24-times
Serial port COM1 or COM2 available
Network board Ethernet ≥ 10 Mbps
Operating system Windows 95, 98 or NT
Browser Internet Explorer ≥ 5.0
Modem analog 56 Kbps or ISDN
As the printer has a CF card reader integrated, it is important to have a

Service PC with CF card reader (USB or PCMCIA)
1.2.2 Recommended Configuration of the Service PC

The national Agfa GICS department (Global Information and Communication
Services) is responsible for selection and configuration of the Service PC.
The actual specification is available via Agfa Intranet: Follow the link:
Agfa Intranet – IT helpdesk - GICS Intranet - Infrastructure Standards - Agfa
standards for PCs, laptops, printers, organizers, mobiles,...
For employees not directly working at Agfa - and so not getting the service
PC directly from GICS, we recommend to use the minimum configuration of
the Service PC mentioned above as a guideline regarding PC hardware and
software.

Repair and Service
2 Software Tools
Following software tools are available
Software Tool Purpose Details see..
Key-operator Perform most of the required service 2.1
menu on the local actions
keypad
Infocounter Troubleshooting 2.2
Test images Troubleshooting image faults; 2.3
Confirmation of perfect image quality
Show error codes View reason, meaning and cure of error 2.4
codes
Web Pages Perform DICOM attribute adjustments, 2.5
e.g. image adjustments
Logging View the online logging for 2.6
troubleshooting purposes
ADVP Test the DICOM communication 2.7
between modality and printer
Besides the functions offered in the Service menu and the WebPages no
other service software is available nor required.

Repair and Service
2.1 Key-operator Menu on the local Keypad
PURPOSE The key-operator menu allows most of the actions that are required for
installation, repair and maintenance of the printer.
USE (1) Press the Key-operator menu key

to select the Key-operator
menu.
(2) With the and keys select
the desired menu, (or the desired
character when entering text).
(3) Use the and keys to
select the desired digit.
(4) Press to confirm a selection or
to cancel.
536601ga.cdr
Figure 1
NOTES (1) The Key-operator menu is also available via the Web pages
(username: drystar, password: 5300).
(2) For a complete description of the Key-operator functions, please refer to
the DRYSTAR 5300 Reference manual.
An overview of all key-operator menus is available in section 3.7,
‘Software menus, Settings’.
2.2 Infocounter
PURPOSE The infocounter is used for troubleshooting purposes and for investigation of
the printer history before maintenance.
It contains following information:
- General information about the printer
- Information about the installation site of the printer
- Information about the configuration and hardware components of the
printer
- Statistics about service interventions
- Statistics about machine reliability
- Error history
This information about the printer is located in a persistent database.
Every 10 minutes there is an automatic update of the database on the
internal CF card.

Repair and Service
A copy of the infocounter data is always stored in the battery RAM of the
printer. At software installation the contents of the battery RAM are written to
the internal CF card.
This guarantees, that the infocounter data are not lost after exchange of the
internal CF card.
To view the infocounter a service PC is required.

Two possibilities exist to get the infocounter on the Service PC:
# Type of Infocounter analysis: Refer to ...

A Via Printers Infocounters Report 2.2.1
B Via Service Command session 2.2.2
We recommend to use for Infocounter Analysis method A, 'Via Printers

Infocounters Report', as this is the fastest way to access the infocounter.
Method B, 'Via Service Command session ' might be useful, when you can
access a PC in the hospital network for a short time, to save the infocounter
file on the printer CF card for analysis on the Service PC.

Repair and Service
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
HOME General information
List of errors
A Printer Infocounters report
DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter key-operator command session
Enter service command session B
Release remote command session
Scalingtools
Connectivity Setup
DICOM profileWelcome
editor to this
7 Service Actions LPD ProfileDryStar
Editor 5300 printer
Network configuration
5 Logging Printqueue editor
Service - Loggings
Controller logging
2. Infocounters
1. To printer flash card
Module Modules
2. To remote computer
repair
Go back
536509cf.cdr
Figure 2
2.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report

(1) Connect the Service PC to the
network Service PC
(2) Start the browser (Internet
Explorer ≥ 5)
(3) Enter the IP address of the
printer in the address window.
(4) Select menu "Service Engineer
Tools - Printer Infocounters
Report" 536532el.cdr
(5) Analyze the infocounter file as

described in section 2.2.3, Figure 3
How to evaluate the Infocounter

Repair and Service
2.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command session

network Service PC
Explorer ≥ 5)
(3) Enter the IP address of the printer
in the address window.
Tools - Enter Service Command
Session - 7 Service Actions - 5 536532el.cdr
Logging - 2 Infocounters"
(5) Save the infocounter file to the Figure 4
service PC or the CF card.
(6) Unzip the
ICN_drystar5300_xxxx_DATE.zip
(xxxx stands for serial number)
file
(7) Analyze the infocounter.txt file as
described in section 2.2.3,
2.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter
Infocounters.txt evaluation
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
1.1 Serial number and Compare device serial number with chapter 8
Installation date ‘Manufacturing Standard Modification’ to
determine whether the device possibly requires a
modification.
Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), ‘HW Modification
History’, to check already made modifications.
1.4 Software Info Compare the currently installed SW version with
the latest SW version described in chapter 3.8,
SW releases, patches.

Repair and Service
infocounter
2.3 Reliability Should normally be not higher than 0.05. Higher
fault rates need a thorough investigation.
3.3 Hardware Modification By comparing the status of the device with the
History available modifications (refer to Technical
Documentation chapter 8) the exact hardware
status can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it
history can be determined, whether a recent software
upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite
often in the error list in the past
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints)
have to be investigated: They may reduce the
throughput of the device.
5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the last days,
how often they appeared as well as the CBF
(cycles between failures) of these errors. This
gives an overview of the current status of the
machine.
5.8 Error list (sorted by Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the
relative) and technical documentation, chapter 3.3,
‘Troubleshooting’.
5.9 Error list (sorted by
total):

Repair and Service
2.3 Test Images
PURPOSE The test images are used to check the complete printer function as well as
checking the image quality and certain adjustments
The list enclosed gives an overview of the different test images. This list is
based on software release 2.0.0_C1.
Name / Purpose Thumbnail picture Details see..

'STI1' 2.3.1
Composed of many different test
images to check all aspects of
image quality.
'STI2' 2.3.2
Composed of many different test
images to check all aspects of
image quality.
‘SMPTE’ 2.3.3
Standard test image for evaluation
of image quality.
‘Medical_image’ 2.3.4
Test image to check, whether
image artifacts, which are slightly
visible in one of the technical
images, are also visible in a
medical test image.
‘LinCheck’ 2.3.5
Test image with 11 increasing grey
values. Used for density
reproduction check.
‘TQ-18’ 2.3.6
Standard Mammography test
image for evaluation of contrast
visibility.
Only available for
software ≥ Rel. 2.0.0_C1

Repair and Service
2.3.1 Testimage STI1
PURPOSE Composed of many different test images to check all aspects of image
quality.
USAGE (1) In the browser pages select menu

'Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3
Print Testimage - 1 Test image -
STI1.ZIP'.
(2) The test image as displayed in
Figure 5 will be printed.
Figure 5
EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the

lightbox as follows:
(1) Field 1 contains a continuous
grey wedge from grey value 0 to
255.
Check: no single grey steps may

be visible (in case single grey
steps are visible, this is called
'contouring'. The naming for this
artifact is derived from the contour
lines in a hiking map).
Figure 6

Repair and Service
(2) Field 2 consists of 256 small squares, with grey values from 0 to 255.
Each square has inside another smaller square, with a grey level which is
2 grey steps darker than the surrounding square.
Check: all 256 squares must be visible. In addition, a contrast difference
must be visible between the individual square and the small square
inside.
(3) Field 3 contains a flat field with density value 2.0.
Check: no stripes in any direction may be visible.
In case an artifact in the image can be observed, refer to chapter 3.3,

troubleshooting for symptom, reason and cure.

Repair and Service
2.3.2 Testimage STI2
PURPOSE Composed of several different test images to check most aspects of image
quality.

STI2.ZIP'.
Figure 7

2
(1) Field 1 contains white and black
lines / dots of 1, 2 and 3 pixel 1
width
Check: all lines / dots must be

visible
(2) Field 2 consists of a SMPTE
testimage. Refer to 2.3.3
(3) Field 3 consists of a flatfield with
Dmax 1.0 3
Check: No line artifacts in
horizontal or vertical direction
may be visible.
536532em.cdr
Figure 8

Repair and Service
2.3.3 Testimage SMPTE
PURPOSE Standard test image for evaluation of image quality and for trouble shooting
(see chapter 3.3.).
USAGE (1) In the key-operator menu select '3

Print Image - 1 Testimage -
SMPTE_xxx.tif'.
• SMPTE_lin.TIF: Taste LUT

linear. Dmax = Dmax Printer
• SMPTE_l300.TIF: Taste LUT
linear. Dmax = 3.0
• SMPTE_kan.TIF: Taste LUT
Kanamori. Dmax = Dmax Printer
Figure 9

Repair and Service

(1) Fields 1 (4x) consist of 6 squares
with horizontal and vertical black
and white stripes (1, 2 and 3
pixels wide).
Check: Each of the 6 squares

must show constant distance
between the black and white lines
(no interferences may be visible,
leading to unequal distances).
(2) Fields 2 (4x) have the same
pattern as fields 1, but less
contrast
Figure 10
Check: All 6 squares must be visible.
(3) Fields 3 (3x) consist of several squares with the same density.
Check: The individual squares must show constant density. No stripes or

other artifacts.
(4) Field 4 consists of a black square (100% black) with a smaller grey
square inside (95% black)
The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must be a
smaller square with slightly lower density.
(5) Field 5 consists of a white square (0% black) with a smaller grey square
inside (5% black)
Check: The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must
be a smaller square with slightly higher density.
(6) Field 6 consists of a black square (100% black).
Check: The square must show Dmax (default: 3.2 O.D.)

(7) Fields 7 consists of a white square (0% black).
Check: The square must show fog level (for clear based film approx. 0.1
O.D., for blue based film approx. 0.2 O.D.)
To check density reproduction, especially for Dmax, use the LinCheck.ZIP

test image and measure in the "Density measurement area", as there also
the CDM is measuring. Only in this case the measured densities are
comparable.

Repair and Service
2.3.4 Testimage Medical_Image
PURPOSE Test image to check, whether image artifacts, which are slightly visible in one
of the technical images, are also visible in a medical test image.

Medical_image.ZIP'.
Figure 11
EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows:
(1) This medical test image of a chest is the most critical medical test image
regarding visibility of image artifacts, due to its huge bright areas. In
bright areas the eye is most sensitive.
Check: image artifacts, like stripes in horizontal or vertical direction,

which are slightly visible in a technical image (e.g. STI test image), may
not be visible in the medical test image.

Repair and Service
2.3.5 Testimage LinCheck
PURPOSE Test image to check density reproduction.

LinCheck.ZIP'.
536632ga.cdr
Figure 12
EVALUATION (1) The test image contains a grey Density measurement area
wedge. This grey wedge is
measured during the density
reproduction check.
Refer to chapter 3.6,
Adjustments.
536632gb.cdr
Figure 13
For check of density reproduction only measure in the density measurement

area, as there also the CDM is measuring.

Repair and Service
2.3.6 Testimage TQ-18
PURPOSE Standard Mammography test image for evaluation of contrast visibility.

Only available for software ≥ Rel. 2.0.0_C1
USAGE (1) In the key-operator menu select

'4 Print Image - 1 Test image -
TQ-18.tif'.*
Figure 14

(1) The two squares "2" in fields B
must be visible (13 pixel values
density difference).
(2) All small squares "3" and "4" must
be visible in squares "A" (4 pixel
values density difference)
Figure 15

Repair and Service
2.4 Show Error Codes
PURPOSE View ‘Reason - Meaning - Cure’ at the local display to an error that appeared
at the printer.
USAGE Possibility 1: View the last error code:
(1) In the key-operator menu select ‘7 Service Actions - 1 Error messages’
Possibility 2: View all error codes:

(1) In the browser pages select menu 'Service Engineer Tools - List of errors’
2.5 Web Pages

The web pages provide for following menus:
Welcome to this
Operator tools
Key-operator tools
Service engineer tools
Specialist tools
Security Tools
HELP
Figure 16

Repair and Service
Menu Content (Short description) Refer to .....

Operator Tools Printer queue viewing for the operator 2.5.1
Key-Operator Tools Same like Key-Operator menu on local 2.5.2
display
Service Engineer Functions for configuration and 2.5.3
Tools troubleshooting of the Controller part of
the printer
Specialist Tools Software tools reserved for R&D to Not further
perform special actions during test described
phase of the printer.
Security Tools Software Tools to configure user Not further
access control and secure described
communication as defined by HIPAA.
This menu is reserved for the Hospital
Security Manager
Help Describes purpose and content of the Not further
Web pages menus. described
A detailed structure of the web pages can be found in chapter 3.7, Software
menus, settings.

Repair and Service
2.5.1 Operator Tools
Welcome to this
Operator - Printer Status

HOME
Id Patient Name Host Created On Sent Status Priority
875 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing Normal
878 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Calculating Normal
879 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Waiting Normal
View Status
Figure 17
Main Purpose Printer queue viewing for the operator

Username / Password operator / operator (case sensitive)
Sub menus None
Comment --

Repair and Service
2.5.2 Key-Operator Tools
Welcome to this
KEY OPERATOR TOOLS

HOME Remote sessions
Figure 18
Main Purpose Provides same functions like Key-Operator

menu on local display
Username / Password drystar / 5300
Sub menus 1. Enter key-operator command session: Shows
list of menus like Key-Operator menu on local
keypad.
2. Release remote command session: Makes a
reset on the key-operator command session,
to release the connection, in case the key-
operator command session hangs.
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is

active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible.
The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'.
Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at
the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.

Repair and Service
2.5.3 Service Engineer Tools
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
List of errors
Printer Infocounters report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session
Reboot Drystar
Reset Calibration Data
Connectivity tools
Scaling Setup
DICOM profile editor
LPD Profile Editor
Printqueue editor
Controller logging
Module repair
Modules
Figure 19
Main Purpose Provides functions for configuration and

troubleshooting of the Controller part of the
printer
Username / Password mega / ******
Sub menus 1. List of errors: Shows list of all HC.... error
codes. Same content like chapter 3.3,
appendix, error codes..
2. Infocounters Report: Shows printer
infocounter.
3. DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report*: Shows
infocounter of the Controller part of the
printer.
4. QA Report Page: Shows a short summary of
the printer status concerning voltages, error
state, temperatures, CDM sensor, LCD
Display settings, CF card status.

Repair and Service
5. Software versions*: Shows SW versions of

printer and controller part of the printer.
6. Show printer status: Shows possible
warnings or defects or user messages which
are currently displayed at the local display.
7. Enter key-operator command session: Same
function like Key-operator Menu on local
keypad.
8. Enter service command session: Same
function like Service Menu on local keypad.
9. Release remote command session: Makes a
reset on the Key-operator / Service command
session, to release the connection, in case
the session hangs.
10. Reboot Drystar*: Reboots the printer.
11. Reset Calibration Data: Overwrites the
currently stored CDM, TH profile and/or film
calibration values with default values.
12. Scaling Setup: Menu to define general image
interpolation related settings
13. DICOM profile editor: Different menus to
define printer behavior regarding DICOM
communication.
14. LPD profile editor: Different menus to define
printer behavior regarding Postscript
communication
15. Network Configuration: Allows special
network settings to adapt to other network
devices.
16. Printqueue editor*: Provides functions for
extended queue management.
17. Controller logging*: Provides functions to
view, filter, adapt and save log files.
18. Modules: Provides functions to check sensors
and motors of single modules.
Refer to Figure 20: Service Engineer -
Modules Pages
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is

active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible.
The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'.
Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at
the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.

Repair and Service
Screenshot of Modules page:
Figure 20: Service Engineer - Modules Pages

Repair and Service
2.5.4 Connection to the Web Pages
USAGE (1) Connect the Service PC to the

network Service PC
Explorer ≥ 5)
In case the printer homepage is
not displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1
‘Adaptation of the PC IP address‘ 536532el.cdr
next page.
Figure 21
As an alternative, if it is not possible
to put the Service PC into the hospital Service PC
network:
(1) Use a crossed network UTP cable
to connect the network interface
of the Service PC directly with the
network interface of the printer. Crossed
(2) Start the browser (Internet network
cable 536532ek.cdr
Explorer ≥ 5)
(3) Enter the IP address of the printer Figure 22
in the address window. In case
the printer homepage is not
displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1
‘Adaptation of the PC IP address‘
next page.

Repair and Service
2.5.4.1 Adaptation of the PC IP address

To connect the printer and the Service PC via network, usually the IP
address of the Service PC has to be adapted.
Basic rules:
Case 1: The service PC is part of the hospital network.
(1) Get the IP address and possibly the subnet mask* for the Service PC
from the hospital network administrator. In case the hospital network
administrator wants to have the Service PC working only in a subnet, get
from him the netmask (also called subnet mask).
(2) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 23 to Figure
26.
Case 2: The service PC is not part of the hospital network, but connected
via crossed UTP network cable to the printer.
(1) Look up the printer IP address and subnet mask in the printer key
operator menu ‘show settings - Network’.
(2) Define an IP address for the Service PC by adding or subtracting ‘1’ to
the last digit of the IP address.
Example: Printer IP address = 10.6.5.121
Service PC address = 10.6.5.122 or 10.6.5.120
(3) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 23 to Figure
26.
Figure 23 Figure 24

Repair and Service
*Default Subnet Masks (set for NO subnetting)
Class First 3 digits of IP subnet mask

A 0......126 255.0.0.0
B 128......191 255.255.0.0
C 192.......223 255.255.255.0
Figure 25 Figure 26

Repair and Service
2.5.4.2 Adaptation of the Browser Proxy Settings

In case the connection to the Internet is configured for a connection via Proxy
server, this has to be disabled to be able to connect to the printer:
(1) In the Internet Explorer select "Tools - Internet Options"
(2) Select tab "Connections"
(3) In case a proxy server is configured, tick the checkbox "Bypass Proxy
server for local addresses".
Figure 27

Repair and Service
2.6 Printer Logging

Item "Printer Logging" is divided in following sections:
# Section refer to ...
1 Required information for the support center 2.6.1
2 Printer Bootup Message 2.6.2
2.6.1 Required Information for the Support Center

In case of persistent problems like Connectivity / DICOM problems or film
jams it may be required - as part of the escalation procedure - to send all
logfiles, session files and infocounters to the support center.
Proceeding:
Step # Descpription Comment
Step 1 In the Service Engineer Tools go to "Controller --
Logging"
Step 2 Set tasks --
- PrintJobHandler
- DCMPrintSCP_0
- DCMPrintSCP_1 (if available)
to TRACE
Step 3 Produce the fault by sending an image from the --
modality or by printing a test image
Step 4 Reboot the printer --
Step 5 Get the session files See note 1
Step 6 Get the infocounter file See note 1
Step 7 Save the " DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report" See note 2
Step 8 Send the --
• Session file
• Infocounter file
• DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
to your support center
At sporadic problems (Connectivity / DICOM problems; film jams) skip Steps

1 to 4. Immediately start with step 5
Path for session file / infocounter:

Enter service command session – 7 service actions – 5 logging – 1 session
reports (select all files) / 2 Infocounters report – To this computer

Repair and Service
How to save the " DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report"

In the "Service Engineer Tools" go to the "DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report"
page – right mouse key – save page as.
2.6.1.1 How to view the Logfiles offline
Step # Descpription Comment

Step 1 Install the PIDEX Available on MEDNET, GSO Library
tool
Step 2 Extract the See note below
corresponding log
file of the session
file.
Step 3 In the PIDEX tool
select "Tools –
logview" and open
the desired logfile
Step 4 In the PIDEX tool go It is also possible to select a single

to function "Edit – word in the logfile. Then all other
find" to find the occurances of this expression are also
desired information. highlighted.
A session file is named e.g.

DS5300_1052_SES_21OCT2005_09-55-48.ZIP, where the different figures
represent following information:
DS5300: Printer (Drystar 5300)
1052: Serial Number
SES: Session File
21OCT2005: Current date
09-55-48: Current time HH-MM-SS
Interesting for troubleshooting are following files within the SES files:
• vilis.log (controller and print engine);
• time.log

Repair and Service
2.6.2 Printer Bootup-Message
PURPOSE The printer terminal level provides following service action:

• An online logging, which displays all actions of the printer software during
bootup.
The printer terminal level is a tool for service specialists only.

It is used for troubleshooting to view the boot-up messages.

printer as displayed in Figure 28.
(2) Start the HyperTerminal as
displayed in section 2.6.2.1.
(3) Switch the printer on:
Now the bootup message 536632ep.cdr
appears
When the Printer login appears
the bootup message is finished.
Figure 28
2.6.2.1 Setup of the HyperTerminal

The hyper terminal setup as displayed here can be used for all AGFA
devices.
Instead of the HyperTerminal following other programs can be recommended
to connect to terminal level:
• xt.
xt.exe is an AGFA program, which is part of the IMOS package. It can be
started in a DOS box by typing ‘xt’
• IMOS Start Menu.
The IMOS Start Menu software has a terminal built in. Select ‘tools -
terminal’. Depending on the configuration of IMOS Start, either a DOS
box with xt will be opened or a Hyper terminal window will pop-up.
(1) To start the setup of the HyperTerminal, go to ‘Programs - Accessories -
HyperTerminal - HyperTerminal’

Repair and Service
Figure 29
(2) Enter a name for the connection,

e.g. AGFA
Figure 30
(3) Select COM1 or COM2 for

communication port (depending
on what you are using on the
Service PC)
Figure 31

Repair and Service
(4) Make the setup of the

HyperTerminal session as
displayed here, i.e.
- 9600 Bps
- 8 data bits
- no parity
- 1 stop bit
- flow control Xon/Xoff
(5) Select ‘OK’
Figure 32
(6) Select ‘Properties’
Figure 33

Repair and Service
(7) Select ‘settings’
Figure 34
(8) Select ‘VT100’ for emulation type
(9) Press ‘OK’
Figure 35
(10) Press <Enter>
Now the bootup message or login

prompt is visible.
Figure 36

Repair and Service
2.7 ADVP
The latest version of ADVP can be downloaded from MEDNET GSO Library
(Hardcopy - Wet Imagers - LR DICOM Controller - Freeware)
PURPOSE DICOM troubleshooting tool to check the DICOM interface of the printer. In
this case ADVP sends a test image to the printer.
USAGE ADVP can be used to send test images from the service PC to the printer via
network
ADVP can run on the service PC or any Windows PC in the network. The
only pre-requisite: The PC must be part of the network.
536532eq.cdr
Figure 37

Repair and Service
(1) Start ADVP

(2) Select 'Basic Grayscale' in the
'Start up configuration' screen.
(3) Select 'Test - Print Film'
(4) Select 'SMPTE' (or any other
test film).
(5) In the 'Configuration' window fill
in Called (Printer) AE Title and
'Printer IP address'.
(6) Select 'OK'. Now the desired test
film is sent to the printer.
Figure 38: ADVP as Print SCU

Repair and Service
3 Software Installation
You want to ... Example Refer to .....

Upgrade the SW to a higher SW Upgrade from SW Rel. Chapter 7,
basic release 1.90_C1 to 2.0.0_C1 Modifications
Update the SW with a patch SW Update from 1.9.0_C1 to 3.1
1.9.1_C1
Install SW on a new, empty Install SW 1.9.0_C1 on an 3.2
internal CF card. empty internal CF card
Re-install the software on a Re-Install SW 1.9.0_C1 on a 3.3
printer in ERROR - SYSTEM printer that does not bootup
FAILURE state. anymore.
• A software upgrade is a functional extension. It is usually sold through

the Sales and Services Channels
• A software update is a corrective modification of the basic software
version. It does not include new functionality. SW Updates (Patches) are
available on MedNet.
3.1 SW Update: Loading a SW Patch

This chapter describes the SW Update with a patch.
For instructions regarding SW upgrade to a higher basic release (e.g. SW

Upgrade from SW Rel. 1.90_C1 to 2.0.0_C1) refer to Chapter 7,
Modifications
A SW Update can be performed in two ways:
SW Update via ... Refer to .....

Key-operator menu at the local keypad using the CF card 3.1.1
Service menu in the Webpages using the network 3.1.2
connection

Repair and Service
3.1.1 Software Update via CF card
Purpose Software Update: Installation of a software patch
SW Upgrade (1) In the key-operator menu select

'9 Installation - 1 Installation from
CF card'
the local keypad.
(3) After the software update print a
SMPTE test image (Key Operator
menu: 3 Print Image - 1
Testimage - 2 SMPTE.zip') and a
test image from every modality to
confirm the successful update.
(4) Re-new the backup on CF card.
536532ac.cdr
Figure 39
3.1.2 Software Update via a remote Computer
Purpose Software Update: Installation of a software patch
SW Upgrade (1) Establish a web browser

Service engineer tools
connection to the printer. Refer to
chapter 2.5, Web Pages Username
mega
(2) In the printer homepage select Username
'Service Engineer Tools - Enter ******
Key-operator Command Session - Enter Key-operator command session
9 Installation - 1 New Software 9. Installation
Installation - 1 This computer' 1. New Software Installation
(3) Select 'Browse' Welcome to this

(4) Select the ZIP file to be uploaded Key-Operator - Installation
(e.g. DS5300_SWR_180C1.zip). Choose Dataset Browse .....
(5) Follow the further instructions in Proceed Go Back Reset Values
the web pages 536532eo.cdr
Figure 40
(6) After the software update print a SMPTE test image (Key Operator menu:
‘3 Print Image - 1 Testimage - 2 SMPTE.tif') and a test image from every
modality to confirm the successful upgrade.

Repair and Service
During file upload it is not checked, whether the software you are uploading
is really software for Drystar 5300. Be sure to upload the correct ZIP file.
The ZIP file is only available via MEDNET - GSO library - Hardcopy – Dry
Imagers – Drystar 5300 – Freeware
Notice:
• Depending on the software patch version it might be possible, that
one of the boards gets re-programmed during the software upgrade.
• In case this re-programming is interrupted by power loss, this specific
board may become unusable.
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by the web pages.
3.2 Emergency SW Installation on a new, empty internal CF Card
Purpose This section describes the SW Installation on an empty internal CF card,

e.g. after exchange of the internal CF card.
SW Installation (1) Insert the CF card with the printer

on empty HD "Emergency_Install" software in
the CF card reader
(2) Reboot the printer
(3) At question "Do you want to
preserve config?" select "NO".
Refer to Figure 42.
the display.
(5) Select menu "5 Restore
Configuration" to reload the
previous configuration when
finished.
(6) Perform a film calibration.
536532ac.cdr
Figure 41

Repair and Service
Important remark:
After software installation on a new,
empty internal CF card, the printer
is only in the same state than
before, if an up-to-date backup is
Emergency SW FOUND
available. ON EXTERNAL CF-card
In case the CF card is lost or not Install emergency
SW? YES (V) NO (X)
readable the complete printer setup
has to be redone.
After Emergency SW Installation on a Emergency SW Install
new, empty internal CF card without Do you want
to preserve config?
"Configuration Restore" the printer is YES (V) NO (X)
in the same state like it has been 536632gc.cdr
shipped from factory

(default IP address 169.254.10.10)
Figure 42
The printer "Emergency_Install" software can be obtained via MEDNET,

GSO Library.
Caution:
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by a local keypad
message

Repair and Service
3.3 Emergency SW Installation on a Printer in "Error - System Failure"

State
Purpose This section describes the SW Installation on a printer in

ERROR - SYSTEM FAILURE state.
Important remark:
The software installation procedure
described here formats the internal
CF card.
In case you select "NO" at question Emergency SW FOUND
"Do you want to preserve config" ON EXTERNAL CF-card
Install emergency
the configuration data are erased. SW? YES (V) NO (X)
In this case the printer is only in the
same state than before, if an up-to-
Emergency SW Install
date backup is available. Do you want
In case the CF card is lost or not to preserve config?
YES (V) NO (X)
readable the complete printer setup 536632gc.cdr
has to be redone.
Figure 43
SW Installation (1) Insert the CF card with the printer

on printer in "Emergency_Install" software in
"Error - the CF card reader
System (2) Reboot the printer
Failure" State (3) At question "Do you want to
preserve config?" select:
• "NO" to erase the complete
configuration
• "YES" to keep the current
configuration.
Refer to Figure 43 and to info
below.
the local keypad.
536532ac.cdr
Figure 44
The printer "Emergency_Install" software can be obtained via MEDNET,

GSO Library.

Repair and Service
Caution:
message
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation to preserve the

configuration following steps are executed internally:
1. A backup of the printer configuration data is created and copied to
RAM
2. The software is copied from external CF card to internal CF card and
inflated.
3. The boards are programmed.
4. The backup is restored from RAM.
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation not to preserve the
configuration the configuration data are erased. The printer in this case is in
the same state like it has been shipped from factory
(default IP address 169.254.10.10).

Chapter 3.3
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365/100
► Please note
The Chapter ‘Troubleshooting’, Edition 1, Revision 7, has been replaced by the

separately available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS153.08E.
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Hardcopy Æ Dry Imagers Æ Drystar 5300 Æ Trouble shooting guide
A description of the printer error codes is appended to this document.

eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v05
Repair and Service
DD+DIS346.05E Troubleshooting
intentionally left blank


08-2008 Type 5365/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
Appendix: Error Catalogue

• The error catalogue is part of the device software (file "error.xml"). It cane be extracted from
SWR_DRYSTAR5300_R2.0.0_C1.zip → errors.jar → error.xml.
• The print-out supplied here is based on software release 2.0.0_C1 (error.xml dated 26/Oct/2005)
Depending on attributes for "Type" and "Action" (see error descriptions below)
error messages will be issued as error code or plain text:
Type Action Error message will be issued as ……
Defect Replace Message "MODXX Please replace module"
Defect See manual Message "EXXXXXX – texttext"
Failure None Message "WXXXXXX - texttext"
Accidental None Message "texttext" (e.g. remove film jam)
List of Modules:
MOD Nr.. Spare Part
MOD01 Input Block Module
MOD02 Pickup Module
MOD03 Print Drum Module
MOD04 Thermal Head Module
MOD05 Output Module
MOD06 Drum drive module
MOD07 Vilis module
MOD08 Power Supply Module
MOD09 Display Module
MOD10 Input Sensors Module
MOD11 Cam shaft drive Module
MOD12 TPH filter Module
MOD14 Themis Module
MOD15 RAM Module
MOD20 TPH Cooling Fan Module
MOD21 OSB PCB Module
In SW < Rel. 2.0.0_C1 the Themis and RAM module are part of MOD07:
Vilis/Themis/RAM module.

Edition 1, Revision 10 Error Catalogue Chapter 3.3 / Appendix page 1
2006-01-26 Drystar 5300 (Type 5365) Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
Troubleshooting DD+DIS346.05E
HC201000 : inputtraymodule.connected
Type Defect
Context 201000
Action SeeManual
Reason XS1 not connected to input module
Cure Connect XS1 to input module
This error is displayed as " E201000: XS1 not connected ".
Error E201000 is detected by a loop-back cable in the fixed part of connector

XS1. In case the signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back cable is not
returned to the Vilis CPU, the printer assumes, that the cable is not connected.
HC201001 : pickupmodule.tray.configuration
Type Failure
Context 201001
Action None
Reason Wrong film format
Cure Specify correct film format
This error is displayed as " W201001: Wrong film format specified ".
The printer always prints the film on the available film format, no matter which
film format is specified at the modality.
This means, that warning W201001 just tells the operator, that the printer
uses a different film format than it is specified at the modality. The film will be
printed on the available film material.

Chapter 3.3 / Appendix page 2 Error Catalogue Edition 1, Revision 10
Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 5300 (Type 5365) 2006-01-26
Repair and Service
HC201003 : inputtraymodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 201003
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Inputtray Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect inputtray elabel
Reason2 Inputtray Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
This error is displayed as " W201003: Elabel failure on input tray ".
The e-label contains information about the module, like serial number or
adjustment parameters. A defective or disconnected e-label has following
disadvantages:
• In case of a defective internal CF card in combination with missing

backup CF card, after installation of a new internal CF card the
information about this module cannot be read in. In the worst case the
printer is not operational anymore.
• The repair center does not get information about this module, in case it
has to be exchanged because of a defect.
With a defective e-label the printer can print under normal condition without
loss of quality or throughput.

Repair and Service
HC201004 : uppertray.overruled
Type Failure
Context 201004
Action None
Reason Inputtray overruled (dmax 2.0)
Cure Replace filmpack
This error is displayed as " W201004: Input Tray Overruled ".
This fault is displayed, in case

• the tag reader in the input block module (MOD01) does not read valid
information about the film package and
• the feature to allow printing for missing or malfunctioning RF-tag
reader is set to "printing with Dmax = 2.00" (can be changed in the
service engineer tools to "printing not possible")
Films will be printed with reduced Dmax of 2.0 O.D.
HC201005 : inputtraymodule.backside.jam
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Wrong film oriëntation in tray
Cure Correct film oriëntation
In SW < 2.0.0_C1 this error is displayed as "E201005: Upper Tray Disabled"

• the feature to allow printing for missing or malfunctioning RF-tag reader
is set to "printing not possible" (can be changed in the service engineer
tools to "printing with Dmax = 2.00")
In SW ≥ 2.0.0_C1 this error is displayed as "Backside printing - Remove
filmjam".

Repair and Service
HC201006 : inputtraymodule.connected.bis
Type Defect
Context 201006
Action SeeManual
Error E201006 is detected by a loop-back cable in connector XS7: In case the

signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back cable is not returned to the
Vilis CPU, the printer assumes, that the cable is not connected.
HC201007 : inputtraymodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 201007
Action SeeManual
Reason Inputtray Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD01
This error is displayed as " W201007: Elabel failure on input tray".
HC201008 : rftag.typecode.invalid
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Unsupported film type in input tray

Repair and Service
HC201009 : rftag.formatcode.invalid
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Unsupported film format in input tray
HC201010 : rftag.unsupported.version
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Wrong version in input tray
HC201011 : rftag.signature
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Wrong encryption in input tray
HC201012 : rftag.history.insecure
Type Defect
Context 201012
Action SeeManual
Reason Tag history corrupt in input tray
Cure Call service
This error is displayed as "E201012: RF-tag file problem ".

Repair and Service
HC201013 : rftag.unreadable
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Unreadable tag in input tray
HC201014 : rftag.count.exceeded
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Film overrun in input tray
HC201015 : rftag.no.filmcount
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC201016 : upper.filmcal.required
Type Failure
Context 201016
Action None
Reason Input tray needs calibration
Cure Perform input tray calibration
This error is displayed as "W201016: Tray needs film calibration ".

Repair and Service
HC201017 : rftag.collision
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Possible 2 tags in input tray
Cure Remove lowest tag
HC201018 : Tag-unsupported
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC201019 : tag.history.insecure
Type Defect
Context 201019
Action SeeManual
Cure Call service
HC201020 : inputtraymodule.uppertraytagreader
Type Defect
Context 01
Action Replace
Reason1 XS1 not connected to input module
Cure1 Connect XS1 to input module
Reason3 Tag reader not connected
Cure3 Connect tag reader
Reason4 Inputtray module defect
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD01
This error is displayed as "MOD01: Please replace module".
HC201021 : inputtraymodule.S1.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 01

Repair and Service
Action Replace
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD01
Type Defect
Context 01
Action Replace
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD01

Repair and Service
HC202000 : pickupmodule.filmpickupordrum
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Input jam
Cure Remove film jam
HC202001 : pickupmodule.filmpickup
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Input jam
HC202002 : pickupmodule.pickup.skew
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Input jam

Repair and Service
HC202003 : pickupmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 202003
Action None
Reason1 Pickup Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect pickup elabel
Reason2 Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD02
This error is displayed as " W202003: Elabel failure on pickup ".
disadvantages:

HC202004 : pickupmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Pickup homing failed accidently
Cure Selfresolving accident

Repair and Service
HC202005 : pickupmodule.pickupmotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 202005
Action SeeManual
Reason M3 short circuit
Cure SERVICE: check M3 and cabling!
This error is displayed as "E202005: Pickup motor short circuit: call service! ".
HC202006 : pickupmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 202006
Action None
Reason Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD02
This error is displayed as "W202006: Pickup drive elabel no config ".
HC202020 : pickupmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 02
Action Replace
Reason Pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD02

Note: In case this error message appears directly after boot-up and SW
version 1.80_C1 and 1.81_C1 is still installed, upgrade to a SW > 1.81_C1.
This message is a software fault in software versions 1.80_C1 and 1.81_C1

Repair and Service
HC202021 : pickupmodule.pickupmotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 02
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD02

HC202022 : pickupmodule.S11.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 02
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD02


Repair and Service
HC203000 : printdrummodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 203000
Action None
Reason1 Printdrum Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect printdrum elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03
This error is displayed as " W203000: Elabel failure on printdrum ".
disadvantages:

HC203001 : printdrummodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 203001
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
This error is displayed as "W203001: Print drum elabel no config ".

Repair and Service
HC204000 : thmodule.high
Type Defect
Context 204000
Action SeeManual
Reason Coolingfan defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
This error is displayed as " E204000 - TH temperature too high ".
(1) Also check, whether the TH airflow

input or output is obstructed. Refer
to Figure 1
In case the airflow is not
obstructed:
(2) Check the ambient temperature:
maximum allowed ambient
temperature = +30°C (95°F) at
max. 80% rel. humidity.
5365QRI11.WMF
Figure 1
HC204001 : thmodule.thpos.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason TBD
Cure TBD

Repair and Service
HC204002 : thmodule.thermalheadheating
Type Failure
Context 204002
Action None
Reason1 Connector P3 on PSU not connected
Cure1 Connect P3 on PSU
Reason2 Connectors P2 and P3 on OSB not connected
Cure2 Connect connectors P2 and P3
Reason3 Connectors P6 on OSB not connected
Cure3 Connect connector P6
Reason4 Connector XS6 on heater not connected
Cure4 Connect connector XS6
Reason5 Sensor S12 defect
Cure5 Replace MOD04
Reason6 PSU defect
Cure6 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " W204002: Blemmish heater defect ".
The blemish heater heats up the thermal head after switch on. This prevents
film artefacts called "blemish". Blemish looks as if some small drops of oil are
spread over the film.

Repair and Service
HC204003 : thmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 204003
Action None
Reason1 TH Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect TH elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " W204003: Elabel failure on TH ".
disadvantages:


Repair and Service
HC204004 : thmodule.device.current
Type Defect
Context 204004
Action SeeManual
Reason3 Connectors P3 on TH not connected
Cure3 Connect connector P3 on TH
Reason4 Connector P2 on TH not connected
Reason6 Connector P14 on VILIS not connected
Cure6 Connect connector P14 on VILIS
Reason7 PSU defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason8 OSB defect
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " E204004 - Current to TH too high ".

Repair and Service
HC204005 : thmodule.powerlogic
Type Defect
Context 204005
Action SeeManual
Reason5 PSU defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason6 OSB defect
Cure6 Replace
Part OSB
Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " E204005 - Power logic not available on TH ".

Repair and Service
HC204006 : thmodule.headvoltageactuator
Type Defect
Context 204006
Action SeeManual
Reason7 PSU defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason8 OSB defect
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " E204006 - Power not available on TH ".

Repair and Service
HC204007 : thmodule.osb.connected
Type Defect
Context 204007
Action SeeManual
Reason1 P1 on OSB not connected
Cure1 Connect P1 on OSB
Reason2 P1 on VILIS not connected
Cure2 Connect P1 on VILIS
Reason3 OSB defect
Cure3 Replace
Part OSB
This error is displayed as " E204007 - P1 (OSB) not connected ".
Error E204007 is detected by a loop-back circuit in connector P1 on the OSB

board: In case the signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back circuit is not
HC204008 : thmodule.thermalheadheater
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason TH module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC204009 : thmodule.voltage.low
Type Failure
Context 204009
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " W204009 - TH voltage too low ".

Repair and Service
HC204010 : thmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 204010
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC204012 : thmodule.highbis
Type Defect
Context 204012
Action SeeManual
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
This error is displayed as " E204012: TH temperature too high ".
HC204020 : thmodule.device.resistors
Type Defect
Context 04
Action Replace
Reason1 TBD
Cure1 TBD
Part TBD
Reason2 TH module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04

Repair and Service
HC204021 : thmodule.device.thermistors
Type Defect
Context 04
Action Replace
Reason5 TH defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD04
HC204022 : thmodule.thinstall
Type Defect
Context 04
Action Replace
Reason TH not installed, no data available
Cure Replace
Part MOD04

Repair and Service
HC205000 : outputmodule.connected
Type Defect
Context 205000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 XS2 not connected on output module
Cure1 Connect XS2 on output module
This error is displayed as " E205000 - XS2 or XS3 not connected ".
Error E205000 is detected by a loop-back cable in connectors XS2 and XS3:

In case the signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back cable is not
HC205001 : outputmodule.cdm.init
Type Failure
Context 205001
Action None
Reason Output module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD05
This error is displayed as " W205001 - CDM init failed, no film calibration!".
In case of a defective CDM, which is part of the output module (MOD05), it is

still possible to print.
In case of a new film package – depending on the emulsion number of the

film – the contrast representation can be more or less different, as the
automatic film calibration is not operational anymore.

Repair and Service
HC205002 : outputmodule.intensity.scan
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal film jam
Part Remove film jam
HC205003 : outputmodule.outputsensor.hi
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Output film jam
HC205004 : outputmodule.close.fail.or.film.input
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205005 : outputmodule.film.scan
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205006 : outputmodule.outputSensor.lo
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205007 : outputmodule.outputorscan.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None

Repair and Service

HC205008 : outputmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 205008
Action None
Reason1 Output Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect Output elabel
Reason2 Output Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05
This error is displayed as " W205008 - Elabel failure on output!".
disadvantages:


Repair and Service
HC205009 : outputmodule.cdm.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason CDM homing failed accidently
Cure Self resolving accident
HC205010 : outputmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Output homing failed accidently
HC205011 : outputmodule.outputmotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 205011
Action SeeManual
Cure SERVICE: check M4 and wiring!
This error is displayed as "E205011: Output motor short circuit: call service".
HC205012 : outputmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 205012
Action None
Reason Output Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

Repair and Service
HC205013 : outputmodule.cdm.densitometermotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 205013
Action SeeManual
This error is displayed as "E205013: CDM motor short circuit: call service ".
HC205014 : outputmodule.cdminstall
Type Failure
Context 205014
Action None
Reason CDM needs calibration
Cure Calibrate CDM
This error is displayed as "W205014: Printer needs CDM calibration".
HC205015 : outputmodule.outputsensor.low.during.pinting
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205020 : outputmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205021 : outputmodule.outputmotor.connection
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205022 : outputmodule.cdm.densitometermotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205023 : outputmodule.cdm.move
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205024 : outputmodule.S5.pulsing
Type Accidental
Context 05
Action None
Cure Replace

Repair and Service
Part MOD05
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205026 : outputmodule.cdm.S10.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC205027 : outputmodule.cdm.mdmlightsensor
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205028 : outputmodule.outputsensortph
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Reason1 S5 not connected
Cure1 Connect S5
Reason2 Output module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05

HC206000 : drumdrivemodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 206000
Action None
Reason1 Drum drive Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect Drumdrive elabel
Reason2 Drum drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as " W20600: Elabel failure on drumdrive ".

Repair and Service
disadvantages:

HC206001 : drumdrivemodule.working
Type Defect
Context 206001
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S9
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "E206001: Drum drive defect"

Also check whether the drum drive belt is properly mounted.
HC206002 : drumdrivemodule.drummotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 206002
Action SeeManual
Reason1 M1 not connected
Cure1 Connect M1
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "E206002: Drum drive motor defect"

Repair and Service
HC206003 : drumdrivemodule.S9.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 206003
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S9
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "E206003: Drum drive sensor defect"
HC206004 : drumdrivemodule.move
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Drum drive movement failed accidently
HC206005 : drumdrivemodule.drummotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 206005
Action SeeManual
Reason Drum drive motor short circuit
Cure Check motor and wiring
This error is displayed as "E206005: Drum drive motor short circuit: call
service"

Repair and Service
HC206006 : drumdrivemodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 206006
Action None
Reason Drum drive module Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "W206006: Drum drive elabel no config "
HC207000 : vilismodule.dsh.connected
Type Defect
Context 207000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P9 not connected on VILIS
Reason2 VILIS module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "E207000: P9 not connected"
HC207001 : vilismodule.psu.connected
Type Defect
Context 207001
Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "E207001: PSU not connected on VILIS "
HC207002 : vilismodule.keypad.connected
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 207002
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P8 not connected
Cure1 Connect P8
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "E207002: P8 or P2 (display) not connected "
HC207003 : vilismodule.th.connected
Type Defect
Context 207003
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P14
Cure2 Connect P1 on TH
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD07
Reason4 TH defect
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as "E207003: P14 or P1 (TH) not connected "

Repair and Service
HC207004 : vilismodule.sensors.connected
Type Defect
Context 207004
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P2
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "E207004: P21 not connected "
Error E207004 is detected by a loop-back cable in connector P21 on the Vilis

module: In case the signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back cable is
not returned to the Vilis CPU, the printer assumes, that the cable is not
connected.
HC207005 : vilismodule.motors.connected
Type Defect
Context 207005
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P20
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07

connected.

Repair and Service
HC207006 : vilismodule.sensorsandio.connected
Type Defect
Context 207006
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P1
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07

connected.
HC207007 : vilismodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 207007
Action None
Reason1 VILIS Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect VILIS elabel
Reason2 VILIS Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "W207007: Elabel failure on VILIS "

The e-label on the Vilis is fixed soldered on the board (it cannot be
connected!)

Repair and Service
disadvantages:

HC207008 : vilismodule.power.3v3
Type Defect
Context 207008
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Reason2 PSU module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as "E207008: 3V3 out of tolerance on VILIS "
Error E207008 is issued
• in case the 3.3V signal is present on the power supply module

(MOD08) and
• the 3.3V signal cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU (MOD07).

Repair and Service
HC207009 : vilismodule.power.12v
Type Defect
Context 207009
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as "E207009: 12V out of tolerance on VILIS "
• in case the 12V signal is present on the power supply module

(MOD08) and
• the 12V signal cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU (MOD07).
HC207010 : vilismodule.power.n12v
Type Defect
Context 207010
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as "E207010: - 12V out of tolerance on VILIS "
• in case the - 12V signal is present on the power supply module

(MOD08) and
• the -12V signal cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU (MOD07).
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 207011
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08

(MOD08) and
• the 24V signal is below its limit on the Vilis CPU (MOD07)
HC207012 : vilismodule.power.actuator
Type Defect
Context 207012
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason3 Short circuit in cabling
Cure3 Fix cabling

(MOD08) and
• the 24V for the motors (P20) cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU
(MOD07)
HC207013 : vilismodule.power.sensor

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 207013
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure3 Fix cabling
This error is displayed as "E207013: 5V not available on sensors "
HC207014 : vilismodule.headvoltage
Type Defect
Context 207014
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P1 not connected on TH
Reason2 Connector P14 not connected on MEC
Cure2 Connect P14 on MEC
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure6 Replace
Part MOD04

Repair and Service
HC207015 : duplicate.ipaddress
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason IP adress already in use
Cure Change IP adress
HC207016 : vilismodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 207016
Action None
Reason VILIS Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "W207016: VILIS elabel no config "
HC207017 : vilismodule.boardtemperature
Type Failure
Context 207017
Action None
Reason VILIS temp sensor defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "W207017: Temp sensor on VILIS defect "

Repair and Service
HC207018 : themis.temperature
Type Defect
Context 207018
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Ambient temperature too high what could be caused by
continuous printing in an already warm environment or the
environment temperature is just too high
Cure1 If caused by continuous printing , this can be cured by waiting
until temperature comes down ; otherwise it has to be made
sure that the environment temperature comes down
Reason2 Cooling of Themis CPU board not efficient because of blocked
airflow
Cure2 Make sure that enough airflow is available for the Themis CPU
board by insuring that air inlets and outlets are completely free
Reason3 Defect CPU on Themis
Cure3 Power off printer and replace
Part themis
This error is displayed as "E207018: CPU temperature too high "
HC207019 : disk.space
Type Failure
Context 207019
Action None
Reason Compact flash full
Cure Call service
This error is displayed as "W207019: Internal CF-memory low "
HC207020 : vilismodule.sn.mismatch
Type Defect
Context 207020
Action SeeManual
Reason SN mismatch
Cure Call service
This error is displayed as "E207020: Incorrect internal CF identification "

Repair and Service
HC207021 : themis.temperature.warning
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Themis temperature too high
Cure Cool down themis
HC207024 : vilismodule.serialadc
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Reason VILIS module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207025 : vilismodule.bitgenerator
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
HC207026 : vilismodule.m16
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207027 : vilismodule.fpga
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207028 : vilismodule.m2.driver
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
HC207032 : vilismodule.f1.driver
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207035 : vilismodule.themis.cpuboard
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Reason Themis defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

It is only available in SW Rel. 1.8 and 1.9.

Repair and Service
HC207036 : vilismodule.themis.serial
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207037 : vilismodule.themis.ethernet
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207038 : vilismodule.themis.portex
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Reason Software problem
Cure Reinstall software


Repair and Service
HC207039 : vilismodule.themis.pci
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207040 : vilismodule.themis.ram
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207041 : vilismodule.themis.clock
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
HC208000 : powersupplymodule.temperature
Type Defect
Context 208000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 PSU too hot
Cure1 Switch off printer and let it cool down
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " E208000: PSU temperature too high ".
• Also check, whether the

power supply airflow input or
output is obstructed. Refer to
Figure 2.
obstructed:
• Check the ambient
temperature: maximum
allowed ambient temperature
= +30°C (95°F) at max. 80%
rel. humidity.
5365QRI36.GIF
Figure 2

Repair and Service
HC208001 : powersupplymodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 208001
Action None
Reason1 PSU Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect PSU elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as W208001 Elabel failure on PSU ".
disadvantages:


Repair and Service
HC208002 : powersupplymodule.powerth.current
Type Defect
Context 208002
Action SeeManual
Reason1 TH power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check TH power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " E208002: Current to TH too high ".
HC208003 : powersupplymodule.powermotor.current
Type Defect
Context 208003
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Actuators power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check actuators power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " E208003: Current to motors too high ".
HC208004 : powersupplymodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 208004
Action None
Reason PSU module Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " W208004: E-Label failure on PSU ".

Repair and Service
HC208005 : powersupplymodule.temperature.warning
Type Failure
Context 208005
Action None
Reason PSU temperature high
Cure Cool down the PSU
This error is displayed as " W208005: Power Supply temperature too high ".
HC208006 : powersupplymodule.down
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason1 PSU temperature high
Cure1 Cool down the PSU
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC208020 : powersupplymodule.powerth
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Reason PSU module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD08

Repair and Service
HC208022 : powersupplymodule.powermotor
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC208024 : powersupplymodule.powerlogic
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC208025 : powersupplymodule.power3v3
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08

Repair and Service
HC208026 : powersupplymodule.power12v
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC208027 : powersupplymodule.powern12v
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC209000 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 209000
Action None
Reason1 Display Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect display elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
This error is displayed as " W209000: Elabel failure on display".

The e-label on the display board is fixed soldered on the board (it cannot be
connected!)

Repair and Service
disadvantages:

HC209001 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 209001
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD09

connected!)
HC209002 : displaykeypadmodule.keyboardtemperature
Type Failure
Context 209002
Action None
Reason Keyboard temp sensor defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
This error is displayed as " W209002: Display temp sensor defect ".

Repair and Service
HC210000 : inputsensormodule.inputsensorone.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context 210000
Action None
Reason Input sensor module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
This error is displayed as " W210000".
HC210001 : inputsensormodule.inputsensorbis.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context 210001
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC210002 : inputsensormodule.connected
Type Defect
Context 210002
Action SeeManual
Reason XS5 not conencted
Cure Connect XS5
This error is displayed as " E210002: XS5 not connected"

HC210003 : inputsensormodule.inputsensortph
Type Failure

Repair and Service
Context 210003
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
This error is displayed as " W210003: S4 defective"
Sensors S4 and S13 are redundant (reliability purposes). The printer can also
work with one of these sensors only.
HC210004 : inputsensormodule.inputsensortphbis
Type Failure
Context 210004
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC210005 : inputsensormodule.S4.pulsing
Type Failure
Context 210005
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
This error is displayed as " W210005: S4 defective "
Type Failure
Context 210005
Action None

Repair and Service
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC210020 : inputsensormodule.working
Type Defect
Context 10
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC211000 : camshaftmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Drum drive move failed accidently

Repair and Service
HC211001 : camshaftmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 211001
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S7
Reason2 Cam shaft module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
This error is displayed as " E211001 - Camdrive defect "

version < 1.95 is still installed, upgrade to SW ≥ 1.95_C1. This message is
originated in a wrong hardware signal on cold Vilis CPU when the motors are
activated.
HC211002 : camshaftmodule.drumpositionmotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 211002
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect M2
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
This error is displayed as " E211002 - Motor M2 defect "

HC211003 : camshaftmodule.S7.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 211003
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S7
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
This error is displayed as " E211003"
HC211004 : camshaftmodule.drumpositionmotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 211004
Action SeeManual
Reason M2 short circuited
This error is displayed as " E211004 - M2 short circuit: call service "
HC212020 : coolingfanmodule.thermalheadfan.connection
Type Defect
Context 212020
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Coolingfan not connected
Cure1 Connect coolingfan
Reason2 Coolingfan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12
This error is displayed as " E212020 - TH coolingfan defect"
HC212021 : coolingfanmodule.thermalheadfan.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 212021
Action SeeManual
Reason Coolingfan short circuit
Cure Check coolingfan and wiring
This error is displayed as " E211021 - TH fan short circuit: call service "

Repair and Service
HC213000 : topcover.open
Type Accidental
Context 213000
Action None
Reason Top cover open
Cure1 Close top cover
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Reason Themis module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14

Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
This error is displayed as " E214023 - Portex failure on Themis "
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
This error is displayed as " MOD14 - Please replace module "

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
Type Defect
Context 15
Action Replace
Reason RAM defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD15
HC220000 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.connection
Type Failure
Context 220000
Action None
Reason1 EBox fan not connected
Cure1 Connect EBox fan
Reason2 EBox fan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD20
This error is displayed as " W220000 - EBox fan defect "

Repair and Service
HC220001 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 220001
Action SeeManual
Reason EBox fan short circuit
Cure Check EBox fan and wiring

Repair and Service
Appendix: Error Catalogue

• The error catalogue is part of the device software (file "error.xml"). It cane be extracted from
SWR_DRYSTAR5300_R2.0.0_C1.zip → errors.jar → error.xml.
• The print-out supplied here is based on software release 2.0.0_C1 (error.xml dated 26/Oct/2005)
Depending on attributes for "Type" and "Action" (see error descriptions below)
error messages will be issued as error code or plain text:
Type Action Error message will be issued as ……
Defect Replace Message "MODXX Please replace module"
Defect See manual Message "EXXXXXX – texttext"
Failure None Message "WXXXXXX - texttext"
Accidental None Message "texttext" (e.g. remove film jam)
List of Modules:
MOD Nr.. Spare Part
MOD01 Input Block Module
MOD02 Pickup Module
MOD03 Print Drum Module
MOD04 Thermal Head Module
MOD05 Output Module
MOD06 Drum drive module
MOD07 Vilis module
MOD08 Power Supply Module
MOD09 Display Module
MOD10 Input Sensors Module
MOD11 Cam shaft drive Module
MOD12 TPH filter Module
MOD14 Themis Module
MOD15 RAM Module
MOD20 TPH Cooling Fan Module
MOD21 OSB PCB Module
In SW < Rel. 2.0.0_C1 the Themis and RAM module are part of MOD07:
Vilis/Themis/RAM module.

Repair and Service
HC201000 : inputtraymodule.connected
Type Defect
Context 201000
Action SeeManual
Error E201000 is detected by a loop-back cable in the fixed part of connector

XS1. In case the signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back cable is not
HC201001 : pickupmodule.tray.configuration
Type Failure
Context 201001
Action None
Reason Wrong film format
Cure Specify correct film format
This error is displayed as " W201001: Wrong film format specified ".
The printer always prints the film on the available film format, no matter which
film format is specified at the modality.
This means, that warning W201001 just tells the operator, that the printer
uses a different film format than it is specified at the modality. The film will be
printed on the available film material.

Repair and Service
HC201003 : inputtraymodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 201003
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Inputtray Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect inputtray elabel
Reason2 Inputtray Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
This error is displayed as " W201003: Elabel failure on input tray ".
disadvantages:


Repair and Service
HC201004 : uppertray.overruled
Type Failure
Context 201004
Action None
Reason Inputtray overruled (dmax 2.0)
This error is displayed as " W201004: Input Tray Overruled ".

• the feature to allow printing for missing or malfunctioning RF-tag
reader is set to "printing with Dmax = 2.00" (can be changed in the
service engineer tools to "printing not possible")
Films will be printed with reduced Dmax of 2.0 O.D.
HC201005 : inputtraymodule.backside.jam
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Wrong film oriëntation in tray
Cure Correct film oriëntation
In SW < 2.0.0_C1 this error is displayed as "E201005: Upper Tray Disabled"

• the feature to allow printing for missing or malfunctioning RF-tag reader
is set to "printing not possible" (can be changed in the service engineer
tools to "printing with Dmax = 2.00")
In SW ≥ 2.0.0_C1 this error is displayed as "Backside printing - Remove
filmjam".

Repair and Service
HC201006 : inputtraymodule.connected.bis
Type Defect
Context 201006
Action SeeManual

HC201007 : inputtraymodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 201007
Action SeeManual
Reason Inputtray Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD01
This error is displayed as " W201007: Elabel failure on input tray".
HC201008 : rftag.typecode.invalid
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Unsupported film type in input tray

Repair and Service
HC201009 : rftag.formatcode.invalid
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Unsupported film format in input tray
HC201010 : rftag.unsupported.version
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC201011 : rftag.signature
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Wrong encryption in input tray
HC201012 : rftag.history.insecure
Type Defect
Context 201012
Action SeeManual
Cure Call service

Repair and Service
HC201013 : rftag.unreadable
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Unreadable tag in input tray
HC201014 : rftag.count.exceeded
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC201015 : rftag.no.filmcount
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC201016 : upper.filmcal.required
Type Failure
Context 201016
Action None
Reason Input tray needs calibration
Cure Perform input tray calibration
This error is displayed as "W201016: Tray needs film calibration ".

Repair and Service
HC201017 : rftag.collision
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Possible 2 tags in input tray
Cure Remove lowest tag
HC201018 : Tag-unsupported
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC201019 : tag.history.insecure
Type Defect
Context 201019
Action SeeManual
Cure Call service
HC201020 : inputtraymodule.uppertraytagreader
Type Defect
Context 01
Action Replace
Reason3 Tag reader not connected
Cure3 Connect tag reader
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD01
Type Defect
Context 01

Repair and Service
Action Replace
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD01
Type Defect
Context 01
Action Replace
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD01

Repair and Service
HC202000 : pickupmodule.filmpickupordrum
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Input jam
HC202001 : pickupmodule.filmpickup
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Input jam
HC202002 : pickupmodule.pickup.skew
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Input jam

Repair and Service
HC202003 : pickupmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 202003
Action None
Reason1 Pickup Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect pickup elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD02
This error is displayed as " W202003: Elabel failure on pickup ".
disadvantages:

HC202004 : pickupmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Pickup homing failed accidently

Repair and Service
HC202005 : pickupmodule.pickupmotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 202005
Action SeeManual
Cure SERVICE: check M3 and cabling!
This error is displayed as "E202005: Pickup motor short circuit: call service! ".
HC202006 : pickupmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 202006
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD02
This error is displayed as "W202006: Pickup drive elabel no config ".
HC202020 : pickupmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 02
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD02


Repair and Service
HC202021 : pickupmodule.pickupmotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 02
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD02

HC202022 : pickupmodule.S11.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 02
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD02


Repair and Service
HC203000 : printdrummodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 203000
Action None
Reason1 Printdrum Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect printdrum elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03
This error is displayed as " W203000: Elabel failure on printdrum ".
disadvantages:

HC203001 : printdrummodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 203001
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
This error is displayed as "W203001: Print drum elabel no config ".

Repair and Service
HC204000 : thmodule.high
Type Defect
Context 204000
Action SeeManual
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
This error is displayed as " E204000 - TH temperature too high ".
(1) Also check, whether the TH airflow

input or output is obstructed. Refer
to Figure 1
obstructed:
(2) Check the ambient temperature:
maximum allowed ambient
temperature = +30°C (95°F) at
max. 80% rel. humidity.
5365QRI11.WMF
Figure 1
HC204001 : thmodule.thpos.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason TBD
Cure TBD

Repair and Service
HC204002 : thmodule.thermalheadheating
Type Failure
Context 204002
Action None
Reason3 Connectors P6 on OSB not connected
Reason4 Connector XS6 on heater not connected
Cure4 Connect connector XS6
Reason5 Sensor S12 defect
Cure5 Replace MOD04
Reason6 PSU defect
Cure6 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " W204002: Blemmish heater defect ".
The blemish heater heats up the thermal head after switch on. This prevents
film artefacts called "blemish". Blemish looks as if some small drops of oil are
spread over the film.

Repair and Service
HC204003 : thmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 204003
Action None
Reason1 TH Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect TH elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
disadvantages:


Repair and Service
HC204004 : thmodule.device.current
Type Defect
Context 204004
Action SeeManual
Reason7 PSU defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason8 OSB defect
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " E204004 - Current to TH too high ".

Repair and Service
HC204005 : thmodule.powerlogic
Type Defect
Context 204005
Action SeeManual
Reason5 PSU defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason6 OSB defect
Cure6 Replace
Part OSB
Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " E204005 - Power logic not available on TH ".

Repair and Service
HC204006 : thmodule.headvoltageactuator
Type Defect
Context 204006
Action SeeManual
Reason7 PSU defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason8 OSB defect
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " E204006 - Power not available on TH ".

Repair and Service
HC204007 : thmodule.osb.connected
Type Defect
Context 204007
Action SeeManual
Reason1 P1 on OSB not connected
Cure1 Connect P1 on OSB
Reason2 P1 on VILIS not connected
Reason3 OSB defect
Cure3 Replace
Part OSB
This error is displayed as " E204007 - P1 (OSB) not connected ".
Error E204007 is detected by a loop-back circuit in connector P1 on the OSB

board: In case the signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back circuit is not
HC204008 : thmodule.thermalheadheater
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC204009 : thmodule.voltage.low
Type Failure
Context 204009
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as " W204009 - TH voltage too low ".

Repair and Service
HC204010 : thmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 204010
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC204012 : thmodule.highbis
Type Defect
Context 204012
Action SeeManual
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
This error is displayed as " E204012: TH temperature too high ".
HC204020 : thmodule.device.resistors
Type Defect
Context 04
Action Replace
Reason1 TBD
Cure1 TBD
Part TBD
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04

Repair and Service
HC204021 : thmodule.device.thermistors
Type Defect
Context 04
Action Replace
Reason5 TH defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD04
HC204022 : thmodule.thinstall
Type Defect
Context 04
Action Replace
Reason TH not installed, no data available
Cure Replace
Part MOD04

Repair and Service
HC205000 : outputmodule.connected
Type Defect
Context 205000
Action SeeManual
This error is displayed as " E205000 - XS2 or XS3 not connected ".
Error E205000 is detected by a loop-back cable in connectors XS2 and XS3:

In case the signal which is sent to one pin of the loop-back cable is not
HC205001 : outputmodule.cdm.init
Type Failure
Context 205001
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD05
This error is displayed as " W205001 - CDM init failed, no film calibration!".
In case of a defective CDM, which is part of the output module (MOD05), it is

still possible to print.
In case of a new film package – depending on the emulsion number of the

film – the contrast representation can be more or less different, as the
automatic film calibration is not operational anymore.

Repair and Service
HC205002 : outputmodule.intensity.scan
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Part Remove film jam
HC205003 : outputmodule.outputsensor.hi
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Output film jam
HC205004 : outputmodule.close.fail.or.film.input
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205005 : outputmodule.film.scan
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205006 : outputmodule.outputSensor.lo
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205007 : outputmodule.outputorscan.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None

Repair and Service

HC205008 : outputmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 205008
Action None
Reason1 Output Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect Output elabel
Reason2 Output Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05
disadvantages:


Repair and Service
HC205009 : outputmodule.cdm.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason CDM homing failed accidently
HC205010 : outputmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Output homing failed accidently
HC205011 : outputmodule.outputmotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 205011
Action SeeManual
This error is displayed as "E205011: Output motor short circuit: call service".
HC205012 : outputmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 205012
Action None
Reason Output Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

Repair and Service
HC205013 : outputmodule.cdm.densitometermotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 205013
Action SeeManual
This error is displayed as "E205013: CDM motor short circuit: call service ".
HC205014 : outputmodule.cdminstall
Type Failure
Context 205014
Action None
Reason CDM needs calibration
Cure Calibrate CDM
This error is displayed as "W205014: Printer needs CDM calibration".
HC205015 : outputmodule.outputsensor.low.during.pinting
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC205020 : outputmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205021 : outputmodule.outputmotor.connection
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205022 : outputmodule.cdm.densitometermotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205023 : outputmodule.cdm.move
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

Type Accidental
Context 05
Action None
Cure Replace

Repair and Service
Part MOD05
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205026 : outputmodule.cdm.S10.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC205027 : outputmodule.cdm.mdmlightsensor
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD05

HC205028 : outputmodule.outputsensortph
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Cure1 Connect S5
Reason2 Output module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05

HC206000 : drumdrivemodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 206000
Action None
Reason1 Drum drive Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect Drumdrive elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as " W20600: Elabel failure on drumdrive ".

Repair and Service
disadvantages:

HC206001 : drumdrivemodule.working
Type Defect
Context 206001
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S9
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "E206001: Drum drive defect"

Also check whether the drum drive belt is properly mounted.
HC206002 : drumdrivemodule.drummotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 206002
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect M1
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "E206002: Drum drive motor defect"

Repair and Service
HC206003 : drumdrivemodule.S9.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 206003
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S9
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "E206003: Drum drive sensor defect"
HC206004 : drumdrivemodule.move
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Drum drive movement failed accidently
HC206005 : drumdrivemodule.drummotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 206005
Action SeeManual
Reason Drum drive motor short circuit
Cure Check motor and wiring
This error is displayed as "E206005: Drum drive motor short circuit: call
service"

Repair and Service
HC206006 : drumdrivemodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 206006
Action None
Reason Drum drive module Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
This error is displayed as "W206006: Drum drive elabel no config "
HC207000 : vilismodule.dsh.connected
Type Defect
Context 207000
Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "E207000: P9 not connected"
Type Defect
Context 207001
Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "E207001: PSU not connected on VILIS "
HC207002 : vilismodule.keypad.connected
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 207002
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P8
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "E207002: P8 or P2 (display) not connected "
HC207003 : vilismodule.th.connected
Type Defect
Context 207003
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P14
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD07
Reason4 TH defect
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD04
This error is displayed as "E207003: P14 or P1 (TH) not connected "

Repair and Service
HC207004 : vilismodule.sensors.connected
Type Defect
Context 207004
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P2
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07

connected.
HC207005 : vilismodule.motors.connected
Type Defect
Context 207005
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P20
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07

connected.

Repair and Service
HC207006 : vilismodule.sensorsandio.connected
Type Defect
Context 207006
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P1
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07

connected.
HC207007 : vilismodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 207007
Action None
Reason1 VILIS Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect VILIS elabel
Reason2 VILIS Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "W207007: Elabel failure on VILIS "

The e-label on the Vilis is fixed soldered on the board (it cannot be
connected!)

Repair and Service
disadvantages:

HC207008 : vilismodule.power.3v3
Type Defect
Context 207008
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as "E207008: 3V3 out of tolerance on VILIS "
• in case the 3.3V signal is present on the power supply module

(MOD08) and
• the 3.3V signal cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU (MOD07).

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 207009
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08

(MOD08) and
• the 12V signal cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU (MOD07).
HC207010 : vilismodule.power.n12v
Type Defect
Context 207010
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as "E207010: - 12V out of tolerance on VILIS "
• in case the - 12V signal is present on the power supply module

(MOD08) and
• the -12V signal cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU (MOD07).
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 207011
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08

(MOD08) and
• the 24V signal is below its limit on the Vilis CPU (MOD07)
HC207012 : vilismodule.power.actuator
Type Defect
Context 207012
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure3 Fix cabling

(MOD08) and
• the 24V for the motors (P20) cannot be detected on the Vilis CPU
(MOD07)
HC207013 : vilismodule.power.sensor

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 207013
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure3 Fix cabling
This error is displayed as "E207013: 5V not available on sensors "
HC207014 : vilismodule.headvoltage
Type Defect
Context 207014
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P1 not connected on TH
Reason2 Connector P14 not connected on MEC
Cure2 Connect P14 on MEC
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD07
Cure6 Replace
Part MOD04

Repair and Service
HC207015 : duplicate.ipaddress
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason IP adress already in use
Cure Change IP adress
HC207016 : vilismodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 207016
Action None
Reason VILIS Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "W207016: VILIS elabel no config "
HC207017 : vilismodule.boardtemperature
Type Failure
Context 207017
Action None
Reason VILIS temp sensor defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07
This error is displayed as "W207017: Temp sensor on VILIS defect "

Repair and Service
HC207018 : themis.temperature
Type Defect
Context 207018
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Ambient temperature too high what could be caused by
continuous printing in an already warm environment or the
environment temperature is just too high
Cure1 If caused by continuous printing , this can be cured by waiting
until temperature comes down ; otherwise it has to be made
sure that the environment temperature comes down
Reason2 Cooling of Themis CPU board not efficient because of blocked
airflow
Cure2 Make sure that enough airflow is available for the Themis CPU
board by insuring that air inlets and outlets are completely free
Reason3 Defect CPU on Themis
Cure3 Power off printer and replace
Part themis
This error is displayed as "E207018: CPU temperature too high "
HC207019 : disk.space
Type Failure
Context 207019
Action None
Reason Compact flash full
Cure Call service
This error is displayed as "W207019: Internal CF-memory low "
HC207020 : vilismodule.sn.mismatch
Type Defect
Context 207020
Action SeeManual
Reason SN mismatch
Cure Call service
This error is displayed as "E207020: Incorrect internal CF identification "

Repair and Service
HC207021 : themis.temperature.warning
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Themis temperature too high
Cure Cool down themis
HC207024 : vilismodule.serialadc
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207025 : vilismodule.bitgenerator
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
HC207026 : vilismodule.m16
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

HC207027 : vilismodule.fpga
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

It is only available in SW Rel. 1.8 and 1.9.

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace


Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07

Type Defect
Context 7
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
HC208000 : powersupplymodule.temperature
Type Defect
Context 208000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 PSU too hot
Cure1 Switch off printer and let it cool down
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " E208000: PSU temperature too high ".
• Also check, whether the

power supply airflow input or
output is obstructed. Refer to
Figure 2.
obstructed:
• Check the ambient
temperature: maximum
allowed ambient temperature
= +30°C (95°F) at max. 80%
rel. humidity.
5365QRI36.GIF
Figure 2

Repair and Service
HC208001 : powersupplymodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 208001
Action None
Reason1 PSU Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect PSU elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as W208001 Elabel failure on PSU ".
disadvantages:


Repair and Service
HC208002 : powersupplymodule.powerth.current
Type Defect
Context 208002
Action SeeManual
Reason1 TH power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check TH power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " E208002: Current to TH too high ".
HC208003 : powersupplymodule.powermotor.current
Type Defect
Context 208003
Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " E208003: Current to motors too high ".
HC208004 : powersupplymodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 208004
Action None
Reason PSU module Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
This error is displayed as " W208004: E-Label failure on PSU ".

Repair and Service
HC208005 : powersupplymodule.temperature.warning
Type Failure
Context 208005
Action None
Reason PSU temperature high
Cure Cool down the PSU
This error is displayed as " W208005: Power Supply temperature too high ".
HC208006 : powersupplymodule.down
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason1 PSU temperature high
Cure1 Cool down the PSU
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC208020 : powersupplymodule.powerth
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08

Repair and Service
HC208022 : powersupplymodule.powermotor
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC208024 : powersupplymodule.powerlogic
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC208025 : powersupplymodule.power3v3
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08

Repair and Service
HC208026 : powersupplymodule.power12v
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC208027 : powersupplymodule.powern12v
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC209000 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context 209000
Action None
Reason1 Display Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect display elabel
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09

connected!)

Repair and Service
disadvantages:

HC209001 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context 209001
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD09

connected!)
HC209002 : displaykeypadmodule.keyboardtemperature
Type Failure
Context 209002
Action None
Reason Keyboard temp sensor defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
This error is displayed as " W209002: Display temp sensor defect ".

Repair and Service
HC210000 : inputsensormodule.inputsensorone.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context 210000
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC210001 : inputsensormodule.inputsensorbis.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context 210001
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC210002 : inputsensormodule.connected
Type Defect
Context 210002
Action SeeManual
Reason XS5 not conencted
Cure Connect XS5
This error is displayed as " E210002: XS5 not connected"

HC210003 : inputsensormodule.inputsensortph
Type Failure

Repair and Service
Context 210003
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC210004 : inputsensormodule.inputsensortphbis
Type Failure
Context 210004
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
Type Failure
Context 210005
Action None
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
Type Failure
Context 210005
Action None

Repair and Service
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC210020 : inputsensormodule.working
Type Defect
Context 10
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
HC211000 : camshaftmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Drum drive move failed accidently

Repair and Service
HC211001 : camshaftmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 211001
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S7
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
This error is displayed as " E211001 - Camdrive defect "

version < 1.95 is still installed, upgrade to SW ≥ 1.95_C1. This message is
originated in a wrong hardware signal on cold Vilis CPU when the motors are
activated.
HC211002 : camshaftmodule.drumpositionmotor.connection
Type Defect
Context 211002
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect M2
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
This error is displayed as " E211002 - Motor M2 defect "

HC211003 : camshaftmodule.S7.pulsing
Type Defect
Context 211003
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S7
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
This error is displayed as " E211003"
HC211004 : camshaftmodule.drumpositionmotor.shortcircuit
Type Defect

Repair and Service
Context 211004
Action SeeManual
Reason M2 short circuited
This error is displayed as " E211004 - M2 short circuit: call service "
HC212020 : coolingfanmodule.thermalheadfan.connection
Type Defect
Context 212020
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Coolingfan not connected
Cure1 Connect coolingfan
Reason2 Coolingfan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12
This error is displayed as " E212020 - TH coolingfan defect"
HC212021 : coolingfanmodule.thermalheadfan.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 212021
Action SeeManual
Reason Coolingfan short circuit
Cure Check coolingfan and wiring
This error is displayed as " E211021 - TH fan short circuit: call service "

Repair and Service
HC213000 : topcover.open
Type Accidental
Context 213000
Action None
Reason Top cover open
Cure1 Close top cover
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14

Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
This error is displayed as " E214023 - Portex failure on Themis "
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
This error is displayed as " MOD14 - Please replace module "

Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
Type Defect
Context 15
Action Replace
Reason RAM defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD15
HC220000 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.connection
Type Failure
Context 220000
Action None
Reason1 EBox fan not connected
Cure1 Connect EBox fan
Reason2 EBox fan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD20
This error is displayed as " W220000 - EBox fan defect "

Repair and Service
HC220001 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context 220001
Action SeeManual
Reason EBox fan short circuit
Cure Check EBox fan and wiring

Repair and Service
DD+DIS008.04E Electrical and mechanical codings, fuse tables and LED’s
Chapter 3.4:
List of contents
1 Codings ...................................................................... 1
2 Fuses .......................................................................... 1
3 LEDs ........................................................................... 1
3.1 VILIS Board .............................................................................. 2
3.2 THEMIS Board (plugged into the VILIS Board) ..................... 2
3.3 Power Supply........................................................................... 3
3.4 Front Panel............................................................................... 4
3.5 Rear panel ................................................................................ 5
Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5300 Chapter 3.4 / I

Repair and Service
1 Codings
Board Jumper Default Settings Function

N/A
2 Fuses
The printer has no fuses that can be replaced.
If one of the fuses in the power supply is defective, the whole Power supply
unit must be replaced - refer to section 3.5.
3 LEDs
The following tables show the status of the LED indications and the
corresponding function:
LED's on... Refer to

VILIS Board 3.1
THEMIS Board 3.2
Power supply 3.3
Front Panel 3.4
Rear Panel 3.5
Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5300 Chapter 3.4 / 1

Repair and Service
Electrical and mechanical codings, fuse tables and LED’s DD+DIS008.04E
3.1 VILIS Board
Name Led Color Function

(**) NTRAFFIC D1 yellow Network activity
(**) NGOOD_LINK D2 yellow Network connected
(**) 100MBit_speed
D3 yellow High speed network
IMGCTRL_0 D4 yellow Software controllable
D5 green +3.3V present
NOT present D6
NOT present D7
NOT present D8
D9 green +24V present
NOT present D11
IMGCTRL_CONFDONE D12 yellow FPGA config done if not => ALARM
IMGCTRL_1 D13 yellow Software controllable
UP_LED0 D14 yellow Software controllable
UP_LED1 D15 yellow Software controllable
(**) IDE_DASP D16 yellow IDE activity
D17 green -12V present
CP_ACTLED D19 yellow Disc activity controlled by PORTEX
Legend : (**) are LEDs situated at the rear panel (refer to 3.5).
3.2 THEMIS Board (plugged into the VILIS Board)

D1 yellow Software controllable
V25 D2 green 2.5 for MPC107 host bridge and FPGA
VCORE D3 green CPU core voltage
CS1 D4 yellow Chip select for portX bus
V33 D5 green 3.3V for most logic on board
FPGA D6 red FPGA configuration done
If FPGA NOT configured => ALARM
VCC D8 green 5V for remaining logic on board
CS0 D9 yellow Chip select for portX bus
CPU D11 yellow
Chapter 3.4 / 2 Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revision 0

Repair and Service
3.3 Power Supply
Overtemp +3.3V +5V +12V -12V +24V 13..27V
5365_Reg03_04_002_e.eps
Figure 1
LED Status Color Function

Overtemp On Red Temperature inside power supply
exceeded permissible limits. Operation
not possible*.
Off Temperature inside power supply
within permissible limit.
+ 3.3 V On Green +3.3 V present
Off +3.3 V not present
+5V On Green +5 V present
Off +5 V not present
+12 V On Green +12 V present
-12 V On Green -12 V present
Off -12 V not present
+24 V On Green +24 V present
13..27 V On Green voltage between 13 V and 27 V
Off voltage < 13 V
*When the temperature inside the power supply exceeds the permissible limit,
printing can continue for up to 120 seconds. After this delay the power supply
switches off the power and checks the temperature every 20 seconds. As
soon as the temperature is below the permissible limit, it switches on again.

Repair and Service
Electrical and mechanical codings, fuse tables and LED’s DD+DIS008.04E
3.4 Front Panel
Led Color Function

D1 green 12V power present
D2..D25 green / red See table below
D3 green 5V power present
Color Light Status Receive Printing

Jobs ? possible ?
Ready No No
Constant
(stand-by)
Startup No No
sequence
Receiving jobs Yes Yes
Green
Calculating Yes Yes
Blinking
Printing Yes Yes
Calibrating Yes No
Installation No No
Key-operator Yes/No Yes/No
Service mode No No
Blinking Film jam Yes No
Red
Warning Yes Yes
Constant Error status No No

Repair and Service
3.5 Rear panel
D16
D3
D1
D2
5365_Reg03_04_001_e.eps
Figure 2

NTRAFFIC D1 yellow Network activity
NGOOD_LINK D2 yellow Network connected
100MBit_speed D3 yellow High speed network
IDE_DASP D16 yellow IDE activity
Note: These LEDs are part of the VILIS board (refer to 3.1).

Repair and Service
Replacement of Parts
DD+DIS270.05E
Chapter 3.5:
List of contents
1 Covers ........................................................................ 1
1.1 Front cover............................................................................... 1
1.2 Right side cover....................................................................... 5
1.3 Left side cover ......................................................................... 8
1.4 Top cover module.................................................................. 11
1.5 Output tray cover................................................................... 13
1.6 Air filter................................................................................... 17
2 Electronics ............................................................... 19
2.1 Keypad & Display module..................................................... 19
2.2 Compact Flash card .............................................................. 21
2.3 Safety switch.......................................................................... 24
2.4 TPH flat cable......................................................................... 29
2.5 Main board cooling fan ......................................................... 35
2.6 Main board (VILIS - Themis) ................................................. 39
2.7 Power supply ......................................................................... 43
2.8 OSB switch board.................................................................. 46
2.9 TPH cooling fan ..................................................................... 48
3 Input & Output area................................................. 53

3.1 Input block module................................................................ 53
3.2 Output module ....................................................................... 55
3.3 Pick up module ...................................................................... 57
3.4 Input tray ................................................................................ 60
3.5 Extension cable block module ............................................. 63
4 Printing area ............................................................ 65

4.1 Main drive pulley & Drum belt .............................................. 65
4.2 Input sensors module ........................................................... 68

2005-08-05 (Type 5365/100) Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
Replacement of Parts DD+DIS270.05E
4.3 Print drum module................................................................. 74

4.4 Drum drive module................................................................ 81
4.5 Thermal print head uni.......................................................... 84
4.6 Cam shaft drive ..................................................................... 88

Chapter 3.5 / II DRYSTAR 5300 Edition 1, Revision 7
Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
1 Covers
1.1 Front cover
Required spare parts:

CM+343346.X
Front cover
5365_reg03_05_001_e.eps
Figure 1
Required tools:
Crosshead screwdriver
Required time:
30 min
Removal:
(1) Open the Top cover.
5365_reg03_05_002_e.eps
Figure 2
(2) Remove the 2 screws (A).
5365_reg03_05_165_e.eps
Figure 3

Repair and Service
(3) Loosen the 2 screws (B).
5365_reg03_05_003_e.eps
Figure 4
(4) Remove the Front cover.
5365_reg03_05_004_e.eps
Figure 5
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Front into place.
5365_reg03_05_173_e.eps
Figure 6


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(2) Tilt the cover over the 2

pins (C).
5365_reg03_05_006_e.eps
Figure 7
(3) Remount the 2 screws (A).
5365_reg03_05_166_e.eps
Figure 8
(4) Tighten the 2 screws (B).
5365_reg03_05_000_e.eps
Figure 9

Repair and Service
(5) Close the Top cover.
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 10


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
1.2 Right side cover

CM+343344.X
Right side cover
5365_reg03_05_007_e.eps
Figure 11
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_008_e.eps
Figure 12
5365_reg03_05_023_e.eps
Figure 13

Repair and Service
5365_reg03_05_009_e.eps
Figure 14
(5) Lift up the Right side cover to

remove it.
5365_reg03_05_010_e.eps
Figure 15
Re-installation:
(1) Tilt the Right side cover over the
3 pins (C).
C
C
5365_reg03_05_011_e.eps
Figure 16


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
5365_reg03_05_024_e.eps
Figure 17
5365_reg03_05_012_e.eps
Figure 18
(4) Re-install the Front cover.

Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 19

Repair and Service
1.3 Left side cover

CM+343343.X
Left side cover
5365_reg03_05_013_e.eps
Figure 20
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_008_e.eps
Figure 21
5365_reg03_05_025_e.eps
Figure 22


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(4) Remove the 2 screws (B).
5365_reg03_05_015_e.eps
Figure 23
(5) Lift up the Left side cover to

remove it.
5365_reg03_05_016_e.eps
Figure 24
Re-installation:
(1) Tilt the Left side cover over the C
3 pins (C).
5365_reg03_05_017_e.eps
Figure 25

Repair and Service
(2) Remount the 2 screws (B).
5365_reg03_05_018_e.eps
Figure 26
(3) Tighten the 2 screws (A).
5365_reg03_05_033_e.eps
Figure 27

Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 28


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
1.4 Top cover module

CM+343345.X
Top cover module
5365_reg03_05_019_e.eps
Figure 29
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
(3) Remove the Right side cover.
Refer to 1.2.
(4) Remove the Left side cover.
Refer to 1.3.
5365_reg03_05_021_e.eps
Figure 30

Repair and Service
(5) Remove the 2 screws (A) at the

left side of the Top cover.
A
(6) Remove the 2 screws (A) at the
right side of the Top cover.
(7) Remove the Top cover.
5365_reg03_05_020_e.eps
Figure 31
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Top cover into place and
A
remount the 2 screws (A) at the
left side.
(2) Remount the 2 screws (A) at the
right side.
5365_reg03_05_020_e.eps
Figure 32
(3) Re-install Right side cover.

Refer to 1.2.
(4) Re-install Left side cover.
Refer to 1.3.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_022_e.eps
Figure 33


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
1.5 Output tray cover

CM+343347.X
Output tray cover
5365_reg03_05_149_e.eps
Figure 34
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.3.
Refer to 1.2.
(5) Remove the Main board.
Refer to 2.6.
5365_reg03_05_021_e.eps
Figure 35
(6) Remove the screw (A).
5365_reg03_05_163_e.eps
Figure 36

Repair and Service
(7) Remove the screw (B).
5365_reg03_05_154_e.eps
Figure 37
(8) Lift up and pull out the Output

tray cover.
5365_reg03_05_155_e.eps
Figure 38
Re-installation:
(1) Slide the two legs of the
brackets from the Output tray
cover over the axes.
5365_reg03_05_156_e.eps
Figure 39


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(2) Put the Output tray cover into

place.
5365_reg03_05_157_e.eps
Figure 40
(3) Remount the screw (B).
5365_reg03_05_154_e.eps
Figure 41
(4) Remount the screw (A).
5365_reg03_05_163_e.eps
Figure 42

Repair and Service
(5) Re-install the Main board.

Refer to 2.6.
(6) Re-install the Left side cover.
Refer to 1.3.
(7) Re-install the Right side cover.
Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_022_e.eps
Figure 43


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
1.6 Air filter

CM+343350.X
Air filter
5365_reg03_05_122_e.eps
Figure 44
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
5365_reg03_05_002_e.eps
Figure 45

(3) Remove the Air filter.
5365_reg03_05_123_e.eps
Figure 46

Repair and Service
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Air filter into place.
5365_reg03_05_124_e.eps
Figure 47
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 48


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
2 Electronics
2.1 Keypad & Display module

CM+343336.X
Keypad & Display module
5365_reg03_05_027_e.eps
Figure 49
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.2.
5365_reg03_05_028_e.eps
Figure 50
(4) Unplug the connector (A).

B
(5) Unplug the connector (B). D
(6) Remove the screw (C).
(7) Remove the screw (D).
(8) Remove the Keypad & Display
module.
A
C
5365_reg03_05_029_e.eps
Figure 51

Repair and Service
Re-installation:
(1) Align the Keypad & Display
module with the 2 holes (E) in
the frame.
5365_reg03_05_030_e.eps
Figure 52
(2) Remount the screw (D).

(3) Remount the screw (C). B
(4) Plug the connector (B).
D
(5) Plug the connector (A).
A
5365_reg03_05_031_e.eps
Figure 53

Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_026_e.eps
Figure 54


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
2.2 Compact Flash card

CM+343356.X

Compact Flash card (128 MB)

5365_reg03_05_032_e.eps
Figure 55
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.2.
5365_reg03_05_028_e.eps
Figure 56

Repair and Service

(5) Remove the EMI shield.
5365_reg03_05_034_e.eps
Figure 57
(6) Push the lever inside towards

the Main board to remove the
CF-card.
5365_reg03_05_035_e.eps
Figure 58
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Compact Flash card in
the card holder, and push until
the lever comes out.
5365_reg03_05_036_e.eps
Figure 59


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(2) Re-install the EMI shield.

A
A
A
5365_reg03_05_037_e.eps
Figure 60

Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_026_e.eps
Figure 61
For a description about SW installation refer to chapter 3.2, Tools.

Repair and Service
2.3 Safety switch

CM+343354.X
Safety switch
5365_reg03_05_038_e.eps
Figure 62
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
5365_reg03_05_002_e.eps
Figure 63
(2) Open the Hold-down bracket.
5365_reg03_05_039_e.eps
Figure 64


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(3) Open the Thermal print head

unit.
5365_reg03_05_040_e.eps
Figure 65
(4) Close the Hold-down bracket.
5365_reg03_05_041_e.eps
Figure 66
(5) Remove 2 screws (A).

(6) Gently lift out the Thermal print
head cooling fan. As it is still
connected to the printer, rest it
on the frame of the printer.
5365_reg03_05_042_e.eps
Figure 67

Repair and Service
(7) With the screwdriver, push the

snap at one side of the switch.
(8) Release the Safety switch.
5365_reg03_05_043_e.eps
Figure 68
(9) Unplug the 2 connectors.
5365_reg03_05_044_e.eps
Figure 69
Re-installation:
(1) Replug the 2 connectors.
(2) Put the Safety switch in the
square hole and push it until it
snaps behind the metal plate.
5365_reg03_05_045_e.eps
Figure 70


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(3) Gently re-install the Thermal

print head cooling fan.
(4) Tighten 2 screws (A).
5365_reg03_05_047_e.eps
Figure 71
5365_reg03_05_048_e.eps
Figure 72
(6) Close the Thermal print head

unit.
5365_reg03_05_049_e.eps
Figure 73

Repair and Service
5365_reg03_05_050_e.eps
Figure 74
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 75


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
2.4 TPH flat cable

CM+343555.X
TPH flat cable
5365_reg03_05_051_e.eps
Figure 76
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1
Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 2.6.
(5) Remove the Power supply uit.
Refer to 2.7
5365_reg03_05_021_e.eps
Figure 77
(6) Open Hold-down bracket.
5365_reg03_05_039_e.eps
Figure 78

Repair and Service

unit.
5365_reg03_05_040_e.eps
Figure 79
5365_reg03_05_061_e.eps
Figure 80

(10) Remove the metal plate.
B B
5365_reg03_05_172_e.eps
Figure 81


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(11) Free the TPH flat cable from its

holders (C).
5365_reg03_05_062_e.eps C
Figure 82
(12) Take the connector at the

Thermal print head side out of
the printer.
(13) If necessary, help the connector
F
trough the hole (F).
5365_reg03_05_066_e.eps
Figure 83
(14) Free the TPH flat cable from its

holders (E) at the Main board
side.
5365_reg03_05_070_e.eps
Figure 84
(15) At the back side, pull the TPH

flat cable gently through the
hole (G) out of the printer.
5365_reg03_05_078_e.eps
Figure 85

Repair and Service
Re-installation:
(1) Put the connector of the Main
board side trough the
hole (G).
(2) Pull the connector trough the
hole (G) and provide sufficient /
length of the TPH flat cable to
be able to connect it to the Main 5365_reg03_05_078_e.eps
board.
Figure 86
(3) Put the TPH flat cable in its

holders (E).
5365_reg03_05_070_e.eps
Figure 87
(4) Put the connector of the

Thermal print head side trough
the hole (F).
5365_reg03_05_066_e.eps
Figure 88


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(5) Pull the TPH flat cable gently to

the right and connect it to the
Thermal print head plug (A).
5365_reg03_05_061_e.eps
Figure 89
(6) Put the TPH flat cable into its

holders (C).
5365_reg03_05_062_e.eps C
Figure 90
(7) Put the metal plate into place.

A A
5365_reg03_05_085_e.eps
Figure 91

Repair and Service

unit.
5365_reg03_05_049_e.eps
Figure 92
5365_reg03_05_050_e.eps
Figure 93
(11) Re-install the Power supply unit.
Refer to 2.7
Refer to 2.6.
Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_022_e.eps
Figure 94


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
2.5 Main board cooling fan

CM+343340.X
Main board cooling fan
5365_reg03_05_054_e.eps
Figure 95
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.2.
5365_reg03_05_028_e.eps
Figure 96

Repair and Service

5365_reg03_05_034_e.eps
Figure 97
(6) Release the cooling fan cable C B

from its 2 holders (B).
(7) Unplug the connector (C).
5365_reg03_05_056_e.eps
Figure 98
(8) Remove the 4 screws (D).

D
5365_reg03_05_057_e.eps
Figure 99


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(9) Remove the cooling fan.
5365_reg03_05_058_e.eps
Figure 100
Re-installation:
(1) Put the cooling fan into place.
5365_reg03_05_059_e.eps
Figure 101
(2) Remount the 4 screws (D).

D
5365_reg03_05_057_e.eps
Figure 102

Repair and Service
(3) Plug the connector (C). C B
(4) Put the cooling fan cable into

the 2 cable holders (B).
5365_reg03_05_060_e.eps
Figure 103
(5) Put the EMI shield into place.

A
A
A
5365_reg03_05_037_e.eps
Figure 104

Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_026_e.eps
Figure 105


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
2.6 Main board (VILIS - Themis)

CM+343335.X
Main board
5365_reg03_05_063_e.eps
Figure 106
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.2.
5365_reg03_05_028_e.eps
Figure 107

Repair and Service
(4) Remove the network cable.

(5) Remove the null-modem cable,
if any.
5365_reg03_05_065_e.eps
Figure 108

5365_reg03_05_034_e.eps
Figure 109
(8) Unplug the 8 connectors

(1 to 8).
1 2 3 4
B 5 6 7 8
5365_reg03_05_067_e.eps
Figure 110


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(10) Shift the Main board to the left

and remove it from the printer.
5365_reg03_05_068_e.eps
Figure 111
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Main board into place
and shift it to the right to block it.
5365_reg03_05_069_e.eps
Figure 112

(3) Plug the 8 connectors (1 to 8).
1 2 3 4
B 5 6 7 8
5365_reg03_05_067_e.eps
Figure 113

Repair and Service

A
A
A
5365_reg03_05_037_e.eps
Figure 114
(6) Plug the null-modem cable, if

any.
(7) Plug the network cable.
5365_reg03_05_072_e.eps
Figure 115

Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_026_e.eps
Figure 116


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
2.7 Power supply

CM+343337.X
Power supply
5365_reg03_05_073_e.eps
Figure 117
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 2.6.
5365_reg03_05_028_e.eps
Figure 118
(5) Unplug the 3 connectors (A).
(6) Unplug the connector (B).
A B
5365_reg03_05_074_e.eps
Figure 119

Repair and Service
(7) Remove the 5 screws (C).
C
C
C 5365_reg03_05_075_e.eps
Figure 120
(8) Pull back the Power supply to

remove it.
5365_reg03_05_076_e.eps
Figure 121
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Power supply into place.
(2) Tighten the 5 screws (C). C
C
C
C 5365_reg03_05_077_e.eps
Figure 122


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(3) Plug the 3 connectors (A).

(4) Plug the connector (B).
A B
5365_reg03_05_074_e.eps
Figure 123

Refer to 2.6.
Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_026_e.eps
Figure 124

Repair and Service
2.8 OSB switch board

CM+343349.X
OSB switch board
5365_reg03_05_079_e.eps
Figure 125
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
(2) Remove the metal plate. A A
5365_reg03_05_080_e.eps
Figure 126
(3) Unplug the 3 connectors

(B, C, D).
(4) Unscrew the 2 connectors
(E1, E2).
(5) Remove the screw (F).
B C E1 F E2 D
5365_reg03_05_081_e.eps
Figure 127


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(6) Shift the OSB switch board to

the right and pull it out.
5365_reg03_05_083_e.eps
Figure 128
Re-installation:
(1) Slide the OSB switch board over
the pins and shift it to the left to
lock it.
5365_reg03_05_082_e.eps
Figure 129
(2) Remount the screw (F).

(3) Plug the 3 connectors (B, C, D).
(4) Fasten the screw of the 2
connectors (E1, E2).
B C E1 F E2 D
5365_reg03_05_081_e.eps
Figure 130
(5) Put the metal plate into place.

A A
5365_reg03_05_085_e.eps
Figure 131

Repair and Service
2.9 TPH cooling fan

CM+343339.X
TPH cooling fan (including Air filter)
5365_reg03_05_086_e.eps
Figure 132
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
5365_reg03_05_002_e.eps
Figure 133
5365_reg03_05_039_e.eps
Figure 134


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E

unit.
5365_reg03_05_040_e.eps
Figure 135
5365_reg03_05_041_e.eps
Figure 136
5365_reg03_05_042_e.eps
Figure 137

Repair and Service
(6) The TPH cooling fan is now still C

attached to the printer by a
cable. Lift the fan carefully and
rest it on the frame of the B
printer.
(7) Open the 2 cable holders (B).
(8) Unplug the connector (C).
(9) Remove the TPH cooling fan.
5365_reg03_05_087_e.eps
Figure 138
Re-installation: C
(1) Put the TPH cooling fan on the
frame of the printer near its final
B
location.
(2) Plug the connector (C).
(3) Put the cable in the 2 cable
holders (B).
5365_reg03_05_087_e.eps
Figure 139


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(4) Put the TPH cooling fan into

place.
5365_reg03_05_047_e.eps
Figure 140
5365_reg03_05_048_e.eps
Figure 141

unit.
5365_reg03_05_049_e.eps
Figure 142

Repair and Service
5365_reg03_05_050_e.eps
Figure 143
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 144


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
3 Input & Output area

3.1 Input block module

CM+343332.X
Input block module
5365_reg03_05_088_e.eps
Figure 145
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal: B
(1) Put the printer at the edge of a
table with the trays positioned
over the edge.
(2) Remove the 3 screws (B) - start
with both outer ones.
5365_reg03_05_089_e.eps
Figure 146

(4) Remove the Input block module.
5365_reg03_05_090_e.eps
Figure 147

Repair and Service
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Input block module into
place.
5365_reg03_05_091_e.eps
Figure 148
(3) Remount the 3 screws (B) - start B

with the middle one.
5365_reg03_05_092_e.eps
Figure 149


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
3.2 Output module

CM+343330.X
Output module
5365_reg03_05_093_e.eps
Figure 150
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_008_e.eps
Figure 151

(4) Unplug the 2 connectors (B). )
*
5365_reg03_05_094_e.eps
Figure 152

Repair and Service
(5) Remove the Output module.
5365_reg03_05_095_e.eps
Figure 153
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Output module into
place.
5365_reg03_05_096_e.eps
Figure 154

(3) Plug the 2 connectors (B). A
B
5365_reg03_05_097_e.eps
Figure 155

Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 156


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
3.3 Pick up module

CM+343331.X
Pick up module
5365_reg03_05_098_e.eps
Figure 157
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
(1) Open the Output tray.
(2) Remove any film pack from the
Input tray.
5365_reg03_05_099_e.eps
Figure 158
5365_reg03_05_100_e.eps
Figure 159

Repair and Service
(4) Remove the Pick up module.
5365_reg03_05_101_e.eps
Figure 160
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Pick up module into
place.
5365_reg03_05_115_e.eps
Figure 161
5365_reg03_05_100_e.eps
Figure 162


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(3) Put back the film pack.

(4) Close the Output tray.
5365_reg03_05_116_e.eps
Figure 163

Repair and Service
3.4 Input tray

CM+343348.X
Input tray
5365_reg03_05_117_e.eps
Figure 164
Required tools:
Short Crosshead screwdriver (< 15 cm), preferably with magnetic head.
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
(1) Open the Output tray.
(2) Remove any film pack from the
Input tray.
(3) Remove the Input block module.
Refer to 3.1.
5365_reg03_05_099_e.eps
Figure 165
5365_reg03_05_118_e.eps
Figure 166


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(5) Remove the Input tray.
5365_reg03_05_119_e.eps
Figure 167
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Input tray into place.
Note: Hold down the film plate while
doing this!
5365_reg03_05_120_e.eps
Figure 168
5365_reg03_05_121_e.eps
Figure 169

Repair and Service
(3) Re-install the Input block

module.
Refer to 3.1.
(4) Re-load the film pack.
(5) Close the Output tray.
5365_reg03_05_116_e.eps
Figure 170


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
3.5 Extension cable block module

CM+343348.X
Extension cable block module
5365_reg03_05_174_e.eps
Figure 171
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 2.6.
(2) Remove the Input Block
module. Refer to 3.1.
A
(3) Remove the Input tray.
Refer to 3.4.
(4) Unplug connector A.
5365_reg03_05_175_e.eps
B
(5) Pull cable gently through hole B.
(6) Remove cable.
5365_reg03_05_176_e.eps
Figure 172

Repair and Service
Re-installation:
(1) Pull cable gently through hole B. B
5365_reg03_05_176_e.eps
(2) Plug connector A.

(3) Remount the Input tray.
Refer to 3.4.
(4) Remount the Input Block
module. Refer to 3.1. A
(5) Remount the Main board.
Refer to 2.6.
5365_reg03_05_175_e.eps
Figure 173


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
4 Printing area
4.1 Main drive pulley & Drum belt

CM+343352.X
Main drive pulley & Drum belt
5365_reg03_05_107_e.eps
Figure 174
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Always replace main drive pulley and belt together, to prevent image artifacts
(17 mm banding) due to wear and dirt at pulley and belt.
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.3.
5365_reg03_05_108_e.eps
Figure 175

Repair and Service
(4) Hold back the belt tensioner and

remove the Drum belt.
5365_reg03_05_109_e.eps
Figure 176
(5) Keep the Main drive pulley by

hand, and remove the screw
(A).
A
(6) Remove the Main drive
pulley (B).
5365_reg03_05_110_e.eps
Figure 177
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Main drive pulley (B)
into place. Make sure to align A
the flat face inside the wheel
with the one on the shaft (C).
B
5365_reg03_05_111_e.eps
Figure 178


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E

put the Drum belt into place.
(4) Gently release the belt tensioner
and verify that the Drum belt is
running correctly over the
pulleys.
5365_reg03_05_112_e.eps
Figure 179

Refer to 1.3.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_113_e.eps
Figure 180

Repair and Service
4.2 Input sensors module

CM+343342.X
Input sensors module
5365_reg03_05_114_e.eps
Figure 181
Required tools:
Waterproof pen
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.3.
5365_reg03_05_108_e.eps
Figure 182
(4) Mark belt outside with a

waterproof pen: It has to be
mounted again with this mark rpro
of
wate
outside, to ensure that the
running direction stays the
same. 536535aa.cdr
Figure 183


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E

5365_reg03_05_109_e.eps
Figure 184

(A).
A
pulley (B).
5365_reg03_05_110_e.eps
Figure 185
5365_reg03_05_039_e.eps
Figure 186

Repair and Service

unit.
5365_reg03_05_040_e.eps
Figure 187

B
(11) Remove the screw (B).
5365_reg03_05_125_e.eps
Figure 188
(12) Slide out the Input sensors

module.
5365_reg03_05_126_e.eps
Figure 189


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
Re-installation:
(1) Slide the Input sensors module
into the recess.
5365_reg03_05_127_e.eps
Figure 190
(2) Remount the screw (B).

B
5365_reg03_05_125_e.eps
Figure 191

unit.
5365_reg03_05_049_e.eps
Figure 192

Repair and Service
5365_reg03_05_050_e.eps
Figure 193

into place. Make sure to align
with the one on the shaft (C). A
5365_reg03_05_111_e.eps
Figure 194

pulleys.
5365_reg03_05_112_e.eps
Figure 195


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(10) Observe belt running direction:

Mount belt with mark outside.
Possible image artifacts (17 mm
banding) if mounted the wrong
way.
536535ac.cdr
Figure 196

Refer to 1.3.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_113_e.eps
Figure 197

Repair and Service
4.3 Print drum module

CM+343333.X
Print drum module
536535ae.cdr
Figure 198
Required tools:
Waterproof pen
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.3.
5365_reg03_05_108_e.eps
Figure 199
(4) Mark belt outside with a

waterproof pen: It has to be
mounted again with this mark rpro
of
wate
outside, to ensure that the
running direction stays the
same. 536535aa.cdr
Figure 200


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E

5365_reg03_05_109_e.eps
Figure 201

(A).
A
pulley (B).
5365_reg03_05_110_e.eps
Figure 202
5365_reg03_05_039_e.eps
Figure 203

Repair and Service

unit.
5365_reg03_05_040_e.eps
Figure 204

(11) Remove the 2 screws (B). A
5365_reg03_05_128_e.eps
Figure 205
(12) Insert auxiliary fittings which are

part of delivery: This lifts the
pressure arms to make the
drum removal and installation
easier.
536535af.cdr
Figure 206


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(13) Shift Print drum module a little 2

bit to the left and lift it out to
remove it.
1
2
5365_reg03_05_129_e.eps
Figure 207
Re-installation:
(1) Slide the Print drum module
carefully downward.
5365_reg03_05_130_e.eps
Figure 208
(2) Shift the Print drum module to

the right. Verify that the 2 Drum
bearings fit well under the Cam
shaft levers.
5365_reg03_05_167_e.eps
Figure 209

Repair and Service
(3) Push the 2 brackets (C) gently C

into place in their guiding holes.
5365_reg03_05_168_e.eps
Figure 210
(4) Remove the auxiliary fittings
536535ag.cdr
Figure 211

(6) Plug the connector (A). A
5365_reg03_05_128_e.eps
Figure 212
(7) Close Thermal print head unit.
5365_reg03_05_049_e.eps
Figure 213


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
5365_reg03_05_050_e.eps
Figure 214

into place. Make sure to align
with the one on the shaft (C). A
5365_reg03_05_111_e.eps
Figure 215

pulleys.
5365_reg03_05_112_e.eps
Figure 216

Repair and Service
(13) Observe belt running direction:

Mount belt with mark outside.
Possible image artifacts (17 mm
banding) if mounted the wrong
way.
536535ac.cdr
Figure 217
(14) Remount the Left side cover.

Refer to 1.3.
(15) Remount the Front cover.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_113_e.eps
Figure 218


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
4.4 Drum drive module

CM+343338.X
Drum drive module
536535ad.cdr
Figure 219
Always replace the drum drive motor together with main drive pulley and belt
to prevent image artifacts (17 mm banding) due to wear and dirt at pulley and
belt.
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.3.
(4) Remove Main drive pulley &
Drum belt.
Refer to 4.1.
(5) Remove the Input sensors
module.
Refer to 4.2 5365_reg03_05_108_e.eps
Figure 220

Repair and Service
(6) Unplug the 3 connectors (A).

B
5365_reg03_05_131_e.eps
Figure 221
(8) Remove the Drum drive module.
5365_reg03_05_134_e.eps
Figure 222
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Drum drive module into
place.
5365_reg03_05_135_e.eps
Figure 223


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E

(3) Plug the 3 connectors (A).
B
5365_reg03_05_131_e.eps
Figure 224
(4) Re-install the Input sensors

module.
Refer to 4.2.
(5) Re-install Main drive pulley &
Drum belt.
Refer to 4.1.
Refer to 1.3.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_113_e.eps
Figure 225

Repair and Service
4.5 Thermal print head uni

CM+343334.X
Thermal print head unit
5365_reg03_05_137_e.eps
Figure 226
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
5365_reg03_05_002_e.eps
Figure 227
5365_reg03_05_039_e.eps
Figure 228


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(3) Unplug the 5 connectors (A-E).
5365_reg03_05_177_e.eps
Figure 229

unit.
5365_reg03_05_040_e.eps
Figure 230
(5) At the right side and at the left

side, loosen the screws (F) that
lock the Thermal print head unit.
(6) Lift out the Thermal print head
unit to remove it. F
5365_reg03_05_138_e.eps
Figure 231

Repair and Service
Re-installation:
(1) Put the Thermal print head unit
into place.
(2) Tighten the screws (F) at the left
and at the right side of the F
Thermal print head unit.
5365_reg03_05_143_e.eps
Figure 232

unit.
5365_reg03_05_049_e.eps
Figure 233
(4) Plug the 5 connectors (A-E).
5365_reg03_05_177_e.eps
Figure 234


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
5365_reg03_05_050_e.eps
Figure 235
5365_reg03_05_170_e.eps
Figure 236

Repair and Service
4.6 Cam shaft drive

CM+343339.X
Cam shaft drive
5365_reg03_05_102_e.eps
Figure 237
Required tools:
Required time:
15 min
Removal:
Refer to 1.1.
Refer to 1.2.
5365_reg03_05_028_e.eps
Figure 238

5365_reg03_05_034_e.eps
Figure 239


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E
(6) Remove the 2 screws (D).

(7) Lower the Cam shaft drive. It is
still connected to 2 cables.
5365_reg03_05_104_e.eps
Figure 240
(8) Unplug two connectors and

remove the Cam shaft drive.
Figure 241
Re-installation:
(1) Reconnect two cables and put
the Cam shaft drive into place.
Figure 242

Repair and Service
(2) Remount the 2 screws (D).
5365_reg03_05_104_e.eps
Figure 243

A
A
A
5365_reg03_05_037_e.eps
Figure 244

Refer to 1.2.
Refer to 1.1.
5365_reg03_05_026_e.eps
Figure 245


Repair and Service
DD+DIS270.05E

Repair and Service
DD+DIS346.05E Adjustments and calibrations
Chapter 3.6:
List of contents
1 Adjustments.................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Horizontal film alignment procedure........................................................................... 1
2 Calibrations................................................................................................... 2
2.1 Film Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3
2.2 CDM calibration.......................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Print Head (TH) Calibration ........................................................................................ 7
3 Checks......................................................................................................... 10
3.1 Density reproduction check ...................................................................................... 10
3.2 Check for dust stripes / TPH Cleaning Procedure.................................................... 13

Edition 1, Revision 7 Drystar 5300 Chapter 3.6 / I
Repair and Service
1 Adjustments
Following adjustments have to be performed at the printer:
Adjustment To be done .... Details

see....
Horizontal film alignment • in case after TH replacement the 1.1
blank left or right frame is < 2mm
1.1 Horizontal film alignment procedure
When? The horizontal film alignment is necessary when:

• The TPH has been replaced and
• the blank frame at the left or right hand side is < 2 mm
How? (1) In the printer web pages select 'Service Engineer Tools'
(2) Select 'Enter Service Command Session'
(3) Select '6 Calibration - 4 Horizontal Alignment'
(4) Select "Start Printing"
(5) Measure the left and right blank border of the test film
(6) Enter the values in the browser screen
(7) Select 'Accept Changes'
Welcome to this
Service - Calibration
Horizontal alignment
Left white border 0.0 (mm)

Right white border 0.0 (mm)
Accept changes Discard changes

536536ac.cdr
Figure 1

Repair and Service
Adjustments and calibrations DD+DIS346.05E
2 Calibrations
Following calibrations have to be performed at the printer:

see....
Film calibration • During maintenance. 2.1
• After replacement of the Thermal print
head (TPH).
• During the troubleshooting procedure.
refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting
Internal densitometer • After output module replacement 2.2
(CDM) calibration
• When the density reproduction check
indicates to calibrate the CDM
• During the troubleshooting procedure.
refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting
Print Head (TH) • During the troubleshooting procedure. 2.3
calibration Refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5365/100 2006-01-26
Repair and Service
• Film calibration by default is executed automatically at every 5th new film

package.
• It can be activated/deactivated in the Key-operator menu "2 Change
settings - 4 Image quality - 1 General - select default for film calibration
(default = ON)". Also the calibration frequency (Default = every 5 film
packs) can be entered there.
• It can be initiated manually, too.
• This manual Film calibration is explained further on.
When? • At least each 5000 films (adjustable maintenance action. Refer to chapter
9 Maintenance).
• After replacement of the Thermal print head (TPH).
• In case of a drift of the maximum density.
• During the troubleshooting procedure. refer to chapter 3.3,
Troubleshooting
How? (1) Select in key-operator menu CDM measurement area

Calibration'
(2) Select 'Start Calibration':
The calibration film as shown

in Figure 2 is printed and the
measured Dmax is shown.
See also note next page.
INPUT TRAY:
FILM CALIBRATION OK
Dmax = 3.03 (MB924)

5365_enc_600.cdr
Default densitometer
Measured Dmax 536536ga.cdr
In order to be useable this film should be

absolutely dust free within the marked region!
Figure 2

Repair and Service
The calibration is successful, in case the measured Dmax is max. 2%

different from the target Dmax.
The target Dmax depends on the default densitometer which is configured
in Key-operator menu "2 Change Settings - 4 Image Quality - 1 General".
Refer to table below.
Example:
Selected default densitometer: X-Rite 3.41
Measured Dmax: 2.98 O.D.
Result: Calibration successful
Densitometer Target Dmax DT2B Target Dmax DT2C

X-Rite 310 3.10 O.D. 2.95 O.D.
X-Rite 331 3.03 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
X-Rite 341 3.04 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
X-Rite 301 2.99 O.D. 2.86 O.D.
MacBeth 3.03 O.D. 2.90 O.D.
Gretag D200 3.03 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
• When the Dmax isn't reached, automatically a second film calibration

starts. The TH power will be increased so that the Dmax will be reached
if there are no artifacts in the film.
• In case Dmax is still more than ± 2% different from the target Dmax the
display will show "calibration failed". In this case check the CDM
measurement area at the lightbox for image artifacts (e.g. dust stripes).
Refer to Figure 2.
⇒ In case of image artifacts troubleshoot as described in
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting, section "Artifacts on the Film".
⇒ In case no image artifacts are visible troubleshoot as described in
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting, section "Dmax too high or too low".

Repair and Service
2.2 CDM calibration
When? • The calibration of the internal densitometer CDM via an external

densitometer is necessary when the density reproduction check for a
specific material is not OK after a film calibration.
• After replacement of the Output module (which includes the internal
densitometer).
• Calibrated densitometer MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341, X-Rite

301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2.
Purpose • Adjust the CDM to another calibrated, external densitometer

• To compensate for measurement drifts
How? (1) In the webpages - menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command session' select '6. Calibration - 2. Internal densitometer
calibration'
(2) Follow the instructions on the WebPages. Refer to Figure 3.
(3) Enter the measured densities in the browser window.

Repair and Service
1 Welcome to this 2 Welcome to this

Service - Calibration Service - Calibration

1. Film Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration
2. Internal Densitometer Calibration Select Densitometer
3. Print Head Calibration Macbeth TR924
4. Horizontal Alignment Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Go back
Start Calibration Go back Reset Values

Service - Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration

Internal Densitometer Calibration
SUCCEEDED
In progress Enter below the measurements of the printer calibration sheet
Please Wait
Step Previous values Step Previous values
7% 00 0.25 0.24 01 0.25 0.24
02 0.26 0.25 03 0.30 0.31
04 0.54 0.55 05 0.94 0.95
536536ak.cdr 06 1.43 1.45 07 1.96 1.97
4 Measurement Area 08 2.50 2.49 09 3.00 2.99
10 3.18 3.15 11 2.80 2.80
12 2.28 2.28 13 1.71 1.75
14 1.17 1.20 15 0.71 0.72
5 16 0.37 0.38 17 0.26 0.26
18 0.25 0.24 19 0.25 0.24
Accept changes Discard changes Reset values
Figure 3
Always perform a Film calibration (refer to 2.1) and check the Density
reproduction (refer to 3.1) after a CDM calibration.

Repair and Service
2.3 Print Head (TH) Calibration
When? • The Print Head Profile calibration is necessary whenever vertical stripes
are not longer acceptable
Vertical stripes are unacceptable in case they are visible in the medical
service test image! Refer to Figure 5.
The Print Head calibration can only be used to compensate for macro-TPH
banding. (width > 10 - 15 mm).
Artifacts with sharp edges cannot be compensated by the TPH profile
calibration
• Ink eraser 'Pelikan' (10+999991176.0). Only in case Dry Cleaning

Procedure has to be performed.
How? (1) Perform the TH cleaning procedure. Refer to page 14 (section 3.2.)
(2) Start the profile calibration only when the cleaning procedure flowchart
(page 14) asks for it
(3) In the webpages - menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command session' select '6. Calibration - 3. Print Head Calibration'.
(4) Follow the instructions on the WebPages as shown in Figure 4

Repair and Service
1 Welcome to this 2
3 Welcome to this
Service - Calibration Service - Calibration

1. Film Calibration Printhead Calibration
2. Internal Densitometer Calibration Select Densitometer
3. Print Head Calibration Macbeth TR924
4. Horizontal Alignment Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Go back
Start Calibration Go back Reset Values
6 Welcome to this
3 Welcome to this
Service - Calibration Succeeded

Printhead Calibration Enter below the measurements of the printer calibration sheet
In progress Step Step
Please Wait 00 2.0 01 2.1
7% 02 2.0 03 2.1
04 2.1 05 2.1
06 2.1 07 2.1
536536ag.cdr
08 2.2 09 2.1
10 2.1 11 2.2
4 12 2.1 13 2.1
14 2.1 15 2.0
16 2.1 17 2.1
18 2.1 19 2.1
5
20 2.1 21 2.2
22 2.1 23 2.0
24 2.1 25 2.1
26 2.1 27 2.1
28 2.1 29 2.2
30 2.1 31 2.2
Accept changes Discard changes Reset values
Field 0 Field 31
Figure 4

Repair and Service
(5) Select "Accept changes" when all

values are entered (refer to
Figure 4).
(6) Print the Medical service test
image (refer to Figure 5).
(7) Check the macro banding in the
medical image.
• If the vertical stripes are
acceptable, continue with next
step.
• If the vertical stripes are still
unacceptable, but improved
with respect to the first printed
medical image, perform again
a Print Head Calibration.
• If the vertical stripes are still
unacceptable and not
improved with respect to the Figure 5
first printed medical image*,
replace the drum and perform
again a Print Head Profile
calibration
(For drum replacement refer to
chapter 3.5).
(8) Perform a Film calibration.
Refer to 2.1.
*(see first step of cleaning procedure page 14) )

Repair and Service
3 Checks
Following checks can be performed at the printer:

see....
Check for dust stripes During troubleshooting procedure. Refer to 3.1
/ TH cleaning chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
procedure
Density reproduction During maintenance. refer to chapter 9, 3.2
check Maintenance
During troubleshooting procedure. refer to
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
3.1 Density reproduction check
Background With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type
Information between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the
printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked.
This is a plausibility check for the CDM: In case the measured density values
are out of the specified range, the CDM requires a re-calibration.
When? The density reproduction check is necessary ...

• during maintenance
• possibly during troubleshooting procedure


Repair and Service
This procedure must be carried out with every used film type:
How? (1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print image - 1 Test image"
(2) Print out LinCheck.zip and measure the density of the eleven 100 % –
0% fields with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite
301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
(3) To check linearity fill in measured values in corresponding Excel file:
Blue based film: Ds5300 density reproduction check DT2B.xls or
Clear based film: Ds5300 density reproduction check DT2C.xls
These Excel files can be downloaded from MedNet, download area

'GSO library - Hardcopy - Dry Imagers - Drystar 5300 - Freeware'.
(4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is
calculated automatically (see Figure 6)
(5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density
Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to
carry out a CDM calibration.

Repair and Service
Select densitometer: X-rite 341

4 Dmax = 314
Square Measured density Target density Density diff. Check

100% 20 20 0 0
90% 47 49,4 -2,4 0
80% 73 78,8 -5,8 0
70% 104 108,2 -4,2 0
60% 133 137,6 -4,6 0
50% 163 167 -4 0
40% 189 196,4 -7,4 0
30% 218 225,8 -7,8 0
20% 246 255,2 -9,2 0
10% 274 284,6 -10,6 0
0% 306 314 -8 0
When entering the measured density values the decimal point appears in a different spot,
e.g. measured value = 0.23, value to enter = 23.0
Density Lower limit Upper limit
0 0 0
30 -5 5
45 -7 7
60 -8 8 Density Reproduction = OK
75 -9 9 No CDM calibration needed for DT2B film
90 -10 10
105 -11 11
120 -12 12
135 -12 12
150 -13 13
165 -13 13
180 -14 14
195 -14 14
210 -14 14
225 -15 15
240 -15 15
255 -15 15
270 -16 16
285 -16 16
300 -16 16
315 -16 16
Density difference SMPTE image DT2B film in Ds 5300
20
15
X-rite 310
10 X-rite 331
Density Difference
X-rite 341
5
X-rite 301 Lower limit
Mac Beth TR924
0 Upper limit
Gretag D200-2
Density difference
-5
-10
-15
-20
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
Target Density
536636af.cdr
Figure 6

Repair and Service
3.2 Check for dust stripes / TPH Cleaning Procedure

When? • Whenever dust stripes seem to be present
• During troubleshooting procedure. Refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
• Ink eraser 'Pelikan' (10+999991176.0). Only in case Dry Cleaning
Procedure has to be performed. Refer to Figure 7.
301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2. Only in case TH profile calibration is
required. Refer to Figure 7.
(1) Check the films for dust stripes as described in the flowchart of
Figure 7
Basic Rules for the TH Cleaning Procedure

• Use the correct cleaning material.
1. Wet cleaning: Use a lint free cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl -
alcohol or a cleaning tissue.
2. Dry cleaning: Use the blue side of an ink eraser. Make a linear
cleaning movement, parallel to the resistor line. Refer to Figure 8.
3. For the last wet cleaning action observe the rule: The last cleaning
action must be carried out in one way!
• For the Isopropyl alcohol observe the rule: As less water is in the alcohol
as better. Water can damage the TH. We recommend using a 90%
Isopropyl alcohol.

Repair and Service
TH cleaning
Dry TH cleaning
procedure
procedure
Print STI2 and *

medical_image test image
Dismount TH
vertical stripes No Okay. No Clean TH with

replacement Isopropyl alcohol
visible ? required (”wet” cleaning)
Yes or in doubt
Use ink eraser
Clean TH with for cleaning.
Isopropyl alcohol Refer to figure next page.
(”wet” cleaning)
Clean TH with
Print STI2 test image
* Isopropyl alcohol
additional Mount TH
Yes
vertical stripes
visible ?
Clean TH with
No Isopropyl alcohol
Okay. No
Previous Stripes No
replacement
still visible ? required
Print STI2 test image
*
Yes
Perform Resistor Check. **
(Only available for SW > 2.X_C1.
For SW < 2.X_C1 skip this step)
New vertical Yes
stripes visible ?
No
Resistor Check okay ? Replace TH
No
Yes Vertical No Okay. No

Perform Dry TH stripes visible ? replacement
Cleaning Procedure required
Yes
Perform TH ***
* Service menu: 3 Print Image profile calibration.
** Service menu: 7 Service Actions - 6 Resistor Check
Stripes visible in No Okay. No

medical_image test replacement
*** Service menu: 6 Calibration - 3 Print Head Calibration required
image ?
Yes
Observe TH cleaning rules
described next page Replace TH
536536mm.cdr
Figure 7

Repair and Service
• Before dry cleaning with an ink eraser to remove print stripes dismount
the thermal head.
• During cleaning do not push on the IC cover of the Thermal Head.
TH resistor line
TH cross section
TH top view
Blue side
Ink eraser
e.g. Pelican
type BR40 536410cd.cdr
linear cleaning movement

parallel to TH resistor line
Figure 8: Usage of ink eraser for TH cleaning
Instruct the customer, not to fill the input tray with dropped films or films
coming from jam clearances:
• These re-inserted films can be contaminated with dust and fingerprints
which can result in image artifacts or a defective thermal head.
• If the film is inserted the wrong way, the thermal head gets heavily
contaminated, what makes a service intervention necessary.

Repair and Service
DD+DIS346.05E Software menus, Settings
Chapter 3.7:
List of contents
1 Controls at the local Keypad.................................... 1
2 Key-Operator Menu via local keypad ...................... 2
3 Key-Operator Webpages .......................................... 3
4 Service Engineer Tools Webpages.......................... 5
5 Service Command Webpages ................................ 10
6 Difference Key-Operator and Service Command

Session .................................................................... 12

2006-01-26 Type 5365/100 Agfa Comapny Confidential
Repair and Service
1 Controls at the local Keypad

Overview of user interface controls: The keypad The control buttons
1 2
Power / Reset To power on or off the printer.
button To reset the printer.
3
Keypad keys:
4 To access the advanced functions of the Key-

Key-
operator mode. Refer to next page.
operator key
6 5
To quit the current function or exit a menu without
Escape key
saving modifications.
1 Power/Reset button
2 Display (In Key-operator mode)
Confirm key To select a menu;
3 Keyboard To accept an entry in a menu.
4 Status indicator LED To move the cursor to the previous entry field.
5 Film input tray To scroll upwards.
Up key
To increment the number in a(n) (alpha)numerical
6 Film output tray
entry field.
To move the cursor to the next entry field.
The status indicator LED
To scroll downwards.
Down key
At the right side of the display, a LE D indicates the status of the Drystar 5300. To decrement the number in a(n)
(alpha)numerical entry field.
Receive Printing
Color Light Status Action To scroll backwards through multiple choices
jobs? OK?
within a field.
Constant Ready (standby) Yes Yes Proceed. Left key To move the entry position in a(n)
Startup sequence No No (alpha)numerical entry field from right to left.
To toggle between values in a field.
Receiving jobs Yes Yes
To scroll forwards through multiple choices within
Calculating Yes Yes Wait. a field.
Green
Blinking Printing Yes Yes Right key To move the entry position in a(n)
(alpha)numerical entry field from left to right.
Calibrating Yes No To toggle between values in a field.
Installation No No
Proceed with " All keys (except the Key-operator key) have a LED that is lit when the key
Key-operator Yes/No Yes/No is valid in a certain condition.
the activity.
Service mode No No
" Press and hold down an arrow key to scroll quickly through a list
Refer to or a menu.
Input tray empty Yes Yes/No User / Reference
Manual
Refer to
Blinking Film jam Yes No User / Reference
Manual
Red
Refer to
Warning Yes Yes User / Reference
Manual
Refer to
Constant Error status No No Section
Troubleshooting
5365_100_3702.cdr
Page 1

Repair and Service
Software menus, Settings DD+DIS346.05E
2 Key-Operator Menu via local keypad
Based on SW Rel. 2.0

* means:
Item not available in SW < Rel. 2

Repair and Service
3 Key-Operator Webpages
Welcome to this
Prompt Welcome to this
Operator tools DryStar 5300 printer
Enter Password
drystar
Key-operator tools Welcome to this
******
KEY OPERATOR TOOLS DryStar 5300 printer
Service engineer tools HOME Remote sessions
OK Cancel Enter key-operator command session
Specialist tools Please wait while the printer is initializing
Release remote command session for Remote Session...
Security Tools
HELP
Welcome to this
1 Welcome to this 2 3 Welcome to this
Welcome to this
DryStar 5300 printer 1 DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
2 Key-Operator - Show settings

Key-Operator - Main Key-Operator - Change settings Key-Operator - Print Image
1. Show settings 3 1. General
2.1 3.1
1. General 1. Test Image
2. Change settings 2. Input tray 2. From Printer Flash Card
3. Print image 4 3. Network (DICOM)
2. Input tray 2.2 3. From Remote Computer
3. Network (DICOM)
4. Save configuration 5 4. Image quality 4. Image quality
5. Restore config. 5. Logical Printers 2.3
6. Calibration 6 6. Installed datasets Go back
7. Service actions Go back
2.4
8. Quality Control 7
9. Installation Go back
8
leave remote session 9
4 Welcome to this
DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
Key-Operator - Save configuration Key-Operator - Restore configuration Key-Operator - Calibration

1. To Printer Flash Card 1. From CF-Card 1. Film Calibration
2. To this Computer 2. From Remote Computer 2. Therm. Head clean
3. Frm dd/mm/yy hh:mm
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Go back Go back
Go back
3.1 7.1 8.1 9.1
refer to next page
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 1

9 Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Service actions Key-Operator - Quality Control Key-Operator - Installation

1. Error Messages 1. New Software Installation 9.1
2. Warning Messages 1. Quality Control 8.1
Based on SW Rel. 2.0 2. Printer Installation Wizard
3. Repair history
4. Maintenance 7.1 Go back
Go back
Go back

Repair and Service
2.1 Welcome to this

2.2 2.3 2.4
Welcome to this Welcome to this Welcome to this Based on SW Rel. 2.0
DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
Key-Operator - Change general settings Key-Operator - Change input tray settings Key-Operator - Change network settings (dicom) Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Date: 19 Oct. 2004 Film view Normal
Time: 08 30 00 Back 1. Network settings
Tag film format 14x17" 2. Remove modality 1. General
Language English 3. Add modality 2. Modality XYZ
Chinese Simpl. Overruling to film format 14x17"
Japanese 11x14" Go back
Tag film type DT2B Go back
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50 Drystar DT2B
Drystar DT2C
* Site name
* Site address Welcome to this Welcome to this
* City DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
* Country code (tel) Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
* Telephone Key-Operator - Change network settings (dicom) Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Modem
* Department Printer AE-title DS5300 Daily used name Printer
* Contact person 9.1 Welcome to this
Hostname ds5300 Modality AE-title DS5300
* Delivery address DryStar 5300 printer Domain name
Linear
E-mail address Printer IP-Address 12.10.68.41 Look Up Table: Kanamori
Comments Netmask 255.0.0.0
Key-Operator - Installation Kanamorilike
Router IP-address
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values Software Upgrade LDAP server Interpolation:
Replication
Service host IP-address
Linear
Alert mailing
1. From CF-card off CubicHi-res
3.1 Welcome to this 2. From this Computer on CubicBell
Go back Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values 285
Key-Operator - Print image
290
1. TG18-QC.zip 295
2. smpte_kan.zip
3. smpte_l300.zip Welcome to this Welcome to this Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
4. smpte_lin.zip DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
5. tpa.zip
Key-Operator - Installation Key-Operator - Installation
Go back Before install. Welcome to this
please make backup DryStar 5300 printer
Choose Dataset Browse .....
1. OK, make backup Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
7.1 Welcome to this 2. SKIP backup Proceed Go Back Reset Values
Go back on
Key-Operator - Service actions
1. Maintenance settings
2. Pending maintenance actions Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924
3. Closed maintenance actions Gretag
8.1 X-Rite 301
Welcome to this X-Rite 310
Go back
Key-Operator - Service actions
Data of last QC measuring
Date: 20-NOV-2004
Time: 09:01 Welcome to this
Welcome to this DryStar 5300 printer
DryStar 5300 printer Initials:
Max D: 3.1
DD: 0.2 Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Key-Operator - Service actions Mid Density: 1.1 Select frequency
MAINTENANCE SETTINGS Base + Fog: 0.2
Reset Item Cycles to go Factory settings New reference: yes Every 5 packs
Thermal head cleaning required 4841 5000 no
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 24841 25000 Comment: Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500
Film calibration required 500 5000
Accept changes Go Back New QC measuring Reset Values 5365_100_3701.cdr
Service maintenance required 39841 40000 Page 2
Go back

Repair and Service
4 Service Engineer Tools Webpages

Welcome to this
Welcome to this
S1
Operator tools Prompt SERVICE TOOLS
S2
Key-operator tools Enter Password HOME General information
mega List of errors S3
Service engineer tools Printer Infocounters report
****** S4
Specialist tools DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
OK Cancel QA Report Page S5
Security Tools Software versions
Remote sessions S6
HELP
______________ Power supply state
S4 Show printer status refer to section "Key-Operator Web pages"
DC 5 Volts 4.96875 V Enter key-operator command session
refer to section "Service command web pages"
DC 3 Volts 3.2714844 V Enter service command session
DC +12 Volts 12.007315 V Release remote command session S7
DC -12 Volts -12.014129 V Reboot Drystar
S3 DC 24 Volts 24.173584 V
Security Setup
HTTP Yes DC TH Volts 0 V Reset Calibration Data S8
DC TH Amps 0.0 A Connectivity tools
HTTPS No
.............. ______________ Error state Scaling Setup S9
Current warnings DICOM profile editor
Network info Current errors
LPD Profile Editor
S10
IP-address 10.233.68.108 ______________ Temperatures
Hostname DI53IE2 Heatsink 52.70407 C Network configuration S11
Netmask 255.255.248.0 Keypad-display 41.5 C Printqueue editor
................................... Drum-region 36.5 C
CPU-region 52 C
Controller logging S12
Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex Module repair
Current Max density 310.45212 points
...........................................
link partner : 100HD 10HD autonegotiation ______________ Density meter Modules S13
Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex Dark current Idrange 0: 78
range 1: 78 S14
Output Queue range 2: 77 S1
Retry timeout0 Light current I09561, lamp at 75 % LIST OF ERRORS S15
....................................... ______________ Display
Contrast-setting 68 MODULE : vilismodule
Backlight-setting 50 Elabel : Yes
Dicom input
........................................ ______________ Status
Blemish heating enabled HC207000 : vilismodule.dsh.connected
CDM device enabled *TypeDefect
LPD Profiles *Context207000
............................................. Online diagnosis enabled
Security disabled *ActionSeeManual
______________ Storage *Reason1Connector P9 not connected on VILIS
Site info Cure1Connect P9 on VILIS
City Removable storage not present
Removable storage size - *Reason2VILIS defect
Site Name Cure2Replace
Site address Removable storage free -
Fixed (c:) storage size 122 MB (128045056 bytes) PartMOD07
Country code
Department name Fixed (c:) storage free 0 bytes
Phone *TypeDefect
Modem *Context207001
Comment
Installation Date INFO COUNTER drystar 5300 S2 *ActionSeeManual
*Reason1Connector P15 not connected on VILIS
Cure1Connect P15 on VILIS
InfoCounters 1. Site and system info: *Reason2VILIS defect
Last error codes ESC ------------------------ Cure2Replace
...................................... Date: 18-Nov-2004 PartMOD07
Time: 12:42:15
Errors/Warnings
Name Total Relative Date of last
Welcome to this S6
1.1 Device info: DryStar 5300 printer
ESC1F Local SSL trusted certificate wi...4848Apr-27-2004 15:52:24 ----------------
.............................................. Product name: drystar S8 S9 S10
Type-No: 5300
Current Incidents:
Subtype-No:
Serial-No: 1234
S11 S12 S13
Current Warnings:
FPGAVersion3.0.1 S5 Manufacture date:
Installation date:
01-Aug-2004 16:45:00
31-Nov-2004 13:10:30 refer to next 3 pages
OSVersion Current Defects:
### /portex info 1.2 Site info: 5365_100_3701.cdr
Versions : Portex=2004.05 -------------- Page 3
Patch vers: 0 City: Padova
Build date: 13-oct-2004 16:12 Site name: Connectathon
Boot date : 17-NOV-2004 17:06:26 Site address: Avenida 12
releaseRemoteSession
S7
Net ID : 10.233.65.97 dry900 Department name: X-Ray
Ethernet : 08:00:66:80:44:09 Phone: 1234321
Modem:
DriverVersionVersion: HW3.12 ; build timestamp : time = 14:36:45,21 Comment:
ControllerVersion P4D3.03.15
DrystarVersion R1.9 C1 1.3 Hardware info:
BoardVersion VILIS2.2
M16Version 45
------------------ Based on SW Rel. 2.0
CPU: 0 - THEMIS 1.3 rev=? **
RAM: 512 Mbyte

Repair and Service
HOME HELP Calibration Manager HOME HELP DICOM Input Setup HELP Host Profile: Name XYZ
S8 Dicom Print SCP Servers S10 These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host S10.2
Default CDM: Return to default CDM-calibration values. (modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'.
Current values willbe copied to a backup.
Setup Dicom Print SCP Servers S10.1 The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input.
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side.
Default CDM Dicom Host Profiles
Nick Name: Name XYZ
A 'Host Profile' defines the print parameters for a specific host (modality). Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE
HOME HELP Controller Setup Available Host Profiles: Use this profile only for local SCP server: all
Based
New S10.2 Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change
Reduction icon on image: yes S9 on SW Number of Copies:
View/Edit
Rel. 2.0 Print Priority: low
Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes: Remove
Clone Polarity: normal
Film Orientation: portrait
Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes At run-time, profile selection is done based on the incoming 'Calling AE title' Trim: no
and the receiving SCP server. Film Size ID:
Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.35 ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 ) If no profile is found, the default (site) profile will be used. Medium Type:
Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes
Edit the default (site) profile Validate profiles Auto Dicom Configuration Print even if Application type not supported:
OK Changes require reboot Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 23
Kernel: site Edit Custom
Input status
Magnification: Edit
S10.3 Pixel Size: ratio: Edit
HELP Site Defaults idle
Perception LUT: kanamori
These are the default print settings for all Dicom input for which no special 'Host Refresh Kanamori Like value:
Profile' is made. The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input. Custom value:
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side. Update profile database Illumination (cd/m2):
Only some parameters can be edited. S10.3 Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2):
Select profile database file to upload: Browse ... Border Density (OD x100):
Empty Image Density (OD x100):
Number of Copies: 1 Upload new DB Minimum Density (OD x100):
Print Priority: LOW Maximum Density (OD x100): site 300
Polarity: normal Annotation 1: site Edit Custom
Film Orientation :portrait HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup Annotation 2: site Edit Custom
Trim: NO Window (%):
Film Size ID: Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device: S10.1 Level (%):
Medium Type: One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom Image Orientation: r0
Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: YES print associations Conformance/Status Level:
Kernel:Interpolation Type cubicHighRes,smoothFactor: -2.5 Nevent enabled: off
Magnification:Magn: max Dicom Print SCP Mammo modality: NO
Pixel Size:ratio: 1.0 / 1.0 Mammo CWR Rotation:
Perception LUT: kanamori Internal Name: DS5300 Association Timeout (s):
Kanamori Like value :0 Clear this field to remove the settings for this Dicom Print SCP server Image Timeout (s):
Custom value: Called AE title: DS5300 Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Illumination (cd/m2): 2000 Listen at Port: 104 Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2): 10 Max. allowed associations: 10 Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN:
Border Density (OD x100): BLACK Activate at startup: Resolution:320
Empty Image Density (OD x100): BLACK Secure channel (SSL): Supported SOP classes: Edit
Minimum Density (OD x100): Comments: LR Like: off
Maximum Density (OD x100): 300 OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
Annotation 1: none Edit Custom
Annotation 2: Manually customized items are show in red
none Edit Custom The last received input values are show in blue (click 'Show Last Input' button)
Window (%):
Level (%): OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel Changes require reboot
Image Orientation :r0 HOME HELP LPD Server Setup
Conformance/Status Level: 0
Nevent enabled: OFF LPD Server
Mammo: NO
HOME HELP LPD Setup S11.1
Association Timeout (s): 0 Port: 515 Clear it to remove the LPD Server
LPD Servers S11
Image Timeout (s) :0 Max allowed associations: 10
Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: true LPD Server Setup S11.1 Activate at startup:
Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: true Secure channel:
Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN: true Comments:
Resolution: 320 New
Supported SOP classes :All enabled View/Edit S11.2
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 23 Remove
Clone
OK Cancel Layout Preview OK Create new LPD Server Cancel Changes require reboot
5365_100_3701.cdr Validate All Profiles

Page 4

Repair and Service
S12.1 S12.2 S12.3
HELP LPD Profile: Name XYZ HOME HELP Network Configuration HOME HELP Output Queue
These settings can be overruled by the LPD protocol. Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device S12 Output Queue contents:
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the front.
S11.2 S13
Filter on all
Basic IP settings
IP address
Host name Show History Clear History Auto-Refresh
Profile Name: Name XYZ Domain
Medium Size: _14x17 Subnetmask Input state:
Medium Type: bluebased
Layout: Optimal Row
Number of copies: Obtain IP settings automatically (RARP/BOOTP/DHCP) no
Film Orientation: portrait Output Queue setup:
Region Of Interest: Edit Retry timeout (seconds) range: 31..599
Pixel Size: ratio: Edit Max retry count (0 = retry forever)
Polarity: normal
Image Orientation: r0 Submit
Input LUT: Edit
Usertaste Gray: Edit
Usertaste Color: Edit
Magnification: Edit
Kernel: Edit
Edit HOME HELP Network Configuration HOME HELP Network Configuration
Trim:
Background Color: Grayscale Edit
Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device
Empty Color: Gray: Grayscale Edit
PostScript Requested page size: Width: Height: Routing DNS servers
PostScript policy: pagesizeDependent S12.1 S12.2
Default gateway
Resolution: 320 A DNS server translates a given hostname into an IP address.
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): OK Changes require reboot
Annotation 1: Edit
Annotation 2: Edit More Routes
Reach Device via gateway:
OK Cancel Factory Defaults Remove
Customized items are show in red. Add Changes require reboot
Test Routes
Ping a device Ping Test DNS
Enter a hostname: Resolve
5365_100_3701.cdr
HOME HELP Network Configuration Page 1
Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device

S12.3
Ethernet
Counters:
Current line properties: 100 Mbit Full-Duplex Total Rx Packets = 2056422
Link partner (other side): : 100FD 100HD 10FD 10HD autonegotiation Total Rx ERROR Packets = 0
Ethernet (MAC) address: 08:00:66:80:44:09 Total Tx Packets = 196164
Setup: Type: UTP MII address: Defer Xmission Count =0
Carrier Lost Count =0
Auto negotiation, capabilities: Out Of Window Collissions = 0
10 MBit Half Duplex Collisions Count =0
10 MBit Full Duplex Excess Collisions Count = 0
100 MBit Half Duplex Transmit FIFO underrun = 0
Receive FIFO overrun =0
100 MBit Full Duplex
Fixed (no negotiation)
10 Mbit HALF DUPLEX
Warning: changes become active immediately !!!
Save settings to file (only enable this after a test)
OK Factory Defaults Clear Counters

Repair and Service
HOME HELP Logging
Current Log File

S14
Show Log file
Set Log Levels
TaskLog Level
NipOpImage ERROR NipOpImage implements following operations: scaling/filtering, lookup and rotation.
DCMPrintToPrintJob ERROR DCMPrintToPrintJob converts Dicom Printjob into printqueue job
PrintJobHandler ERROR PrintJobHandler is listener for jobavailable events and converts the available jobs in a bitmap for printing.
ColorConvertOpImage ERROR ColorConvertOpImage implements the conversion from one ColorSpace to another
PAGE ERROR 'Page' calculates the position of imageboxes in a page
DCMIBCodec ERROR
DrawableRI ERROR
ComposeOpImage ERROR ComposeOpImage implements the operation to Compose multiple source images into one image
CropOpImage ERROR CropOpImage creates a new image out of the region of interest of the source image.
TiledImage ERROR TiledImage transfers images to/from disk
CMM ERROR CMM (Color Management Module) converts image data from one colorspace to another and manages colorspace data
LPD ERROR Line Printer Daemon : A group of hosts requests services from a LPD running on a host. The services provided by the process are related to printing jobs.
BorderOpImage ERROR BorderOpImage implements the border operation (e.g. trim)
PrintQueueEditor ERROR This is the UI component of the printqueue (browser & keypad)
JobQueue ERROR Non Persistent Queue. (Version : 2.03)
JobProvider ERROR JobProvider is a printqueue consumer that publishes available jobs to the subscribers.
NipOpImage2 ERROR implements following operations: scaling/filtering, lookup and rotation.
AuthenticationManager ERROR Secure Access Management: Authentication Manager for accessing URLs and keypad menus
QueueFactory ERROR Starts the requested (or available) queue. (Version : 2.01)
VolatileTiledImage ERROR
PrintQueue_Management ERROR Version 1.03 : Monitors the printqueue. Arrange communication between printqueue and several protocols.
XML ERROR
TranslateOpImage ERROR
PFE ERROR The Printer Front End receives printjobs from a network (DICOM LPD) or any proprietary interface (MFRI, VSI) and composes a printable bitmap to be printed by the Printer Back End.
PSCodec ERROR PSCodec (de)codes postscript/pdf files
FontRI ERROR
MfxPrinterInfoHandler ERROR Mfx is an Agfa communication protocol to interchange printer status messages
Raster ERROR
OverlayOpImage ERROR OverlayOpImage implements the operation to put an overlay above the source image.
CFG ERROR CFG handles configuration issues such as profiles, browser GUI, ...
DCMPrintSCP-0 ERROR Dicom Print Service Class Provider on port 104 for DS5300 application.Handles incoming Dicom association requests for print services and prepares internal print jobs for them V5300
FontCache ERROR
Configure the Logger

NO
Log to Console
Log to File NO
Max number of log directories to keep
Max number of log pages (files) per directory
Timestamp in date format YES
Add timestamp to console loggings NO
Logging to Plog logbox at level
Submit Factory Defaults
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 6

Repair and Service
Welcome to this
S15 DryStar 5300 printer
HOME | SERVICE
Filminput Module
Pickup Module
Inputsensor
Module
Drumdrive Module
Coolingfan Module
EBox-fan Module
Camshaft Module
Output Module

Repair and Service
5 Service Command Webpages

Welcome to this
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
Operator tools Prompt
List of errors
Key-operator tools Enter Password Printer Infocounters report
mega DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
Service engineer tools QA Report Page
******
Software versions
Specialist tools Remote sessions
OK Cancel
Security Tools Show printer status Welcome to this
Enter key-operator command session DryStar 5300 printer
HELP Enter service command session
Please wait while the printer is initializing
Connectivity tools
for Remote Session...
Scaling Setup
Welcome to this
1 Welcome to this 2 3 Welcome to this
Welcome to this
DryStar 5300 printer 1 DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
2 Service - Show settings

Service - Main Service - Change settings Service - Print Image
1. Show settings 3 1. General
2.1 3.1
1. General 1. Test Image
2. Change settings 2. Input tray 2. From Printer Flash Card
3. Print image 4 3. Network (DICOM)
2. Input tray 2.2 3. From Remote Computer
3. Network (DICOM)
4. Save configuration 5 4. Image quality 4. Image quality
5. Restore config. 5. Installed datasets 2.3
6. Calibration 6 Go back
7. Service actions Go back
2.4
8. Quality Control 7 Go back
9. Installation
8
leave remote session 9
4 Welcome to this
Service - Save configuration Service - Restore configuration Service - Calibration

1. To Printer Flash Card 1. From CF-Card 1. Film Calibration
2. To this Computer 2. From Remote Computer 2. Internal Densitometer Calibration
3. Frm dd/mm/yy hh:mm 3. Print Head Calibration
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 4. Horizontal Alignment
Go back
Go back
3.1 7.1 8.1 9.1
Go back
refer to next page
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 8

9 Welcome to this
Service - Service actions Service - Quality Control Service - Installation

1. Error Messages 1. Quality Control 8.1 1. New Software Installation 9.1
Based on SW Rel. 2.0 2. Warning Messages 2. Printer Installation Wizard
3. Repair history
4. Maintenance 7.1 Go back
5. Logging Go back
6. R.Measurement
Go back

Repair and Service
2.2 Welcome to this

2.1 DryStar 5300 printer 2.3 Welcome to this
2.4
Key-Operator - Change input tray settings
Key-Operator - Change general settings If RF-tag is missing or malfunctioning Service - Change network settings (dicom) Service - Change Image quality settings
Date: 19 Oct. 2004 Printing with Dmax=2.00
Time: 08 Printing not possible 1. Network settings
30 00 2. Remove modality 1. General
3. Add modality 2. Modality XYZ
Language English Normal
Film view
Chinese Simpl. Back Go back
Japanese
Tag film format 14x17" Go back
Beep on empty tray 5 beeps Overruling to film format 14x17"

11x14"
Tag film type DT2B
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50 Welcome to this Welcome to this
Drystar DT2B DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
* Site name Drystar DT2C
* Site address Service - Change network settings (dicom) Service - Change Image quality settings
* City
* Country code (tel) Printer AE-title DS5300 Daily used name Printer
* Telephone Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values Hostname ds5300 Modality AE-title DS5300
Modem Domain name
* Department Linear
9.1 Printer IP-Address 12.10.68.41 Look Up Table:
* Contact person Kanamori
Welcome to this Netmask 255.0.0.0
* Delivery address DryStar 5300 printer Kanamorilike
Router IP-address
E-mail address LDAP server Interpolation:
Comments Replication
Service - Installation Service host IP-address
Linear
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values Software Upgrade Alert mailing
off CubicHi-res
on CubicBell
1. From CF-card Maximum density: 280
3.1 Welcome to this
2. From this Computer Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values 285
DryStar 5300 printer 290
Go back 295
Service - Print image Welcome to this Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
1. LinCheck.zip DryStar 5300 printer
Welcome to this
2. STI1.zip DryStar 5300 printer
3. STI2.zip Service - Installation
4. medical_image.zip Welcome to this
Go back Service - Installation
Before install.
please make backup Choose Dataset Browse .....
7.1 Service - Change Image quality settings
Welcome to this 1. OK, make backup Proceed Go Back Reset Values
2. SKIP backup Default film calibration off
on
Service - Service actions Go back
1. Maintenance settings
2. Pending maintenance actions Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924
3. Closed maintenance actions 8.1 Gretag
Welcome to this X-Rite 301
DryStar 5300 printer X-Rite 310
Go back
Service - Quality Control Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
Data of last QC measuring
5365_100_3701.cdr
Date: 20-NOV-2004
Page 9 Time: 09:01
Initials: Welcome to this
Refer to section DryStar 5300 printer
Max D: 3.1
"Difference Key-Operator and Service command session" DD: 0.2
Mid Density: 1.1 Service - Change Image quality settings
Base + Fog: 0.2 Select frequency
New reference: yes
Based on SW Rel. 2.0 no Every 5 packs
Comment:
Accept changes Go Back New QC measuring Reset Values

Repair and Service
6 Difference Key-Operator and Service Command Session

Key-Operator Menu Service Menu

Key-Operator - Calibration Service - Calibration

1. Film Calibration 1. Film Calibration
2. Therm. Head clean 2. Internal Densitometer Calibration
3. Print Head Calibration
4. Horizontal Alignment
Go back
Go back
7 Welcome to this 7.1 Welcome to this 7 Welcome to this 7.1 Welcome to this
DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer DryStar 5300 printer
Key-Operator - Service actions Key-Operator - Service actions Service - Service actions Key-Operator - Service actions
1. Error Messages 1. Maintenance settings 1. Maintenance settings
1. Error Messages
2. Warning Messages 2. Pending maintenance actions 2. Pending maintenance actions
2. Warning Messages
3. Repair history 3. Closed maintenance actions 3. Closed maintenance actions
3. Repair history
4. Maintenance 7.1 4. Maintenance 7.1
5. Logging
Go back 6. R.Measurement Go back
Go back
Go back
Welcome to this
Welcome to this
DryStar 5300 printer Service - Service actions
Maintenance Action Cycles Factory Current Active Reset Item
Key-Operator - Service actions to go settings settings
Y Y
MAINTENANCE SETTINGS Thermal head cleaning required 3504 5000 5000 N N
Reset Item Cycles to go Factory settings
Thermal head cleaning required 4841 5000 Y Y
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 24841 25000 Replace thermal head anti dust filter 23504 25000 25000 N N
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500
Film calibration required 500 5000 Y Y
Service maintenance required 39841 40000 Replace thermal head (end of life) 62400 62500 62500 N N
Go back Y Y
Film calibration required 1 500 100 N N
Y Y
Service Maintenance required 4855 5000 5000 N N
Accept Changes Discard Changes Reset Values
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 7
3.1 Welcome to this 3.1 Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Print image Service - Print image

1. TG18-QC.zip 1. LinCheck.zip
2. smpte_kan.zip 2. STI1.zip
3. smpte_l300.zip 3. STI2.zip
4. smpte_lin.zip 4. medical_image.zip
5. tpa.zip Go back
Go back

Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services
Software Releases and Patches
DRYSTAR 5300
5365/100
► Purpose of this document

This document informs about the complete history of software releases and patches for
the printer.

Revision Date
1.13 05-2007 compared to previous Revision 12:
• Added information about software 2.1.0_C1. Details
see section 8.
Document Title
Drystar 5300 Service Software 2.1.0_C1 available to support new RoHS PCBs
Bulletin No. 10,
DD+DIS058.07E


eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Repair and Service
DD+DIS028.07E Software Releases and Patches
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


05-2007 5365/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SOFTWARE RELEASE 1.81_C1 .............................................................................................5

1.1 Supported features ...................................................................................................................5
1.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................5
1.3 Known Problems.......................................................................................................................6

2.1 New Features............................................................................................................................6
2.2 Solved Bugs ..............................................................................................................................6
2.3 Known Problems.......................................................................................................................7

3.1 New Features............................................................................................................................7
3.2 Solved Bugs ..............................................................................................................................8
3.3 Known Problems.......................................................................................................................8

4.1 Solved Bugs ..............................................................................................................................9
5 SOFTWARE RELEASE 1.93_C1 ...........................................................................................10

5.1 Solved Bug..............................................................................................................................10
6 SOFTWARE RELEASE 1.95_C1 ...........................................................................................11

6.1 New Features..........................................................................................................................11
6.2 Solved Bug..............................................................................................................................11
7 SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.0.0_C1 ..........................................................................................12

7.1 New Features for the Operator ...............................................................................................12
7.2 New Features concerning Service ..........................................................................................13
7.3 New Features concerning Connectivity ..................................................................................14
7.4 Improvements concerning Reliability ......................................................................................15
7.5 Improvements concerning Image Quality ...............................................................................16
7.6 Improvements concerning Printer Handling............................................................................17
7.7 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................17
7.8 Known Problems.....................................................................................................................17


Repair and Service
8 SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.1.0_C1 ..........................................................................................18

8.1 New Features..........................................................................................................................18
8.2 Improvements .........................................................................................................................18


Repair and Service
1 Software Release 1.81_C1
Type of new Software 1st customer release
Release Date 04/2004
Printers SNs not registered
Availability MEDNET, GSO Library* (25 MB size)
Prerequisites None
*Note:
• On MEDNET always the latest free available basic release (and
software patch if available) can be downloaded.
• A software patch for a certain basic release always contains all previous
software patches for this release.
1.1 Supported features

All features as specified in the FRS (Functional Requirement
Specifications), i.e.
• Printing diagnostic data according to the DICOM standard with a
resolution of 320dpi.
• Printing on Drystar film material DT2B and DT2C.
• Supporting film sizes 11"x14" and 14"x17" (only one film size can be
used at a time).
1.2 Limitations
• The printer start-up time is currently 13 minutes.
• User Interface screens are only available in English language.
• The 'mobile kit' is not yet available.
• Improvements for 'image hue' of both Blue & Clear Base film are
preferred.
• At printer start-up it’s possible that ‘’Error messages’’ show up. The
situation can be corrected by starting up once again.
• Restore of back-up file is serial number dependent
• Only Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher is usable as browser
application.


Repair and Service
1.3 Known Problems

• It is possible to do an incorrect installation or restore in case no SW
file available on CF-card.
• Domain-name entry (when exceeding >248 chars) causes failing
system-boots
• SW installation via browser from local CF-card not supported
• AE-title disappears from display (local keypad) after printing the first
sheet of a multi copy job
• No back-up / restore of annotations
Type of new Software SW Update (SW Patch, 4,6 MB)
Printers SNs not registered
Availability MEDNET, GSO Library*
Prerequisites None
*Note:
2.1 New Features

• No new features are built in. For a list of features of Software Rel. 1.81
refer to section 1.1
.
2.2 Solved Bugs

• Solved bug that wrong error messages show up at start-up. Examples:
'E211002 – Motor M2 defect', 'Camdrive defect', 'Current to TH too
high', 'MOD02 – Please replace module', 'MOD05 – Please replace
module', 'MOD07 – Please replace module'.


Repair and Service
2.3 Known Problems

See list of software release 1.80_C1 in section 1.2 and 1.3.
Type of new Software SW Upgrade (25 MB)
Printers SNs ≥ 2199 (plus 2180)
Prerequisites None
*Note:
3.1 New Features

• Support of additional user languages at the local display (user
messages and key-operator menu): Currently supported: English
(default), Chinese and Japanese. Other languages will follow (upload
via keypad).
• Support of APIPA: Automatic Private IP Addressing is a new feature of
the Drystar 5300 and an already existing feature of Windows-based
operating systems (Windows 98, ME, 2000, and XP) that enables a
service PC to automatically assign itself an IP address.


Repair and Service
3.2 Solved Bugs

• The fault "automatic film calibration at insertion of a new film package
does not work" is corrected.
• More reliable RF-tag database due to increased CF card access speed
and synchronized writing to the CF card.
3.3 Known Problems

• Helpfiles in the "Service Engineer Tools - Connectivity Tools" web
pages are not displayed
• The refresh time on Key-Operator and Service Command browser
pages (e.g. Change general settings; Print Head Calibration) is only
2.5 minutes as in previous releases. For SW Rel. 1.90 the refresh time
was announced to be 5 minutes. Corrections are foreseen in release 2.
Printers SNs ≥ 2393 (plus 2397 and 2403)
Prerequisites None
*Note:


Repair and Service
4.1 Solved Bugs
• Error "E207010: - 12V out of tolerance on VILIS" in some cases was

falsely displayed after replacement of the power supply. This is
corrected now, as the tolerance has been redefined and enlarged.
• Due to an error in the "memory buffer allocation calculation" algorithm it
sometimes happened that the printer replied to the modality with DICOM
Error 0120: missing attribute. The problem appeared at some Konica-
Minolta modalities in page mode with pixel sizes 3880 x 3100 and 3880
x 3008. This is corrected now.
• Logos (annotations) and the file portex.properties have been missing in
the backup file. Now all logos and the file portex.properties are part of a
backup.
• The QC image for 11x14" film size was printed in landscape format
instead of portrait. This is corrected now.
• The Helpfiles in the "Service Engineer Tools - Connectivity Tools" web
pages were not displayed. The missing files are added now.


Repair and Service
Printers SNs ≥ 2630 (Konica ≥ 00185)
Prerequisites None
*Note:
5.1 Solved Bug
Some printers showed sporadic banding lines in the first half of the image.
Fault frequency max. about 5 to 6 prints per film pack.
This fault was only visible in a flatfield and on clinical images with even,
bright areas of great extent, like e.g. DSA images. .
Now the movement of the pickup motor to its home position is changed this
way, that it cannot influence the filmrun anymore.


Repair and Service
Type of new Software SW Update (SW Patch, 5 MB)
Agfa ≥ 3927 (+ 3873, 3892, 3903, 3917, 3880,

3897, 3904, 3919, 3886, 3901, 3913, 3922,
Printers SNs
3890, 3902, 3915)
Konica ≥ 00380 (+ 00368, 00371, 00378)
Prerequisites None
*Note:
6.1 New Features
• Language dataset "LNG_5300_R1.93C1" embedded

• Improved patch version control: This checks, that only newer patches
can be installed on the printer.
6.2 Solved Bug
• Sporadic error messages "MOD 05, Please replace module" (MOD 05

is the output module) or "New Error E211001, Camdrive defect".
The error logging indicated an overcurrent problem in different motors.
The error disappeared after a reset of the printer.
This error was caused by a wrong hardware signal on the Vilis CPU
when the motors are activated.


Repair and Service
7 Software Release 2.0.0_C1
Printers SNs ≥ 4105 (incl. 4098, 4102)
MEDNET, GSO Library*
Availability Spare Part Kit: CM+343357.0 or
ABC Code: ERA3Q
Prerequisites None
*Note:
7.1 New Features for the Operator
• Support of additional languages for user messages and key-

operator screens: Chinese simplified*, Czech*, Danish* , Dutch*,
English*, Estonian, Finnish*, French*, German*, Greek*, Hungarian,
Italian*, Japanese*, Korean*, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian*, Polish*,
Portuguese*, Russian*, Slovakian, Slovenian, Spanish*, Swedish*,
Turkish.
Note: The languages marked with an "*" were already available in the
Language dataset "LNG_5300_R1.93C1".
• Browser interface for operator: Menu “Operator Tools” allows viewing

of print jobs currently in the print queue.
Username / Password: Operator / Operator.


Repair and Service
• Backside printing recognition: The printer checks when the film

arrives at the CDM, whether a small rectangle in the center of the film,
at the very beginning of the printable area, has Dmax.
In case the density is below a certain threshold, the film must be
inserted wrong. The printer stops printing, informs the user of back-side
printing, to check the correct positioning of the film and to remove the
film jam.
• No film calibration for RF Tag overruled printing: In case the RF tag

is missing, it is possible to configure the printer in the Service Menu for
"printing with Dmax = 2.00" or "printing not possible". In case it is
configured for "printing with Dmax = 2.00" and the automatic film
calibration after n film packs (n = 1 to 99) is switched on, the automatic
calibration is disabled for a film pack with missing RF tag.
• RF tag order-number tracking at auto film-calibration: The RF tag

contains the order-number of the film. When auto film-calibration is
enabled and set to n >1 film packs (I.e. between 2 and 99) there will
also be calibrated when the order-number changes.
• Logical printers are shown in key-operator menu now: In key-

operator menu "Show settings - 5 Logical printers" it is displayed,
whether more than one logical printer is configured.
7.2 New Features concerning Service
• Film info area on film adapted: The amount and format of the
displayed microtext data has changed (e.g. TMML info added).
• Batch tools to adjust network parameters:

Via commands "setip <IP address>" and "setsubnetmask
<subnetmask>" it is possible to adapt the IP address and subnetmask
on terminal level. This allows to adapt the IP address of the printer right
after switch on.
• Information in infocounter extended: The infocounter is extended

with info about Startup/Shutdown History (8.0 Startup/Shutdown
History). Now each CDM calibration is logged in the infocounter section
3.5 Calibration History.


Repair and Service
• Infocounter "FilmType Change History" is emptied with SW

upgrade: Because of many wrong entires in the past, the "FilmType
Change History" is emptied with SW upgrade
• Service Engineer Tool "Reset Calibration Data" added to the

browser pages: It is possible now to overwrite the film calibration and
CDM calibration files by default values.
• Maintenance action "Replace film input pickup rollers" removed:

The previous message "M4" with meaning to replace the pickup rollers
is removed.
• Automatic serial number entry after Emergency SW Installation: In

previous SW versions the serial number was lost, in case it was
selected not to preserve the configuration data. In this case the serial
number only could be get back again by restore of the backup.
• Software for Regular and Emergency SW Installation can be stored

on the same CF card::
When the printer boots up with the SW CF card, the user will be asked
at the local keypad "Install Emergency SW yes / no". After cancelling it
is still possible to perform a regular SW upgrade via local keypad.
7.3 New Features concerning Connectivity
• DICOM conformance level behavior implemented: Two printer

information levels can be defined via host profile:
0 (default) = No warnings are returned. Only 'Failure' status codes are
activate. This means, that the printer either returns 'normal' or 'failure'
(e.g. if printer is offline or film magazine is empty) to the modality.
1 = Warnings are returned. Refer to DICOM conformance status of the
Drystar 5300 and the host system. If the host system does not support
'status level' 1, set this parameter to default (= 0).
• Number of OEM LUTs extended: All LUTs named between

oem901.txt till oem999.txt which are available in directory C:\oemlut are
displayed in the drop down list in the host profile. Before only one
"handmade" OEM LUT named oem999.txt could be used.


Repair and Service
• Host profile Parameter 'LR-Like printing' introduced: While

comparing images processed with the new thermal model and images
printed with the LR5200 it showed, that the images of the LR still looked
slightly different, despite the sharpness was comparable.
Investigations of the linearity of the Laser Imager showed, that the
LR5200 does not behave exactly as linear as a Drystar does:
To get at Drystars with the new thermal model the same image
impression as on the LR5200, an additional LUT has to be applied, to
get the same "Non-linearity" as the Laser Imager. This LUT is applied
before the specified taste LUT (Kanamori, Kanamori_like etc.) is
applied.
Default: off. Possible settings: Off, low, medium. high.
Recommended setting to get the same image impression like on LR:
low.
• Host profile Parameter 'Print even if application type not

supported' introduced: This parameter defines, whether a print job
should be printed, even if no Mammo film is available. Default: No.
This parameter prevents that a Mammo modality sends images to the
printer, which only has CR/DR films loaded.
• Last received dicom attribute in host profile shown: In the DICOM

hostprofile editor there is a button to view the last received attributes
from a configured modality. In previous SW versions it showed the last
used attributes instead of the last received attributes.
• Disabled input tray is reported to host modality: A tray is disabled

when there is a electrical defect detected in the tray or when there is no
RF tag in the tray. A disabled tray is not set available for print-jobs now.
7.4 Improvements concerning Reliability
• Improved RF-tag header reading: Added a new retry mechanism in

the RF tag reader. This results in less failures on reading RF tag’s
• Support of ISO RF tags: The printer is able now to read the tags via
I*code2 (ISO15693) compatible protocols.


Repair and Service
7.5 Improvements concerning Image Quality
• Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model:

The thermal model is a mathematical description of the interaction Film
– TH. The thermal model uses parameters like film thickness, thermal
conductivity of the film, TH temperature; environmental temperature,
print speed and resolution of the print head.
The new thermal model TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; R&D name
of the product Æ marketing published it under 'A # Sharp') describes
this interaction more accurate, leading to a very precise reproduction of
the image. It does not use new parameters for calculating.
The image looks much sharper now, and has the image quality of a
Laser Imager. For more info refer to the HealthCare Newsletter
"Innovation at work: A#sharp" vailable on MEDNET, HealthCare
Library.
• Left/right shift print algorithm introduced:

At this position, where the TH has to print always Dmax, i.e. at the left
and right image border, the TH looses its characteristic relatively fast,
which is determined by the Micro profile calibration in production.
As a consequence, the TH produces after many prints with the same
film layout (e.g. 20/0) small print stripes at this position, where the black
borders around the single image is located (only in print direction).
To prevent, that the TH has to print the black border always at the same
position, a left/right shift algorithm is built in.
For each film pack the complete image information is shifted slightly:
o pack 1 has 0 mm shift
o pack 2 has +0.5mm shift
o pack 4 has -0.5mm shift
o and so on
The clear left and right borders are influenced by this shift mechanism
but they are within specification.


Repair and Service
7.6 Improvements concerning Printer Handling
• Job recovery improved: A print job is recovered in following cases

after it has been stored in RAM:
o unauthorized opening of the tray
o unauthorized opening of the printer's top cover
o film jam during printing
Before recovered print jobs were printed in order "Last received - first
printed". Now they are printed in order "First received – First printed".
7.7 Limitations
• Internal memory (Compact Flash) ≥ 128 Mb required (128 MB =
default)
• RAM ≥ 512 Mb required (512 MB = default; Optional 1 GB)
• Only one module/spare part replacement per start-up allowed
• Only Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher is usable as remote
browser application;
• Proxy server settings have to be disabled when using the remote
browser application (Tools - internet options - tab “connections” –
button “LAN settings)
7.8 Known Problems
• Some eLabels can get corrupt when disconnecting the P1-connector

before or during the start-up procedure, HW redesign of power-
connector is needed for solving this problem.
• Back-up dataset made by 2.0.0 release are not compatible with 1.9.0
and 1.8.0 release
• Back-up dataset made by 1.9.0 or 1.8.0 release are not compatible
with 2.0.0 release


Repair and Service
8 Software Release 2.1.0_C1
Printers SNs ≥ 5274
Prerequisites None
*Note:
8.1 New Features
• support of RoHS conform PCBs. See also Service Bulletin No. 10,
Drystar 5300, DD+DIS058.07E:
8.2 Improvements
• Latest language dataset has been embedded

(2.0.0 AGFA LNG dataset)
• No system failure message anymore on the local display during

software upgrade
• Configured language on the local keypad is persistent after reboot


Chapter 3.9
Imaging Services
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5364 / 100/300
► Please note
The Chapter ‘FAQ’, Edition 1, Revision 0, has been replaced by the separately
available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS153.08E
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Hardcopy Æ Dry Imagers Æ Drystar 5300 Æ Trouble shooting guide

08/2008 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 26032752
eq_03-9_faq_e_template_v05
Repair and Service
DD+DIS008.04E FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions


08/2008 Type 5365/100 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS212.04E Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams
List of Contents
1 Reference Diagrams ..................................................................2
1.1 Components Location ............................................................................... 2

1.2 Components Purpose and Reference to Circuit Diagram .................... 10
1.2.1 Sensors ..................................................................................................................10
1.2.2 Motors ....................................................................................................................10
1.2.3 Fans .......................................................................................................................10
1.2.4 Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)................................................................................11
1.2.5 E-labels ..................................................................................................................11
1.2.6 Plugs and Connectors ............................................................................................12
1.2.7 Modules..................................................................................................................13
2 General Circuit Diagrams
General Circuit Diagram (Diagram 1/1)

(Type 5365/100) Agfa Company Confidential
Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams DD+DIS212.04E
1 Reference Diagrams
1.1 Components Location
Component Name Refer to Component Name Refer to Component Name Refer to

CDM Contactless Densitometer PCB Figure 2 MOD08 Power Supply Module Figure 3 P6 (OSB) Plug P5 at OSB Figure 3
cdmLED Densitometer LED PCB Figure 2 MOD09 Display Module Figure 4 P8 (Vilis) Plug P8 at Vilis Figure 1
E1 eLabel Drum drive Figure 3 MOD10 Input Sensors Module Figure 4 P9 (Vilis) Plug P9 at Vilis Figure 1
E2 eLabel Drum module Figure 2 MOD11 Cam shaft drive Module Figure 2 RF RFID-tag reader Figure 1
E3 eLabel Power Supply Figure 3 & Figure 2 MOD12 TPH filter Module Figure 2 S1 Empty tray detection Figure 1
E4 eLabel TPH module Figure 3 MOD20 TPH Cooling Fan Module Figure 2 S10 Densitometer home position Figure 2
E5 eLabel Vilis Figure 1 MOD21 OSB PCB Module Figure 2 S11 Pickup home position Figure 1
E6 eLabel Display Module Figure 4 OSB1 OSB1 PCB Figure 3 S12 TPH heat sensor Figure 3
E7 eLabel Input Block Figure 1 P1 (Display) Plug P1 at Display Figure 4 S13 Second input sensor TPH Figure 4
E8 eLabel Output rollers Figure 2 P1 (OSB) Plug P1 at OSB Figure 3 S2 Input Block Module position detection Figure 1
E9 eLabel Pickup module Figure 1 P1 (PSU) Plug P1 at Power Supply Figure 1 S3 Input tray closed detection Figure 1
F1 CPU fan Figure 2 P1 (TH) Plug P1 at Thermal Head Figure 4 S4 First input sensor TPH Figure 4
F2 Thermal Head fan Figure 1 P1 (Vilis) Plug P1 at Vilis Figure 1 S5 Output sensor TPH Figure 2
KEY6 KEY6 PCB Figure 4 P11 (Vilis) Plug P11 at Vilis Figure 1 S6 Output rollers home position Figure 2
M1 Drum motor Figure 3 P14 (Vilis) Plug P14 at Vilis Figure 1 S7 TPH home position Figure 2
Safety switch top cover closed
M2 Camshaft drive motor Figure 2 P15 (Vilis) Plug P15 at Vilis Figure 1 S8 Figure 1
detection
M3 Pickup motor Figure 1 P2 (Display) Plug P2 at Display Figure 4 S9 Print drum drive Figure 3
M4 Output rollers motor Figure 2 P2 (OSB) Plug P2 at OSB Figure 3 TH Thermal Head Figure 3
M5 CDM Motor Figure 2 P2 (PSU) Plug P2 at Power Supply Figure 1 THEMIS Themis PCB Figure 1
MOD01 Input Block Module Figure 1 P2 (TH) Plug P2 at Thermal Head Figure 4 VILIS Vilis PCB Figure 1
MOD02 Pickup Module Figure 1 P20 (Vilis) Plug P20 at Vilis Figure 1 XS1 Connector XS1 Figure 1
MOD03 Print Drum Module Figure 2 P21 (Vilis) Plug P21 at Vilis Figure 1 XS2 Connector XS2 Figure 1
MOD04 Thermal Head Module Figure 3 P3 (OSB) Plug P3 at OSB Figure 3 XS3 Connector XS3 Figure 1
MOD05 Output Module Figure 2 P3 (PSU) Plug P3 at Power Supply Figure 1 XS5 Connector XS5 Figure 4
MOD06 Drum drive module Figure 3 P3 (TH) Plug P3 at Thermal Head Figure 4 XS6 Connector XS6 Figure 4
MOD07 Vilis/Themis/RAM module Figure 1 P4 (OSB) Plug P4 at OSB Figure 3 XS7 Connector XS7 Figure 1
Section 4 / 2 Drystar 5300 Edition 1, Revison 2

Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5365/100)
S11
Pickup module XS3

TPH Cooling fan (F2)
XS2
eLabel #9 Mod #02 Mod #12
M3
S8
Vilis/Themis/RAM module
Mod #07
P20 P21 P14
S1
XS1
Vilis Themis
P8
S2
RAM
eLabel #7 RFID-TAG S3 eLabel #5

Reader
Input block module

Mod #01 P1 XS7 P9 P11 P15
P1 P2 P3 53650401.CDR
Figure 1


E5 eLabel Vilis Figure 1 MOD21 OSB PCB Bodule Figure 2 S11 Pickup home position Figure 1
detection

M4
S5 cdmLED
Output module S6
TPH Filter module
Mod #05 Mod #20
M2
eLabel #8
M5
CDM S10
Cam shaft drive module

Mod #11
S7
Print Drum Module
Mod #03
F1
eLabel #2
eLabel #3
Vilis cooling fan

53650402.CDR
Figure 2


detection

S12
Thermal head module
Mod #04 eLabel #4
P2 P4
P6 P3
P1
OSB module M1
Mod #21
S9
eLabel #3 eLabel #1
Power module
Mod #08 Drum drive module
Mod #06
53650403.CDR
Figure 3


detection

Thermal head module

Input Sensors Mod #04
Mod #10
S4
S13
XS6 P2 P3 P1
P2
eLabel #6
Display Module
Mod #09
P1
XS5
53650404.CDR
Figure 4

1.2 Components Purpose and Reference to Circuit Diagram
1.2.1 Sensors
Component Position in Circuit Diagram Name Purpose / Comment Part of module …

S1 B11 Empty tray detection Detects if input tray is empty. MOD01 Input Block Module
S2 A13 Input Block Module position detection Detects the position of the Input block module (14*17" or 11*14"). MOD01 Input Block Module
S3 C11 Input tray closed detection Detects if input tray is closed. MOD01 Input Block Module
S4 N20 First input sensor TPH Detects if a film is at the first TPH sensor position. MOD10 Input Sensors Module
S5 B3 Output sensor TPH Detects if a film is at the Output sensor position MOD05 Output Module
S6 B1 Output rollers home position Detects home position of the Output rollers. MOD05 Output Module
S7 E20 TPH home position Detects home position of the TPH. MOD11 Cam Shaft Drive Module
S8 I20 Safety switch top cover closed detection Detects if top cover is closed. Not part of a module. Mounted at the frame.
S9 G1 Print drum drive Detects if the print drum drive is moving. MOD06 Drum Drive Module
S10 C1 Densitometer home position Detects home position of the Densitometer. MOD05 Output Module
S11 B17 Pickup home position Detects home position of the Pickup module. MOD02 Pickup Module
S12 H7 TPH heat sensor Detects TPH overheating. MOD04 Thermal Head Module
S13 N22 Second input sensor TPH Detects if a film is at the second TPH sensor position. MOD10 Input Sensors Module
1.2.2 Motors
Component Position in Circuit Diagram Name Purpose/Comment Part of module …

M1 I1 Drum motor Drives the Drum assy. MOD06 Drum Drive Module
M2 E22 Camshaft drive motor Drives the Camshaft. MOD11 Cam Shaft Drive Module
M3 B20 Pickup motor Drives the Pickup module. MOD02 Pickup Module
M4 E1 Output rollers motor Drives the Output rollers module. MOD05 Output Module
M5 D3 CDM Motor Turns the contactless densitometer CDM MOD05 Output Module
1.2.3 Fans

F1 L21 CPU fan Cools CPU compartment down. Not part of a module. Mounted at the frame.
F2 J21 Thermal Head fan Cools Thermal print head down. MOD12 TPH cooling Fan

1.2.4 Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)

VILIS O11 Vilis PCB CPU, I/O & TPH control MOD07 Vilis/Themis/RAM modul
THEMIS K14 Themis PCB Back end CPU MOD07 Vilis/Themis/RAM modul
OSB1 J5 OSB1 PCB Interface board for TPH MOD21 OSB PCB
KEY6 J8 KEY6 PCB Keypad and display functions MOD09 Display Module
CDM D4 Contactless Densitometer PCB Densitometer MOD05 Output Module
cdmLED C4 Densitometer LED PCB Densitometer LEDs MOD05 Output Module
RF B14 RFID-tag reader Film Identification Tag Reader (part of Input block module) MOD01 Input Block Module
TH G5 Thermal Head Transfers the image information to the film by heating up the film MOD04 Thermal Head Module
1.2.5 E-labels

E1 J1 eLabel bus 0 #2 Keeps info about Drum drive module MOD06 Drum drive module
E2 G20 eLabel bus 0 #3 Keeps info about Print Drum module MOD03 Print Drum Module
E3 K1 eLabel bus 0 #4 Keeps info about Power Supply module MOD08 Power Supply Module
E4 G8 eLabel bus 0 #5 Keeps info about TPH module MOD04 Thermal Head Module
Not displayed (fixed soldered on
E5 eLabel bus 1 #0 Keeps info about Vilis/Themis/RAM Module MOD07 Vilis/Themis/RAM Module
the Vilis PCB)
Not displayed (fixed soldered on
E6 eLabel bus 1 #1 Keeps info about Display Module MOD09 Display Module
the Key PCB)
E7 C13 eLabel bus 1 #2 Keeps info about Input Block module MOD01 Input Block Module
E8 B5 eLabel bus 1 #3 Keeps info about Output module MOD05 Output Module
E9 C18 eLabel bus 1 #4 Keeps info about Pickup module MOD02 Pickup Module

1.2.6 Plugs and Connectors
Component Position in Circuit Diagram Name Comment

XS1 B10 Connector XS1 Connection between XS7 and MOD01 (Input Block Module)
XS2 B7 Connector XS2 Connection between MOD05 (Output Module) and MOD07 (Vilis/Themis/RAM Module)
XS3 E7 Connector XS3 Connection between MOD05 (Output Module) and MOD07 (Vilis/Themis/RAM Module)
XS5 M19 Connector XS5 Connection between MOD10 (Input Sensors Module) and MOD07 (Vilis/Themis/RAM Module)
XS6 I7 Connector XS6 Connection between OSB PCB and blemish heater of MOD04 (Thermal Head Module)
XS7 C8 Connector XS7 Connection between XS1 at MOD01 (Input Block Module) and MOD07 (Vilis/Themis/RAM Module)
P1 (PSU) N6 Plug P1 at power supply --
P2 (PSU) L6 Plug P2 at power supply --
P3 (PSU) K4 Plug P3 at power supply --
P1 (TH) G6 Plug P1 at Thermal Head --
P1 (OSB) I3 Plug P1 at OSB PCB --
P2 (OSB) J4 Plug P2 at OSB PCB --
P3 (OSB) J4 Plug P3 at OSB PCB --
P1 (Display) J9 Plug P1 at Key6 PCB --
P2 (Display) K8 Plug P2 at Key6 PCB --
P1 (Vilis) J18 Plug P1 at Vilis PCB --
P8 (Vilis) J10 Plug P8 at Vilis PCB --
P9 (Vilis) H10 Plug P9 at Vilis PCB --
P11 (Vilis) N10 Plug P11 at Vilis PCB --
P14 (Vilis) I10 Plug P14 at Vilis PCB --
P15 (Vilis) L10 Plug P15 at Vilis PCB --
P20 (Vilis) E12 Plug P20 at Vilis PCB --
P21 (Vilis) E16 Plug P21 at Vilis PCB --

1.2.7 Modules
Component Position in Circuit Diagram Name Purpose

MOD01 A13 Input Block Module Reads the RF tag of the film package. Detects empty film. Detects closed input tray.
MOD02 A19 Pickup Module Picks up the film and transports it towards the drum.
MOD03 Not displayed (no electrical part) Print Drum Module Transports the film during printing.
MOD04 F4 Thermal Head Module Heats up the film with 4480 resistors
MOD05 A2 Output Module Transports the film out of the printer after printing. Keeps the CDM (Contactless densitometer Module)
MOD06 G1 Drum drive module Drives the print drum
MOD07 O11 Vilis/Themis/RAM module CPU of the printer. Drives all motors; reads out all sensors.
MOD08 P3 Power Supply Module Supplies all voltages for the printer
MOD09 J8 Display Module User interface with LCD display and keypad
MOD10 O21 Input Sensors Module Checks film run between pickup module and thermal head
MOD11 D21 Cam Shaft Drive Module Produces the correct pressure during printing
MOD12 L21 TPH Cooling Fan Module Cools Thermal print head down.
MOD20 Not displayed (no electrical part) TPH filter Module Keeps a dust filter. Mounted before TPH filter module.
MOD21 J5 OSB PCB Bodule Interface board for TPH

NAGEZIEN LT Braamzijde MATERIAAL
.
General Circuit Diagram Section 4, Part 2 Edition 1, Revision 0
Diagram 1/1
Maten zonder tolerantie WIRING DIAGRAM
- Benaming:
Uitvoering volgens lastenboek
- Tekening
nummer:
D1006851.4.0
4 99-11-03 LT
Drystar 5300 LT Artikel
3 99-06-09 nummer:
Type 5364/100
2 99-04-26 LT Agfa-Gevaert N.V. 5363
R & O Apparatuur MORTSEL.
Project Blad: 1/1
1 98-11-26 LT
ECO VR DATUM NM STRICTLY PRIVATE Created:

Agfa Group Confidential 1994.12.13
Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS314.05M
Drystar 5300
Type 5365/0100
dr
el.c
00 _tit
5 _01
536
Internal update: 5
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.

Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare
DD+DIS314.05M Spare Parts List
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:

(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair
or maintenance task on the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions"
and on the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.

• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the
procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com
NOTE:
For Recycling Information please refer to:
http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf


Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous version 1.7
Revision Date
1.8 06-2007 Spare Parts List completely revised
RoHS compliant Spare Parts added and marked


Contents
LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
MODULE DE PUISSANCE
PAGES 12 - 15
VERKLEIDUNG
COVERS
REVETEMENT
PAGES 06 - 10
ANTRIEB
DRIVE
ENTRAINEMENT
PAGES 08 - 11
Drystar 5300 printers with SN>10.000 are RoHS compliant.

For those printers only use RoHS compliant Spare Parts.
For Drystar 5300 printers with SN<10.000

Non-RoHs conformed Spare Parts can be used till end of stock
as well as RoHS compliant Spare Parts. 5365_0100_inhalt.cdr


How to navigate the spare parts list online
(1) Open Bookmarks

(2) Click on "CONTENTS"
(3) See overview of the modules

(4) Click on requested module
(5) Appropriate page opens


02* 04*
06*
05*
01 03*
(MOD09)
07*


as well as RoHS compliant Spare Parts.
5365_0100_8001.cdr
COVERS

Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+3433363 TASTATUR / ANZEIGEMODUL - BIS FN9.999
KEYPAD / DISPLAY MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
CLAVIER / MODULE AFFICHEUR - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
1 CM+3433740 TASTATUR / ANZEIGEMODUL (ROHS)
KEYPAD / DISPLAY MODULE (ROHS)
CLAVIER / MODULE AFFICHEUR (ROHS)
2 CM+3433431 * VERKLEIDUNG LINKS (ROHS)
LEFT COVER (ROHS)
CAPOT GAUCHE (ROHS)
2 CM+3433430 * VERKLEIDUNG LINKS - BIS FN9.999
LEFT COVER - UP TO SN9.999
CAPOT GAUCHE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3433440 * VERKLEIDUNG RECHTS - BIS FN9.999
PANELING RHS - UP TO SN9.999
CAPOT DROITE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3433441 * VERKLEIDUNG RECHTS (ROHS)
PANELING RHS (ROHS)
CAPOT DROITE (ROHS)
4 CM+3433450 * ABDECKUNG OBEN - BIS FN9.999
COVER TOP - UP TO SN9.999
COUVERCLE EN HAUT - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
4 CM+3433451 * ABDECKUNG OBEN (ROHS)
COVER TOP (ROHS)
COUVERCLE EN HAUT (ROHS)
5 CM+3433460 * VORDERE ABDECKUNG - BIS FN9.999
FRONT COVER - UP TO SN9.999
COUVERCLE AVANT - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
5 CM+3433461 * VORDERE ABDECKUNG (ROHS)
FRONT COVER (ROHS)
COUVERCLE AVANT (ROHS)
6 CM+3433471 * ABDECKUNG FILMAUSGABE - BIS FN9.999
OUTPUT TRAY COVER - UP TO SN9.999
COUVERCLE RECEPTACLE FILM - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
6 CM+3433472 * ABDECKUNG FILMAUSGABE (ROHS)
OUTPUT TRAY COVER (ROHS)
COUVERCLE RECEPTACLE FILM (ROHS)
7 CM+3433483 * FILMEINGABE (ROHS)
INPUT TRAY (ROHS)
BAC FILM (ROHS)
7 CM+3433482 * FILMEINGABE - BIS FN9.999
INPUT TRAY - UP TO SN9.999
BAC FILM - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
=Assembly
D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =Spare part not available from stock. Expect extended delivery time.
COVERS

05 13
(MOD04)
11
10
(MOD20)
04
(MOD03)
06
(MOD06) 01
(MOD05)
07
(MOD12)
09
(MOD10)
02
(MOD02)
08
(MOD11)
12*

For those printers only use RoHS compliant Spare Parts. 03
(MOD01)
5365_0100_8002.cdr
DRIVE

1 CM+3433730 AUSGABEMODUL (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 BENÖTIGT
OUTPUT MODULE (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 REQUIRED
MODULE DE SORTIE (ROHS) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 2.1.0_C1
1 CM+3433303 AUSGABEMODUL - BIS FN9.999
OUTPUT MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE DE SORTIE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
2 CM+3433312 AUFNAHMEMODUL (ROHS)
PICK UP MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE DE RECEPTION (ROHS)
2 CM+3433311 AUFNAHMEMODUL - BIS FN9.999
PICK UP MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE DE RECEPTION - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3433320 EINGABEMODUL - BIS FN9.999
INPUT BLOCK MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE D'ENTRÉE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3433321 EINGABEMODUL (ROHS)
INPUT BLOCK MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE D'ENTRÉE (ROHS)
4 CM+3433330 DRUCKWALZE - BIS FN9.999
PRINT DRUM MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
ROULEAU D'IMPRESSION - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
4 CM+3433331 DRUCKWALZE (ROHS)
PRINT DRUM MODULE (ROHS)
ROULEAU D'IMPRESSION (ROHS)
5 CM+3492641 THERMODRUCKKOPF DS530X - BIS FN9.999
THERMAL HEAD DS530X - UP TO SN9.999
TETE THERMIQUE DS530X - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
5 CM+3492642 THERMODRUCKKOPF DS530X
THERMAL HEAD DS530X
TETE THERMIQUE DS530X
6 CM+3433380 WALZENANTRIEBSMODUL - BIS FN9.999
DRUM DRIVE MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE D'ENTRAINEMENT DU CYLINDRE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
6 CM+3433381 WALZENANTRIEBSMODUL (ROHS)
DRUM DRIVE MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE D'ENTRAINEMENT DU CYLINDRE (ROHS)
7 CM+3433390 TPH KÜHLGEBLÄSE - BIS FN9.999
TPH COOLING FAN - UP TO SN9.999
VENTILATEUR THP - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
7 CM+3433391 TPH KÜHLGEBLÄSE (ROHS)
TPH COOLING FAN (ROHS)
VENTILATEUR THP (ROHS)
8 CM+3433413 MODUL 'CAM SHAFT DRIVE' (ROHS)
CAM SHAFT DRIVE MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE D'ENTRAINENMENT (ROHS)
8 CM+3433412 MODUL 'CAM SHAFT DRIVE' - BIS FN9.999
CAM SHAFT DRIVE MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE D'ENTRAINENMENT - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
9 CM+3433421 MODUL 'INPUT SENSOR' (ROHS)
INPUT SENSORS MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE CAPTEURS D'ENTREE (ROHS)
9 CM+3433420 MODUL 'INPUT SENSOR' - BIS FN9.999
INPUT SENSOR MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE CAPTEURS D'ENTREE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
10 CM+3433500 MODUL 'TPH FILTER' - BIS FN9.999
TPH FILTER MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE FILTRE TPH - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
=Assembly
DRIVE

05 13
(MOD04)
11
10
(MOD20)
04
(MOD03)
06
(MOD06) 01
(MOD05)
07
(MOD12)
09
(MOD10)
02
(MOD02)
08
(MOD11)
12*

For those printers only use RoHS compliant Spare Parts. 03
(MOD01)
5365_0100_8002.cdr
DRIVE

10 CM+3433501 MODUL 'TPH FILTER' (ROHS)
TPH FILTER MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE FILTRE TPH (ROHS)
11 CM+3433520 HAUPTANTRIEBSRAD & WALZENANTRIEBSRIEMEN - BIS FN9.999
MAIN DRIVE PULLEY & DRUM BELT - UP TO SN9.999
ROUE D'ENTRAINEMENT &COURROIES D'ENTRAINEMENT DU TAMBOUR - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
11 CM+3433521 HAUPTANTRIEBSRAD & WALZENANTRIEBSRIEMEN (ROHS)
MAIN DRIVE PULLEY & DRUM BELT (ROHS)
ROUE D'ENTRAINEMENT &COURROIES D'ENTRAINEMENT DU TAMBOUR (ROHS)
12 CM+3433510 * KABEL FÜR BLOCKMODUL - BIS FN9.999
EXTENSION CABLE BLOCK MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
CÂBLE RALLONGE POUR MODULE BLOCK - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
12 CM+3433511 * KABEL FÜR BLOCKMODUL (ROHS)
EXTENSION CABLE BLOCK MODULE (ROHS)
CÂBLE RALLONGE POUR MODULE BLOCK (ROHS)
13 CM+3433551 TPH FLACHKABEL (ROHS)
TPH FLAT CABLE (ROHS)
CABLE PLAT THP (ROHS)
13 CM+3433550 TPH FLACHKABEL - BIS FN9.999
TPH FLAT CABLE - UP TO SN9.999
CABLE PLAT THP - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
=Assembly
DRIVE

03
(MOD21) 02
(MOD08)
01*
05
11
07
08
05
09,10
04 06*
(MOD07)


Non-RoHs conformed Spare Parts can be used till end of stock 5365_0100_8003.cdr
POWER UNIT

1 CM+3433541 * SICHERHEITSSCHALTER (ROHS)
SAFETY SWITCH (ROHS)
INTERRUPTEUR DE SÉCURITÉ (ROHS)
1 CM+3433540 * SICHERHEITSSCHALTER - BIS FN9.999
SAFETY SWITCH - UP TO SN9.999
INTERRUPTEUR DE SÉCURITÉ - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
2 CM+3433371 NETZTEIL - BIS FN9.999
POWER SUPPLY - UP TO SN9.999
ALIMENTATION - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
2 CM+3433372 NETZTEIL - ROHS
POWER SUPPLY - ROHS
ALIMENTATION - ROHS
3 CM+3433491 OSB SWITCH BOARD - BIS FN9.999
OSB SWITCH BOARD - UP TO SN9.999
OSB SWITCH BOARD - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3433750 OSB PCB (ROHS)
OSB PCB (ROHS)
OSB PCB (ROHS)
4 CM+3433710 VILIS / THEMIS / RAM MODUL (ROHS)
VILIS / THEMIS / RAM MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE VILIS / THEMIS / RAM (ROHS)
4 CM+34333510 VILIS / THEMIS / RAM MODUL - BIS FN9.999
VILIS / THEMIS / RAM MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE VILIS / THEMIS / RAM - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
5 CM+3433560 COMPACT FLASH KARTE 128MB - BIS FN9.999
COMPACT FLASH CARD 128MB - UP TO SN9.999
CARTE COMPACT FLASH 128MB - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
5 CM+3433561 COMPACT FLASH KARTE 128MB (ROHS)
COMPACT FLASH CARD 128MB (ROHS)
CARTE COMPACT FLASH 128MB (ROHS)
6 CM+3433401 * VILIS KÜHLGEBLÄSE (ROHS)
VILIS COOLING FAN (ROHS)
VENTILATEUR VILIS (ROHS)
6 CM+3433400 * VILIS KÜHLGEBLÄSE - BIS FN9.999
VILIS COOLING FAN - UP TO SN9.999
VENTILATEUR VILIS - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
7 CM+3433640 VILIS KARTE - BIS FN9.999
VILIS PCB - UP TO SN9.999
CARTE VILIS - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
7 CM+3433680 VILIS 2.4 (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 BENÖTIGT
VILIS 2.4 (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 REQUIRED
VILIS 2.4 (ROHS) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 2.1.0_C1
8 CM+3460393 KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
9 CM+3433600 1GB RAM OPTION MODUL - BIS FN9.999
1GB RAM OPTION MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
1GB RAM OPTION MODULE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
9 CM+3433720 1GB RAM MODUL (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 BENÖTIGT
1GB RAM MODULE (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 REQUIRED
1GB RAM MODULE (ROHS) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 2.1.0_C1
10 CM+3433630 512MB SDRAM MODUL - BIS FN9.999
512MB SDRAM MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE 512MB SDRAM - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
10 CM+3433700 512MB RAM MODUL (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 BENÖTIGT
512MB RAM MODULE (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 REQUIRED
MODULE 512MB RAM (ROHS) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 2.1.0_C1
=Assembly
POWER UNIT

03
(MOD21) 02
(MOD08)
01*
05
11
07
08
05
09,10
04 06*
(MOD07)


Non-RoHs conformed Spare Parts can be used till end of stock 5365_0100_8003.cdr
POWER UNIT

11 CM+3433690 THEMIS 7 W/O RAM (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 BENÖTIGT
THEMIS 7 W/O RAM (ROHS) - SW 2.1.0_C1 REQUIRED
THEMIS 7 W/O RAM (ROHS) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 2.1.0_C1
11 CM+3433652 THEMIS4B W/O SDRAM - BIS FN9.999
THEMIS4B W/O SDRAM - UP TO SN9.999
THEMIS4B W/O SDRAM - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
99 CM+3099310 REINIGUNGSTÜCHER
CLEANING TISSUES
DES SERVIETTES DESINTOXIQUES
=Assembly
POWER UNIT

Spare Parts Kit Categories
R 'Repair' Parts required to repair a machine

Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
• number of machines
• extension of the service area
• local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
• stockpiling
I 'Installation' Parts required to install a machine

Kit `I`should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance' Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
L 'Local stock' Extremely expensive or bulky parts

Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
Spare Parts Kit Order numbers
Order number Spare Part Kit version

CM+053650100733 DRYSTAR 5300 Sortiment M 3


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type No. Specification

DRYSTAR 5300 5365/0100 100-240V AC / 50
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order number

MOBILE INSTALLATION KIT EO6C4
1GB RAM OPTION MODULE EP5UA


Document No: DD+DIS314.05M

Technical Modifications reserved.
Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare

D - 81539 München
Germany
www.agfa.com
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trade marks of Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare

Agfa Company Confidential

DD+DIS350.05E Field Modifications
List of Contents of Chapter 7 (lists all available modifications)
Edition Revision Order Number Contents

1 9 DD+DIS350.05E SW Upgrade 2.0.0_C1 Instructions

Edition 1, Revision 9 DRYSTAR 5300 Chapter 7
2006-01-20 (Type 5365) Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE Field Modifications
Global Services Organisation
*1Y36XX1*
1 Piece Y36XX MA1
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365
Drystar 5300 Software 2.0.0_C1 Upgrade
This document describes all steps of the Software Upgrade Procedure to SW

2.0.0_C1 starting from SW 1.8X_C1 or SW 1.9X_C1. The main steps are:
• Check currently installed Software version
• Print a SMPTE and a (technical) test image from each modality
• Perform Software Upgrade
o via CF card or
o via Network and Service Engineer Command Session
• Perform a film calibration
• Print a SMPTE test image and a (technical) test image from each
modality
• Show the customer the new features
• Perform backup of Machine Specific Data
Printed in Germany 2006-01-20

Caution:
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be performed by qualified
technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical
progress.
List of Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
2 Preparation ............................................................................................... 3
2.1 Copying Software Release 2.0.0_C1 to CF Card ....................................... 3
2.2 Check of currently installed Software Release ........................................... 3
2.3 Check of configured Interpolation Settings ................................................. 4
2.4 Film Calibration .......................................................................................... 4
2.5 Print-out of Test Images ............................................................................. 6
3 Software Upgrade Rel. 1.8X to 2.0.0_C1 ................................................. 7
3.1 Regular Software Upgrade via CF Card ..................................................... 8
4 Finalization of the upgrade...................................................................... 9
4.1 Check of installed Software Release .......................................................... 9
4.2 Film Calibration .......................................................................................... 9
4.3 Print-out of Test Images ........................................................................... 10
4.4 Comparison of Images before and after Software Upgrade ..................... 11
4.4.1 Contrast and Sharpness Adjustment................................................................... 12
4.5 Customer Instruction ................................................................................ 13
4.6 Backup of Machine Specific Data............................................................. 14
5 History of new features and improvements since
SW release 1.9X_C1 ............................................................................... 15
5.1 New Features for the Operator................................................................. 15
5.2 New Features concerning Service............................................................ 16
5.3 New Features concerning Connectivity .................................................... 17
5.4 Improvements concerning Reliability ........................................................ 18
5.5 Improvements concerning Image Quality ................................................. 18
5.6 Improvements concerning Printer Handling.............................................. 19
5.7 Limitations ................................................................................................ 19
5.8 Known Software Problems ....................................................................... 19
6 Appendix ................................................................................................. 20
6.1 Connection to the Web Pages.................................................................. 20
6.2 Adaptation of the PC IP address .............................................................. 21
6.3 Software Upgrade via Browser................................................................. 23
6.4 Emergency Software Upgrade ................................................................. 24
6.5 Basic Image Adjustments Overview ......................................................... 26

Edition 1, Revision 9 DRYSTAR 5300 Chapter 7 / I
Subject Drystar 5300 Software 2.0.0_C1 Upgrade
Scope of delivery:
• CD ROM with SW 2.0.0_C1
• User Manual in English Language
• Reference Manual in English Language
• Label "A#sharp"
• Installation Instructions "A#sharp label"
• Installation Instructions SW Rel. 2.0.0_C1
Required tools:
• Service PC
• Waterproof pen
• Loupe 8x (CM+9.9579.9904.0)
Required time:
Approx. 1 hour
Printer Software / Hardware precondition:

The software upgrade can be performed at any Drystar 5300
equipped with Software 1.8X or 1.9X no matter on the hardware status.
*Content of the Drystar 5300 Software Rel. 2 CD:

Subdirectory Content
Docu This enclosure document
Regular_Install Software for regular SW upgrade
(SWR_DRYSTAR5300_R2.0.0_C1.zip)
Emergency_Install Software for emergency SW installation
User_Manuals User manuals in 28 languages* (PDF)
Reference_Manual Reference Manual in English Language (PDF)
*for list of languages refer to section 4.5 on page 13.


Field Modifications DD+DIS350.05E
1 Introduction
• Drystar 5300 software release 2.0.0_C1 is an optional upgrade.
• It contains following main features
(for a complete list refer to section 5 of this document and chapter 3.8 of
the Technical Documentation):
o Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model. Marketing

name "A#sharp", R&D name TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer).
o Extended custom OEM LUT
o Backside Printing Recognition via CDM
o Extended queue control for the operator via browser
Scope of this Document

This document describes all required actions for Software upgrade as well as
an emergency procedure in case something goes wrong during Software
upgrade.
The Software Upgrade procedure to SW 2.0.0_C1 is split up in the following
steps:
# Step Refer to
section
1 Copy Software Release 2.0.0_C1 to CF card 2.1
2 Check currently installed Software version 2.2
3 Check configured interpolation settings 2.3
4 Perform film calibration 2.4
5 Print test images 2.5
6a Software Upgrade via CF card 3.1
6b Software Upgrade via browser 6.3
7 Check displayed software version 4.1
8 Perform a film calibration 4.2
10 Compare images before and after Software Upgrade 4.4
11 Show the customer the new features 4.5
12 Perform backup of Machine Specific Data 4.6

Chapter 7 / 2 DRYSTAR 5300 Edition 1, Revision 9

Agfa Company Confidential (Typ 5365) 2006-01-20
2 Preparation
The preparation is split up in following main tasks:
# Tasks Refer to
1 Copy Software Release 2.0.0_C1 to CF card 2.1
2 Check currently installed Software version 2.2
3 Check of configured Interpolation Settings 2.3
4 Perform film calibration. 2.4
5 Print a STI2 test image and medical test image from 2.5
the service menu and a (technical) test image from
each modality
2.1 Copying Software Release 2.0.0_C1 to CF Card

(1) Insert the CF card which is part of delivery in the PC CF card reader
(2) Copy file D:\Regular_Install\SWR_DRYSTAR5300_R2.0.0_C1.zip from
CD ROM to the root of the CF card (in case the CD ROM drive is not
drive D: select the corresponding different drive)
2.2 Check of currently installed Software Release

(1) In the key-operator menu select '1 Show Settings – 1 General’.
(2) Check the currently installed software release: It must show R 1.8X C1
or R1.9X C1.

2.3 Check of configured Interpolation Settings

(1) In the key-operator menu select '1 Show Settings – 4 Image Quality -
<Host Profile name> - 2 Interpolation’.
(2) Check and write down the interpolation setting for each Host Profile.
The image sharpness will be improved after the SW upgrade, due to the
new Thermal model "A# sharp". The current interpolation settings will
automatically be overwritten by new default values.
Just in case the customer wants to have the "old" image impression back
after SW upgrade, "A#sharp" can be switched off. In this case the current
interpolation settings have to be entered again.

Calibration'
The calibration film as shown
in Figure 1 is printed and the
INPUT TRAY:
FILM CALIBRATION OK
Dmax = 3.03 (MB924)

5365_enc_600.cdr

Figure 1
The film calibration is performed to allow comparison of test images before

and after SW upgrade.


The calibration is successful, in case the measured Dmax is ≤ 2% different

from the target Dmax.
The target Dmax depends on the default densitometer which is configured in
Key-operator menu "2 Change Settings - 4 Image Quality - 1 General".
Refer to table below:

X-Rite 310 3.10 O.D. 2.95 O.D.
X-Rite 331 3.03 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
X-Rite 341 3.04 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
X-Rite 301 2.99 O.D. 2.86 O.D.
Gretag D200 3.03 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
• When the Dmax isn't reached, automatically a second film calibration

starts. The TH power will be increased so that the Dmax will be reached
if there are no artifacts in the film.
• In case Dmax is still more than ± 2% different from the target Dmax the
display will show "calibration failed". In this case check the CDM
measurement area at the lightbox for image artifacts (e.g. dust stripes).
Refer to Figure 1.
⇒ In case of image artifacts troubleshoot as described in
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting, section "Artifacts on the Film".
⇒ In case no image artifacts are visible troubleshoot as described in
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting, section "Dmax too high or too low".

2.5 Print-out of Test Images

(1) In the browser pages select menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print Image - 1 Test image -
Medical_image.ZIP.
(2) Select '1' for number of copies:
The medical_image test image will be printed.
(3) From the same menu print a test film "STI2".
(4) Mark the test images with a waterproof pen as ‘internal test image
before software upgrade’.
(5) If possible, print a technical and medical image from each modality.
(6) Write the modality name and ‘test image before software upgrade’ on
the printed films.
(7) Keep the images as reference for comparison after the software
upgrade.


3 Software Upgrade Rel. 1.8X to 2.0.0_C1
• Software upgrade can be done via CF card or browser.

• We advise to make the software upgrade via CF card.
# Type of Software Upgrade Refer to section
1 Regular software upgrade via CF card 3.1
2 Regular software upgrade via browser Appendix 6.3
3 Emergency software upgrade via CF card Appendix 6.4
Note concerning downgrade:

It is not possible to downgrade from SW 2.0.0 to SW Rel. 1.8X or 1.9X after
the upgrade procedure is started.

3.1 Regular Software Upgrade via CF Card

(1) Follow the steps as described in Figure 2.
6 Calibration
0 min.
7 Service Actions Go to 5 min.
Power off initiated
8 Quality Control key-operator menu
Please wait
9 Installation 9 Installation
1 Installation from
0 min.
CF card 5 min.
2 Printer
Installation
No user action required - Do not switch off the printer!

Before install.
0 min.
please make backup Insert backup 6 min. Please WAIT
1 OK, make backup Self Test
2 Skip backup
CF card proceeding
0 min. Saving Configuration

10 min.
40%
Save
2 min.
Configuration
Remove backup 11 min. Please WAIT
CF card Self Test
Please remove card proceeding
Installation
3 min.
from CF card Insert CF card 11 min.
Software :2.00C1 with SW 2.00_C1
Yes ( ) NO (X)
Copying
3 min. Please WAIT
a:/.... 14 min.
to Self Test
c:/.... proceeding
4 min. Please WAIT

Install data 23 min. Self Test
please wait proceeding
40%
5 min. Installation Ready

finished Remove CF card 24 min.
Please remove card with SW 2.00_C1

New settings will
5 min.
be active
after automatic
Press
reset of the printer Confirm key
5365_enc_400.cdr
Figure 2
• Important remark: Do not switch off the printer during software

installation as some boards are programmed during the software
upgrade.
• After approx. 11 minutes after (from start of the software installation) the
display stays dark for approx. 3 minutes.
• In case the printer hangs with message "Error - System Failure" for more
than 10 minutes, perform an emergency software upgrade procedure.
Refer to the appendix chapter 6.4


4 Finalization of the upgrade

The finalization of the upgrade is split up in following main tasks:
# Tasks Refer to
1 Check displayed software version 4.1
2 Perform film calibration 4.2
4 Print a STI2 test image and medical test image from the 4.4
service menu and a (technical) test image from each
modality
5 Show the customer the new features 4.5
6 Perform backup of Machine Specific Data 4.6
4.1 Check of installed Software Release

How? (1) In the key-operator menu select '1 Show Settings – 1 General’.
(2) Check the installed software release. It has to show ‘R2.0.0 C1’’

Calibration'
The calibration film as shown in

Figure 3 is printed and the
INPUT TRAY:
FILM CALIBRATION OK
Dmax = 3.03 (MB924)

5365_enc_600.cdr

Figure 3

The calibration is successful, in case the measured Dmax is ≤ 2% different

from the target Dmax.
The target Dmax depends on the default densitometer which is configured in
Key-operator menu "2 Change Settings - 4 Image Quality - 1 General".
Refer to table below:

X-Rite 310 3.10 O.D. 2.95 O.D.
X-Rite 331 3.03 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
X-Rite 341 3.04 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
X-Rite 301 2.99 O.D. 2.86 O.D.
Gretag D200 3.03 O.D. 2.92 O.D.
4.3 Print-out of Test Images

(1) In the browser pages select menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print Image - 1 Test image -
Medical_image.ZIP.
(2) Select '1' for number of copies.
The medical_image test image will be printed.
(3) From the same menu print a test film "STI2".
(4) Mark the test images with a waterproof pen as ‘internal test image after
software upgrade’.
(5) If possible, print a technical and medical image from each modality.
(6) Write the modality name and ‘test image after software upgrade’ on the
printed films.


4.4 Comparison of Images before and after Software Upgrade

(1) At the light box compare the images you made before the software
upgrade with the images after the software upgrade.
(2) Check the images for artifacts: In case image artifacts are visible in the
images before and after the upgrade, troubleshoot as described in
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting, of the Technical Documentation.
(3) Check the image contrast and sharpness in images before and after the
SW upgrade.
• The sharpness should be better than before, due to the new
Thermal Model named "A# sharp"
• The contrast should be the same.
⇒ In case contrast or sharpness adjustments are required, refer
to section 4.4.1
The thermal model "TMML", available as of software 2.0.0_C1 has different

smoothing factors than the thermal model V1, which was used in
software < 2.0.0_C1.
Interpolation Type Default smoothfactor Default smoothfactor
Thermal Model V 1 A#sharp
Cubic High Res -2.5 -0.7
Cubic Bell 0.35 0.9

4.4.1 Contrast and Sharpness Adjustment

⇒ Both, contrast and sharpness adjustments are normally not required
after software upgrade.
• Contrast is determined by look up table and maximum density.
• Sharpness is determined by the interpolation type.
• For more information to image adjustments refer to the appendix section
6.5 "Basic Image Adjustments Overview"

Quality - <Modality XYZ>
Purpose: Adjust Image Quality in case it cannot be adapted

at the modality
Default value: • Look-up table: Kanamori.

• Interpolation: Cubic HiRes -0.7.
• Dmax 3.10
Example screens:

Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Daily used name CT2 Select kanamori like value:

Modality AE-title CT2_ARC 100
Linear
*
Look Up Table: Select abosulte smoothing factor: (advised = -0.7)
Kanamori
Kanamorilike -0.7
Interpolation:
**
Replication
Linear Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
CubicHi-res
CubicBell 536601fs.cdr

285
290
295
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values) **
Possible Look up table settings 5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1

* Cubic Bell
Dmax
Kanamori curve and
Kanamori like value 4.9 -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 -4.9
Cubic High Res
220 200
100 less sharp sharp too sharp
mori 75
Kana Legend
Dmin Input Limits
0 255 Default
Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori 5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1
Kanamori_like 200 = linear
Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic Reasonable values
Figure 4


4.5 Customer Instruction

(1) Inform the customer about the new features for the operator (refer to
section 5.1) and improvements regarding image quality (refer to
section 5.5)
(2) Hand over the user* and reference manual which is part of delivery.
Note concerning improved image sharpness:

In case the customer should not be satisfied with the improved sharpness of
the new thermal model "A#sharp", this can be switched off in the Browser
Service Menu:
"2 Change settings - 4 Image Quality - 1 General Setting".
Note: In this unlikely event, that the customer wants to have the previous
image quality back, the smooth factors are set back to the non A#sharp
default smooth factors (cubic highres: -2.5 / cubic bell: 0.35). The previously
adjusted smooth factors are lost and have to be adjusted manually.
In this case use the values collected during step '2.3, Check of configured
Interpolation Settings'.
*Note regarding User Manual:
Only the English user manual is part of delivery. Up-to-date user manuals in
28 languages (see next page) are available on the SW CD as PDF
documents or can be ordered as paper document:
To order the required user manual on paper select intranet link

o http://intra.agfanet/BU/MI/polling.nsf/manualorderform?OpenForm
or follow the MEDNET intranet path:
o Sales & Marketing - Sales Tools - Printed media - Printed
Documentation

Languages for the user manual:

1. Chinese simplified 18. Norwegian
2. Chinese traditional 19. Polish
3. Czech 20. Portuguese
4. Danish 21. Russian
5. Dutch 22. Slovakian
6. English 23. Slovenian
7. Estonian 24. Spanish
8. Finnish 25. Swedish
9. French 26. Thai
10. German 27. Turkish
11. Greek 28. Vietnamese
12. Hungarian
13. Italian
14. Japanese
15. Korean
16. Latvian
17. Lithuanian
Note: The user displays can be configured for these languages (except Thai
and Vietnamese).
4.6 Backup of Machine Specific Data

(1) In the Key-Operator Menu on the local keypad select '4 Save
configuration - 1 General' and follow the further instructions on the
display.


5 History of new features and improvements since SW

release 1.9X_C1
5.1 New Features for the Operator
• Support of additional languages for user messages and key-

operator screens: Chinese simplified*, Czech*, Danish* , Dutch*,
English*, Estonian, Finnish*, French*, German*, Greek*, Hungarian,
Italian*, Japanese*, Korean*, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian*, Polish*,
Portuguese*, Russian*, Slovakian, Slovenian, Spanish*, Swedish*,
Turkish.
Note: The languages marked with an "*" were already available in the
Language dataset "LNG_5300_R1.93C1".
• Browser interface for operator: Menu “Operator Tools” allows viewing

of print jobs currently in the print queue.
Username / Password: operator / operator (case sensitive!).
• Backside printing recognition: The printer checks when the film arrives
at the CDM, whether a small rectangle in the center of the film, at the
very beginning of the printable area, has Dmax.
In case the density is below a certain threshold, the film must be inserted
wrong. The printer stops printing, informs the user of back-side printing,
to check the correct positioning of the film and to remove the film jam.
• No film calibration for RF Tag overruled printing: In case the RF tag

is missing, it is possible to configure the printer in the Service Menu for
"printing with Dmax = 2.00" or "printing not possible". In case it is
configured for "printing with Dmax = 2.00" and the automatic film
calibration after n film packs (n = 1 to 99) is switched on, the automatic
calibration is disabled for a film pack with missing RF tag.
• RF tag order-number tracking at auto film-calibration: The RF tag

contains the order-number of the film. When auto film-calibration is
enabled and set to n >1 film packs (I.e. between 2 and 99) there will also
be calibrated when the order-number changes.
• Logical printers are shown in key-operator menu now: In key-

operator menu "Show settings - 5 Logical printers" it is displayed,
whether more than one logical printer is configured.

5.2 New Features concerning Service
• Film info area on film adapted: The amount and format of the displayed
microtext data has changed (e.g. TMML info added). For more details
refer to the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E
• Batch tools to adjust network parameters:

Via commands "setip <IP address>" and "setsubnetmask <subnetmask>"
it is possible to adapt the IP address and subnetmask on terminal level.
This allows adapting the IP address of the printer right after switch on.
• Information in infocounter extended: The infocounter is extended with

info about Startup/Shutdown History (9.0 Startup/Shutdown History).
Now each CDM calibration is logged in the infocounter section 3.5
Calibration History.
• Infocounter "FilmType Change History" is emptied with SW

upgrade: Because of many wrong entries in the past, the "FilmType
Change History" is emptied with SW upgrade
• Service Engineer Tool "Reset Calibration Data" added to the

browser pages: It is possible now to overwrite the TH calibration, film
calibration and CDM calibration files by default values.
• Maintenance action "Replace film input pickup rollers" removed:

The previous message "M4" with meaning to replace the pickup rollers is
removed.
• Automatic serial number entry after Emergency SW Installation: In

previous SW versions the serial number was lost, in case it was selected
not to preserve the configuration data. In this case the serial number only
could be get back again by restore of the backup.
• Software for Regular and Emergency SW Installation can be stored

on the same CF card:
When the printer boots up with the SW CF card, the user will be asked at
the local keypad "Install Emergency SW yes / no". After canceling it is still
possible to perform a regular SW upgrade via local keypad.
• MOD07 (Vilis/Themis/RAM) split up in 3 modules: MOD07 Vilis;

MOD14 Themis; MOD15 RAM::
To support exchange of Themis and RAM module, the previous MOD 07
(Vilis/Themis/RAM) is split up in 3 modules: MOD07 Vilis; MOD14
Themis; MOD15 RAM. Refer to latest spare parts list.


5.3 New Features concerning Connectivity

• DICOM conformance level behavior implemented: Two printer
information levels can be defined via host profile:
0 (default) = No warnings are returned. Only 'Failure' status codes are
activated. This means, that the printer either returns 'normal' or 'failure'
(e.g. if printer is offline or film magazine is empty) to the modality.
1 = Warnings are returned. Refer to DICOM conformance status of the
Drystar 5300 and the host system. If the host system does not support
'status level' 1, set this parameter to default (= 0).
• Number of OEM LUTs extended: All LUTs named between oem900.txt

till oem999.txt which are available in directory C:\oemlut are displayed in
the drop down list in the host profile. Before only one "handmade" OEM
LUT named oem999.txt could be used.
• Host profile Parameter 'LR-Like printing' introduced: While

comparing images processed with the new thermal model and images
printed with the LR5200 it showed, that the images of the LR still looked
slightly different, despite the sharpness was comparable.
Investigations of the linearity of the Laser Imager showed, that the
LR5200 does not behave exactly as linear as a Drystar does:
To get at Drystars with the new thermal model the same image
impression as on the LR5200, an additional LUT has to be applied, to get
the same "Non-linearity" as the Laser Imager. This LUT is applied before
the specified taste LUT (Kanamori, Kanamori_like etc.) is applied.
Default: off. Possible settings: Off, low, medium, high.
Recommended setting to get the same image impression like on LR: low.
• Host profile Parameter 'Print even if application type not supported'

introduced: This parameter defines, whether a print job should be
printed, even if no Mammo film is available. Default: No.
This parameter prevents that a Mammo modality sends images to the
printer, which only has CR/DR films loaded.
• Last received DICOM attribute in host profile shown: In the DICOM

hostprofile editor there is a button to view the last received attributes from
a configured modality. In previous SW versions it showed the last used
attributes instead of the last received attributes.
• Disabled input tray is reported to host modality: A tray is disabled

o when there is an electrical defect detected in the tray,
o in case of invalid or unreadable RF tag,
o in case more than the allowed number of copies is printed with the
tag in the input tray
o when there is no RF tag in the tray.
A disabled tray is not set available for print-jobs now.

5.4 Improvements concerning Reliability
• Improved RF-tag header reading Added a new retry mechanism in the

RF tag reader. This results in less failures on reading RF tag’s
• Support of ISO RF tags: The printer is able now to read the tags via
I*code2 (ISO15693) compatible protocols what is a standard protocol.
5.5 Improvements concerning Image Quality
• Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model:

The thermal model is a mathematical description of the interaction Film –
TH. The thermal model uses parameters like film thickness, thermal
conductivity of the film, TH temperature; environmental temperature, print
speed and resolution of the print head.
The new thermal model TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; R&D name
of the product Æ marketing published it under 'A # Sharp') describes this
interaction more accurate, leading to a very precise reproduction of the
image. It does not use new parameters for calculating.
The image looks much sharper now, and has the image quality of a
Laser Imager. For more info refer to the HealthCare Newsletter
"Innovation at work: A#sharp" vailable on MEDNET, HealthCare Library.


5.6 Improvements concerning Printer Handling
• Job recovery improved: A print job is recovered in following cases after

it has been stored in RAM:
o unauthorized opening of the tray
o unauthorized opening of the printer's top cover
o film jam during printing
Before recovered print jobs were printed in order "Last received - first
printed". Now they are printed in order "First received – First printed".
5.7 Limitations
• Internal memory (Compact Flash) ≥ 128 Mb required (128 MB = default)
• RAM ≥ 512 Mb required (512 MB = default; Optional 1 GB)
• Only one module/spare part replacement per start-up allowed
• Only Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher is usable as remote browser
application;
• Proxy server settings have to be disabled when using the remote browser
application (Tools - internet options - tab “connections” – button “LAN
settings)
5.8 Known Software Problems
• Some eLabels can get corrupt when disconnecting the P1-connector

before or during the start-up procedure, HW redesign of power-connector
is needed for solving this problem.
• Back-up dataset made by 2.0.0 release are not compatible with 1.9.0 and
1.8.0 release
• Back-up dataset made by 1.9.0 or 1.8.0 release are not compatible with
2.0.0 release
• Error HC214025 indicates falsely to replace MOD07 (Vilis). Correct is to
replace MOD14 (Themis).
• Error HC215020 indicates falsely as reason "Themis defect". Correct is
"RAM defect".

6 Appendix
The Appendix contains following information:

Topic Refer to
How to connect to the Drystar 5300 web pages 6.1
How to adapt the PC IP address 6.2
Software Upgrade via Browser 6.3
Emergency Software Upgrade 6.4
Basic Image Adjustments Overview 6.5
6.1 Connection to the Web Pages

network Service PC
Explorer ≥ 5)
In case the printer homepage is
not displayed, refer to 6.2
"Adaptation of the PC IP address" 536532el.cdr
next page.
Figure 5
As an alternative, if it is not possible
to put the Service PC into the hospital Service PC
network:
(1) Use a crossed network UTP cable
to connect the network interface
of the Service PC directly with the
network interface of the printer. Crossed
(2) Start the browser (Internet network
536532ek.cdr
cable
Explorer ≥ 5)
(3) Enter the IP address of the printer Figure 6
in the address window. In case
the printer homepage is not
displayed, refer to 6.2 "Adaptation
of the PC IP address" next page.


6.2 Adaptation of the PC IP address

To connect the printer and the Service PC via network, usually the IP
address of the Service PC has to be adapted.
Basic rules:
Case 1: The service PC is part of the hospital network.

(1) Get the IP address and possibly the subnet mask* (* see next page) for
the Service PC from the hospital network administrator. In case the
hospital network administrator wants to have the Service PC working only
in a subnet, get from him the netmask (also called subnet mask).
(2) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 7 to Figure 10.
Case 2: The service PC is not part of the hospital network, but connected
via crossed UTP network cable to the printer.
(1) Look up the printer IP address and subnet mask in the printer key
operator menu "1 Show settings - 3 Network (DICOM)".
(2) Define an IP address for the Service PC by adding or subtracting "1" to
the last digit of the IP address.
Example: Printer IP address = 10.6.5.121
Service PC address = 10.6.5.122 or 10.6.5.120
(3) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 7 to Figure 10.
Figure 7 Figure 8

*Default Subnet Masks (set for NO sub netting)
Class First 3 digits of IP Subnet mask

A 0...127 255.0.0.0
B 128...191 255.255.0.0
C 192...223 255.255.255.0
Figure 9 Figure 10


6.3 Software Upgrade via Browser

(1) Connect the Service PC into Drystar 5300 Homepage
0 min.
network. Possibly adapt the IP - Service Engineer Tools
address of the service PC. - Enter Service Command Session
- 9 Installation
Refer to 6.2. - 1 New Software Installation
(2) Enter the printer IP address in - 1 OK, make backup
- 2 To remote computer
the browser address window
(3) Select ‘Service Engineer Tools’ 0 min.
Welcome to this
(4) Enter username ‘mega’ and
password ‘******’ Service - Installation
(5) Select ‘Enter Service Command
Session’ Choose Dataset Browse .....
(6) Select ‘9 Installation - 1 New Proceed Go Back Reset Values

Software Installation - 1 OK
make backup - 2 To remote
computer (allows to save the Browse for file
backup on the service PC) - SWR_DRYSTAR5300_Agfa_R2.0.0_C1.zip
Browse’ 2 min.
Welcome to this
(7) Choose file DryStar 5300 printer
‘SWR_DRYSTAR5300_Agfa_R
Service - Installation
2.0.0_C1.zip’.
(8) Select ‘Proceed’. Install software:
45%
The different browser screens
are shown in Figure 11. 4 min.
Welcome to this
(9) Select 'Continue' to reboot the DryStar 5300 printer
printer.
Service - Installation
(10) Wait till the printer shows the
New settings
Ready screen. This takes will be active
approx. 24 minutes. Refer to after automatic
reset of the printer
section 3.1. Continue
5365_enc_401.cdr
Figure 11

6.4 Emergency Software Upgrade
Purpose This section describes the SW Installation on a printer in

ERROR - SYSTEM FAILURE state.
Important remark:
The software installation procedure
described here formats the internal
CF card.
If you select "NO" at question "Do Emergency SW FOUND
you want to preserve config" the ON EXTERNAL CF-card
Install emergency
configuration data will be erased. SW? YES (V) NO (X)
In this case the printer is only in the
same state than before after the
emergency SW upgrade, if an up- Emergency SW Install
to-date backup is available. Do you want
to preserve config?
If the backup CF card is lost or not YES (V) NO (X)
readable the complete printer setup 536632gc.cdr
has to be redone.
Figure 12
SW Installation (1) Insert the CF card with Software

on printer in 2.0.0_C1 in the Service PC CF
"Error - card reader
System (2) Copy the content of directory
Failure" State \emergency_install to the root of
the CF card
(3) Insert the CF card in the printer
CF card reader
(4) Reboot the printer
(5) At question "Do you want to
preserve config?" select :
• "NO" to erase the complete
configuration
• "YES" to keep the current
configuration. 536532ac.cdr
Refer to Figure 12.
(6) Reboot the printer when Figure 13
requested.
(7) Wait till the printer shows the
Ready screen. This takes approx.
24 minutes. Refer to section 3.1.


Caution:
• Some boards get re-programmed during the software upgrade.
message
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation to preserve the

configuration following steps are executed internally:
1. A backup of the printer configuration data is created and copied to
RAM
2. The software is copied from external CF card to internal CF card and
inflated.
3. The boards are programmed.
4. The backup is restored from RAM.
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation not to preserve the
configuration the configuration data are erased. The printer in this case is in
the same state like it has been shipped from factory
(default IP address 169.254.10.10)

6.5 Basic Image Adjustments Overview
Step 1: Get up-to-date Connectivity Release Document

from MedNet, HealthCare Library
Path: General Info Connectivity & Application

Perform image adjustments as described at the Modality
and/or the Printer
Continue with Step 2, in case
the customer is not satisfied with the image or
for this modality no Connectivity Release Document exists
In case the printer is part of a solution (e.g. DR Mammography

Solution), refer to the solution specific requirements
concerning image adjustments.
Step 2: Try to adjust Contrast and Sharpness at the Modality
1
Contrast Use Kanamori Taste LUT
Adjustment If available also Dmax
Cubic High Res + smoothfactor 2

Sharpness (modality sends in image mode) or
Adjustment
Cubic Bell + smoothfactor 2
(modality sends in page mode)
Interpolation Smooth Factors (DICOM values)3

299 251 245 235

200
Cubic Bell
199 148 143 138 101

Cubic High Res
Legend
Limits
Default
1
251 245 235
299 200 2
3
Useable values Refer to note 3 next page 5365_enc_900.cdr


Contrast and Sharpness adjustment at the Modality
1 The Look-Up-Table, which is responsible (in combination with Dmin and

Dmax) for the contrast of the image, may be named at the modality
Taste LUT
Perception LUT
Correction LUT
Presentation LUT 536401gh.cdr
In case of "Presentation LUT" selection,

also enter lightbox illumination
and reflected ambient light.
2 Autoswitch to cubic bell functionality of the printer:

When no image scaling (i.e. magnification or reduction) is required,
Cubic HighRes interpolation type does not sharpen the image.
Interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' sharpnes the image however,
independant whether scaling is required or not.
This automatic adjustment is only used, in case the Interpolation Type
is adjusted to 'cubic high res' in the user profile (= default).
HOME HELP Controller Setup
Access to this window:
Reduction icon on image: yes
Browser Pages
Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes:
Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes Service Tools

Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.9 ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
Scaling Setup
3 At printers with Software < SW Rel. 2 the required interpolation

smoothfactor setting at the modality is different compared
to printers with Software > SW Rel. 2.

299 221 217 207

200
Cubic Bell
199 135 125 115 101

Cubic High Res

Step 3: In case Contrast and Sharpness adjustment

at the Modality not possible, adjust it at printer.
Can be made via
local keypad 1
Service Engineer Browser pages 2
1 Contrast and Sharpness adjustment

via key-operator menu "Image Quality"
Access via Keypad or Browser
Key-Operator Menu
2 Change Settings
5 Image Quality
Kanamori
Linear
Contrast *
<select Modality>
Kanamori_like
Adjustment
2 Select Other Cubic Bell
Cubic High Res
Linear
1 Look up table Replication
2 Interpolation 2.80 - 3.20
Sharpness* (2.80 - 3.80
3 Dmax
Adjustment Mammo printers)
2 Contrast and Sharpness Adjustment

via DICOM Host Profile
Access via Browser only
HELP Host Profile: Name XYZ
These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host
(modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'.
The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input.
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side.
Nick Name: Name XYZ
Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE
Use this profile only for local SCP server: all
Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change
Sharpness*
Adjustment Kernel: site Edit Custom
Perception LUT: kanamori

Kanamori Like value:
Custom value:
*
Contrast Maximum Density (OD x 100) site 300
Adjustment LR like: off
OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input

Manually customized items are show in red
536401gh.cdr
*Refer to notes next page


Contrast and Sharpness adjustment at the printer
Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values)

5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1

Cubic Bell
4.9 -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 -4.9

Cubic High Res
At printers with Software < SW Rel. 2 the interpolation smoothfactor

Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel Values)
0.5 0.35 0.15 0.1

5.9
Cubic Bell
4.9 -1.7 -2.5 -3.3 -4.9

Cubic High Res
Perception LUT / Look up table settings at the Printer
Dmax
Kanamori curve and
Kanamori like value
220 Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori
200 Kanamori_like 200 = linear
100
Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic
mori 75
Kana
Dmin Input
0 255
For more details refer to the

Hardcopy Application Manual on MEDNET, GSO Library
Legend
Limits
Default
4.9 -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 -4.9
Useable values
536401gh.cdr

Copyright © 01.2006 DD+DIS350.05E Agfa-Gevaert AG
Alle Rechte vorbehalten / All rights reserved / Tous droits réservés
Herausgegeben von / Published by / Edité par
Agfa-Gevaert AG
Fototechnik
D - 81539 München
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten

Technical modifications reserved
Sous réserve des modifications techniques
AGFA und der Agfa-Rhombus sind eingetragene Warenzeichen von Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trade marks of Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germay.
AGFA et le logo Agfa sont des marques déposées de Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany
Printed in Germany
Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE Manufacturing Standard
Imaging Services
Modifications
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365 / 100/200

This document provides an overview of all product modifications which may be of
importance for Service. They are listed in chronological sequence.
Edition. Release Changes:

Revision Date
1.0 05-2008 Initial version
Document Title
n.a. n.a.

eq_08_modifications_e_template_v07
DD+DIS148.08E Manufacturing Standard Modifications
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.


05-2008 Type 5365 / 100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
OVERVIEW OF MODIFICATIONS:
Timeline Modification Referenced Documents
2008
March Added Printer Software 2.1.1_C1 together with None
latest Software for DRYSTAR AXYS and
DRYSTAR 5302 to RoHS Spare Parts
February Changed Compact Flash Card 128 MB None
CM+343356.1 to 1 GB
2007
November Changed TPH Module CM+349264.2 None
September Changed Pickup Module CM+343331.2 • SB No. 11 DD+DIS292.07E
• Installation Instructions
DD+DIS174.07E
August Changed Input Block Module CM+343332.1 None
April Release of RoHS compliant Spare Parts None
April Release of RoHS compliant Printer / Introduction • SB No. 10 DD+DIS058.07E
of Software 2.1.0_C1
• Installation Instructions
software 2.1.0_C1
DD+DIS057.07E
March Changed TPH Module CM+349264.1 None
2006
November Reduction of Test Films as part of delivery from Installation Planning
100 to 25 Films DD+DIS348.05E
September Intruduction of RoHS compliant Power Supply None
Module
August Introduction of Heat Sink Replacement Kit as • Heatsink Kit Enclosure
Spare Part DD+DIS194.06E
• Troubleshooting Guide
DD+DIS210.07E
March Changed Ouput Module CM+343330.2 None
March Changed Display Module CM+3433361.1 None
February Introduction of Software Release 2.0.0_C1 • SB No. 09 DD+DIS058.06E
• Enclosure DD+DIS344.05E


Timeline Modification Referenced

Documents
2005
December Introduction of Thermal Print Head CM+349264.1 as Successor None
for Thermal Print Head CM+343334.1
October Changed Heatsink on Vilis/Themis/RAM Module CM+343335.9 None
and Themis Module CM+343365.1


1 Changed Heatsink on Vilis/Themis/RAM Module CM+343335.9

and Themis Module CM+343365.1
Reason Improved heat sink to prevent broken heat sinks on the

Themis CPU
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 3640 plus 3636, 3637, 3639 /

Serial October 2005
Number(s)
• Type 5365/200 SN ≥ 00327 / October 2005
Part • Vilis/Themis/RAM Module CM+343335.10
Number(s)
• Themis Module CM+343365.2
Referenced None
Document(s)
2 Introduction of Thermal Print Head CM+349264.1 as Successor

for Thermal Print Head CM+343334.1
Reason Harmonization for TPHs in DRYSTAR 5300 and DRYSTAR 5302
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 3921 plus 3871, 3885 to 3910 /

Serial December 2005
Number(s)
• Type 5365/200 SN ≥ 00380 plus 00368, 00371/
December 2005
Part Thermal Print Head CM+349264.1
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


3 Introduction of Software Release 2.0.0_C1
Reason Introduction of new thermal model “A#sharp” for improved image

sharpness
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 4105 plus 4098, 4102 / February 2006
Serial
Number(s) • Type 5365/200: software 2.0.0_C1 is not introduced
Part Sales Channel: Order number: ERA3Q

Number(s)
Spare Part Channel: Order number: CM+343357.0
Referenced • SB No. 09 DD+DIS058.06E
Document(s)
• Enclosure DD+DIS344.05E
4 Changed Display Module CM+3433361.1
Reason Improved connector to prevent that cable to display board can be

removed accidentally at mounting of right cover.
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 4235 / March 2006
Serial
Number(s) • Type 5365/200 SN ≥ 00559 / May 2006
Part Display Module CM+3433361.2

Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


5 Changed Ouput Module CM+343330.2
Reason Improvement of production process: Prevention of film jams during

CDM calibration in production.
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 4219 / March 2006
Serial
Number(s) • Type 5365/200 SN ≥ 00547 / March 2006
Part Output Module CM+343330.3

Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
6 Introduction of Heat Sink Replacement Kit as Spare Part
Reason To allow replacing heat sink at Themis CPU instead of replacing

the Themis CPU when the heat sink holder is broken.
Product(s) & Only introduced as spare part / August 2006
Serial
Number(s)
Part Heatsink Replacement Kit CM+346039.1
Number(s)
Referenced • Heatsink Kit Enclosure DD+DIS194.06E
Document(s)
• Troubleshooting Guide DD+DIS210.07E


7 Intruduction of RoHS compliant Power Supply Module
Reason Preparation of the printer for RoHS compliance.
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 4787 / September 2006

Serial
Number(s) • Type 5365/200: ROHS power supply is not introduced
Part Power Supply Module (RoHS) CM+343337.2

Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
8 Reduction of Test Films as part of delivery from 100 to 25 Films
Reason Cost reduction
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 4970 plus4967 / November 2006

Serial
Number(s) • Type 5365/200: Reduction of test films is not introduced
Part Not available as spare part

Number(s)
Referenced Installation Planning DD+DIS348.05E
Document(s)


9 Changed TPH Module CM+349264.1
Reason Improvement of production process: Heater foil was partly

detached.
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ SN ≥ 5178, 5154, 5157 to 5165 and
Serial 5168 to 5176 / March 2007
Number(s)
• Type 5365/200: Changed TPH module is not introduced
Part TPH Module CM+349264.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
10 Release of RoHS compliant Printer / Introduction of Software

2.1.0_C1
Reason Make printer compliant to the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous

Substances) Directive No 2002/95/EC of the European Union.
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ SN ≥ 5274 / April 2007
Serial
Number(s) • Type 5365/200 RoHS compliant printer / software 2.1.0_C1
is not introduced
Part • None
Number(s)
Document(s)
• Installation Instructions software 2.1.0_C1 DD+DIS057.07E


11 Release of RoHS compliant Spare Parts
Reason Make spare parts compliant to the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous

Substances) Directive No 2002/95/EC of the European Union.
Product(s) & April 2007
Serial
Number(s)
Part • Vilis 2.4 (RoHS) CM+343368.0
Number(s) • Themis7 (RoHS) CM+343369.0
• Vilis/Themis/RAM (RoHS) CM+343371.0
• 512 MB (RoHS) CM+343370.0
• 1 GB (RoHS) CM+343372.0
• Output Module (RoHS) CM+343373.0
Referenced SB No. 10 DD+DIS058.07E
Document(s)
12 Changed Input Block Module CM+343332.1
Reason Make tag reader compatible to be used in DRYSTAR 5503, too.
Product(s) & August 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part Input Block Module CM+343332.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


13 Changed Pickup Module CM+343331.2
Reason Improvement of film run
Product(s) & • Type 5365/100 SN ≥ 5711 / September 2007

Serial
Number(s) • Type 5365//200 Changed pickup module is not introduced
Part Pickup Module CM+343331.3

Number(s)
Document(s)
• Installation Instructions DD+DIS174.07E
14 Changed TPH Module CM+349264.2
Reason Improvement of production process: Improved ground connection

to reduce pixel drops
Product(s) & Serial number not registered / November 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part TPH Module CM+349264.3
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


15 Changed Compact Flash Card 128 MB CM+343356.1 to 1 GB
Reason Change of type of compact flash card for printer backup due to
purchasing reasons.
Product(s) & Printers and spare parts delivered as of February 2008

Serial
Number(s)
Part Compact Flash Card 1 GB, CM+343356.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
16 Added Printer Software 2.1.1_C1 together with latest Software

for DRYSTAR AXYS and DRYSTAR 5302 to RoHS Spare Parts
Reason Harmonisation of software CDs for RoHS spare parts for

DRYSTAR 5300, DRYSTAR 5302 and DRYSTAR AXYS.
Product(s) & Spare parts listed below delivered as of March 2008

Serial
Number(s)
Part • VILIS 2.4 (ROHS CM+343368.1.
Number(s)
• THEMIS 7 W/O RAM (RoHS) CM+343369.3
• 512Mb RAM MODULE (RoHS) CM+343370.3
• VILIS/THEMIS/RAM MODULE (RoHS) CM+343371.1
• 1GB RAM MODULE (RoHS) CM+343372.1
• OUTPUT MODULE (RoHS) CM+343373.1
Referenced None
Document(s)


HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation
Order-No.: DD+DIS271.05E
*16BNAJ1*
1 Piece 6BNAJ MA1
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365/100
The Maintenance document is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS271.05E


Maintenance DD+DIS271.05E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
1. Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation,
repair or maintenance task on the equipment.
2. Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety
Directions" and on the product.

Chapter 9 DRYSTAR 5300 Edition 1, Revision 11
DD+DIS271.05E Maintenance
Chapter 9:
List of contents
1 Safety ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Security Precautions.............................................................................................. 3
2 Introduction ................................................................................................. 4
2.1 Maintenance Frequency ........................................................................................ 4
2.2 Required Time ........................................................................................................ 4
2.3 Required Tools ....................................................................................................... 4
2.4 Required Cleaning Material ................................................................................... 5
2.5 Required Spare Parts............................................................................................. 5
3 Diagnostics.................................................................................................. 6
3.1 Questioning of the Customer ................................................................................ 6
3.2 Infocounter Analysis.............................................................................................. 6
3.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report ............................................. 7
3.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command Session ............................................... 8
3.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter............................................................................... 8
3.3 Image Quality Check ............................................................................................ 10
4 Maintenance Points - Power off............................................................... 11

4.1 Check of general Condition................................................................................. 11
4.2 Check of Condition of Belts and Gears.............................................................. 11
4.3 Visual Check of the Cables ................................................................................. 11
4.4 Replacement of the Air Filter Module ................................................................. 12
4.5 Cleaning of Electronics Compartment ............................................................... 12
4.6 Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet..................................................................... 12
4.7 Check and Cleaning of Drum .............................................................................. 13
4.8 Check of Guide Pin Screws at Thermal Print Head........................................... 13
4.9 Cleaning of Thermal Print Head.......................................................................... 14
4.10 Electrical Check.................................................................................................... 15
4.10.1 Electrical Check according to National Regulations. .............................................. 15
4.10.2 Basic Protective Earth Test .................................................................................... 15

5 Maintenance points - Power on ............................................................... 17

5.1 Check of Safety Switch ........................................................................................17
5.2 SW patch installation............................................................................................17
5.3 Film Calibration.....................................................................................................18
5.4 Density Reproduction Check...............................................................................18
5.5 Test Image Evaluation ..........................................................................................20
5.6 Host System Image Quality Check......................................................................21
6 Completion of the Maintenance............................................................... 22

6.1 Backup Data on CF Card......................................................................................22
6.2 Reset of Maintenance Action Counters and relative Counters in the
Infocounter ............................................................................................................23
6.3 Customer Conversation .......................................................................................23

Chapter 9 / II DRYSTAR 5300 Edition 1, Revision 11
1 Safety
1.1 Safety Precautions
NOTE:
The Drystar 5300 must only be operated according to its specifications and
its intended use. Any operation not corresponding to the specifications or
intended use may result in hazards, which in turn may lead to serious injuries
or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks). AGFA will not assume any
liability whatsoever in these cases.
NOTE:
All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which
could be mixed up with diagnostic relevant information. If there is any doubt
that the diagnostic information could not be absolutely true, additional
investigations must be performed to get a clear diagnostic.
When operating or maintaining the Drystar 5300, always observe the following
safety guidelines:
• Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by qualified personnel only!
• Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features.
• Ventilation openings should not be covered.
• Always switch off the Drystar 5300 and disconnect the power cord from the
outlet before carrying out any maintenance work.
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the printer: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
NOTE:
Film jam removal or cleaning the printer thermal head can be done without
switching the power off. Nevertheless, care should be taken and the
following instructions should be respected:
Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside of
the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is given
below.

Safety warning, indicating that the DRYSTAR 5300 User and

Reference Manuals should be consulted before making any
connections to other equipment. The use of accessory equipment
not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
printer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
system. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory
equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment
has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC
60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-2 harmonized national standard.
In addition, all configurations must comply with the medical
electrical systems standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes
the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible
for complying with the systems' standard. If required contact your
Agfa Service Organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any
covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the Thermal Print Head.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the DRYSTAR 5300 complies within the limits for
type B equipment.
Supplementary protective earth connector:
Provides a connection between the DRYSTAR 5300 and the
potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found in
medical environments. This plug should never be unplugged
before the power is turned off and the power plug has been
removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the printer and other equipment
which might exhibit minor ground potential differences. These
differences may degrade the quality of communication between
different equipment. Never remove connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground):
Provides a connection between the printer and the protective
earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because this
will have a negative influence on the leakage current.
Power/Reset Button:
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall
outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.

Precautions for use in USA only:

Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the
printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a
120 V/60 Hz source.
Transport after installation

Before moving the printer, always switch off the machine. The DRYSTAR
5300 should always be transported by 2 persons. When doing this, the
stability and the structure of the table top have to be taken into account. The
printer should not be placed on a soft surface, since this might prevent
appropriate ventilation and cause overheating. Nothing else should be
installed on the same table, and measures should be taken to prevent table
shock, while this may cause image artifacts. The appliance shall only be
transported with all covers closed. The appliance shall not be transported
continuously from one location to the other. Do not lift the printer by the
output tray.
Waste disposal and environmental regulations

This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or
on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as
household waste.
Instead it shall be handled over to the applicable collection point for the
recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. For more detailed
information about take-back and recycling of this product, please contact
your local Agfa service organization.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health,
which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this
product. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. If
your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accumulators please
dispose these separately according to your local requirements.
1.2 Security Precautions
CAUTION:
(U.S.A. only): In accordance with U.S. Law, this device can only be sold to
or ordered by a licensed physician.
CAUTION:
Printed images should be treated as patient records and should only be
viewed by authorized personnel.
CAUTION:
It is good practice not to delete images from the modality, until they are
correctly printed.

2 Introduction
NOTE:
The maintenance steps described in this document are based on the
technically required measures to guarantee the proper operation of the
printer.
The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable
order to make the work routines as efficient as possible. The sequence of the
maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is identical with the
maintenance instructions.
Additional maintenance steps can be required according to national
regulations.
2.1 Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• every 25.000 printed films, or
• every 12 months, whichever comes first.
2.2 Required Time
• Time required for the maintenance: ≤ 2 hours,
2.3 Required Tools
Description Order Number / Comment

Calibrated densitometer recommended types are
• MacBeth TR-924
• X-Rite 301
• X-Rite 310
• X-Rite 331
• X-Rite 341
• Gretag D200-2
Flash light commercially available
Loupe 8x CM+9.9579.9904.0
Service PC with Density For Service PC specifications refer to chapter
Reproduction Check Exel 3.2, Tools.
Sheet The Density Reproduction Check Exel Sheet is
available via MEDNET, GSO Library:
Hardcopy => General Hardcopy Info => General
Services Info => Application Info
Waterproof pen commercially available
Wrist strap CM+9.9999.0830.0

2.4 Required Cleaning Material
Cleaning material Order Number

Agfa Cleaning Tissue (as alternative to CM+309931.0
Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol and Lint
free cloth). Box of 50 pieces.
or
Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol Commercially available
Lint free cloth Commercially available
Ink eraser 'Pelikan' 10+9.9999.1176.0
Vacuum cleaner
220/240V, 50Hz CM+9.9999.0895.0
110/115V, 60Hz CM+9.9999.0896.0
2.5 Required Spare Parts
The following spare parts are part of the Maintenance-assortment

CM+0 5365 0999 733
Description Order Number Case of Exchange/ Usage
Air Filter CM+343350.X Exchange each maintenance
NOTE:
Always have the latest Drystar 5300 software patches available on the
Service PC. They can be downloaded from MEDNET, GSO Library.
Depending of the urgency and classification of a software patch it might be
necessary to update the printer software.

3 Diagnostics
The diagnostics before the maintenance comprise following tasks:
Task Details see..
Questioning of the Customer 3.1
Infocounter Analysis 3.2
Image Quality Check 3.3
3.1 Questioning of the Customer

• Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last
maintenance.
3.2 Infocounter Analysis

To view the infocounter a service PC is required.
Two possibilities exist to get the infocounter on the Service PC
(see also Figure 1)
Type of Infocounter analysis: Refer to ...

A Via Printers Infocounters Report 3.2.1
B Via Service Command session 3.2.2
NOTE:
We recommend to use for Infocounter Analysis method A, 'Via Printers
Infocounters Report', as this is the fastest way to access the infocounter.
Method B, 'Via Service Command session ' might be useful, when you can
access a PC in the hospital network for a short time, to save the infocounter
file on the printer CF card for analysis on the Service PC.

Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
List of errors
A Printer Infocounters report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session B
Scalingtools
Connectivity Setup
7 Service Actions Welcome to this
LPD Profile Editor
5 Logging Printqueue editor
Service - Loggings
Controller logging
2. Infocounters
1. To printer flash card
Modules
2. To this computer
Module repair
Go back
536509cf.cdr
Figure 1
3.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report

Required Tools
• Service PC, required to connect to the printer and analyze the infocounter.

network Service PC
Explorer ≥ 5)
Tools - Printer Infocounters
Report" 536532el.cdr
(5) Analyze the infocounter file as

described in section 3.2.3, Figure 2

3.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command Session
Required Tools
• Service PC, required to connect to the printer and analyze the infocounter

network Service PC
Explorer ≥ 5)
Tools - Enter Service Command
Session - 7 Service Actions - 5 536532el.cdr
Logging - 2 Infocounters"
(5) Save the infocounter file to the Figure 3
service PC or the CF card.
(6) Unzip the infocounters ZIP file
(7) Analyze the infocounter.txt file
as described in section 3.2.3,
3.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter
infocounter
1.1 Serial number and Compare device serial number with chapter 8
Installation date ‘Manufacturing Standard Modification’ to
determine whether the device possibly requires a
modification.
Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), ‘HW Modification
History’, to check already made modifications.
1.4 Software Info Compare the currently installed SW version with
the latest SW version described in chapter 3.8,
SW releases, patches. In case a recommended
SW patch is available, install this SW patch (This
is done during step "SW patch installation",
section 5.2).

infocounter
2.3 Reliability Should normally be not higher than 0.05. Higher
fault rates need a thorough investigation.
3.3 Hardware Modification By comparing the status of the device with the
History available modifications (refer to Technical
Documentation chapter 8) the exact hardware
status can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it
history can be determined, whether a recent software
upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite
often in the error list in the past
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints)
have to be investigated: They may reduce the
throughput of the device.
5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the last days,
how often they appeared as well as the CBF
(cycles between failures) of these errors. This
gives an overview of the current status of the
machine.
5.8 Error list (sorted by Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the
relative) and technical documentation, chapter 3.3,
‘Troubleshooting’.
5.9 Error list (sorted by
total):

3.3 Image Quality Check
(1) In the browser pages select menu

"Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Print Testimage"
(2) Print following test images on the
largest format available in the film
magazines:
• STI1.ZIP
• STI2.ZIP
• medical_image.ZIP
The test image as displayed

in Figure 4 to Figure 6 will be
printed.
(3) Mark the test films with a

waterproof pen as testfilm before Figure 4: STI1.ZIP
maintenance
Figure 5: STI2.ZIP Figure 6: medical_image.ZIP

4 Maintenance Points - Power off

The maintenance with powered-off machine comprises following tasks:
Task Details: see...

Check of general Condition 4.1
Check of Condition of Belts and Gears 4.2
Visual Check of the Cables 4.3
Replacement of the Air Filter Module 4.4
Cleaning of Electronics 4.5
Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet 4.6
Check and Cleaning of Drum 4.7
Check of Guide Pin Screws at Thermal Print Head 4.8
Cleaning of Thermal Print Head 4.9
Electrical Check 4.10
4.1 Check of general Condition

(1) Perform a visual check of
• Power- and network cables.
• Covers
• The Output tray
• The Input tray.
(2) Disconnect the power and network cable
(3) Remove the left and right cover to prepare the printer for the next steps
(4) Remove the films in the film tray including white plastic sheet
4.2 Check of Condition of Belts and Gears

(1) Check all belts and gears for visible wear
4.3 Visual Check of the Cables

(1) Check cables inside the printer: The insulation may not show any sign of
wear or damage.

4.4 Replacement of the Air Filter Module

(1) Open the top cover
(2) Remove the four screws at the air
filter module.
(3) Remove the filter module. See
important note below.
(4) Insert the new air filter module
(5) Fasten the four screws
(6) Close top cover
Figure 7
IMPORTANT:
Take care that no dust falls into the printer when removing the filter module.
4.5 Cleaning of Electronics Compartment

(1) Remove the EMI shielding
(2) Clean the electronics
compartment with a vacuum
cleaner.
536509bv.cdr
Figure 8
4.6 Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet

(1) Clean the power supply air inlet
with a vacuum cleaner.
536509bu.cdr
Figure 9

4.7 Check and Cleaning of Drum

(1) Open the top cover
(2) Open the "Hold down bracket"
(3) Open the TH Module
(4) Remove the flat belt
(5) Check the drum for dirt or
damage by turning at the drum
drive pulley.
(6) In case signs of damage are
visible, also check the STI2 test
image printed under step "3.3
Image Quality Check": A damage
will be visible in the flatfield area
of the STI2 test image in distance
536509bt.cdr
of 111 mm.
(7) Clean the rubber of the drum with Figure 10
a lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol
(8) Remount the flat belt
4.8 Check of Guide Pin Screws at Thermal Print Head

(1) Check the screws of the guide
pins.
At printers with SN ≤ 1715 they
can be loose, leading to slightly
lighter areas at one edge of the
film.
536509bx.cdr
Figure 11

4.9 Cleaning of Thermal Print Head

(1) Clean the TH resistor line with a
lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl - alcohol or a
cleaning tissue.
• The last cleaning action must
be carried out in one way!
• For the Isopropyl alcohol
observe the rule: As less water
is in the alcohol as better. We
recommend using a 90%
Isopropyl alcohol.
(2) Remount all covers Figure 12
(3) Insert both input trays
CAUTION:
The electronic circuits under the IC cover can be damaged.
During cleaning do not press against the IC cover.
Only use very little alcohol to moisten the cloth.

4.10 Electrical Check

The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Details see..
1 Perform the electrical check according to 4.10.1
National Regulations.
2 Perform the basic protective earth test 4.10.2
4.10.1 Electrical Check according to National Regulations.

(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
NOTE:
The electrical checks that have to be performed in certain intervals (e.g. each
12 months) or after certain service actions (repair and/or maintenance)
depend on National Regulations.
Example for Germany: BGV A3 and DIN VDE 0751 or subsequent
regulations.
4.10.2 Basic Protective Earth Test

Only perform the "basic protective
eart test" described here if the
national regulations do not
prescribe an electrical check.
(1) Use a multimeter that is

capable to measure a
resistance < 1 Ohm 536509ba.cdr
(2) Put one probe at the ground

connector of the mains input
(3) Put the other probe at a few
metallic parts, the customer
could touch.
The electrical resistance has to 2
be ≤ 0.2 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 13.
Figure 13

(4) Insert the power cord at the

printer side; leave it
disconnected at the wall side.
(5) Put one probe at the ground
connector of the mains
connector.
(6) Put the other probe at a few 536531jk.cdr
metallic parts, the customer
could touch.
The electrical resistance in this
case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 14.
Figure 14
IMPORTANT:
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2
Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the printer for
loose grounding connections!

5 Maintenance points - Power on

The maintenance with powered-on machine comprises following tasks:
Task Details: see...

Check of Safety Switch 5.1
SW patch installation 5.2
Film Calibration 5.3
Density Reproduction Check 5.4
Test Image Evaluation 5.5
Host System Image Quality Check 5.6
5.1 Check of Safety Switch

(1) Switch on the printer. Wait till it
shows the READY screen (takes
Safety Switch
approx. 5 minutes)
(2) Open top cover
(3) Check display message: It must
show "Please close top cover"
536509ck.cdr
OPEN TOP COVER

Please close
Top Cover
Figure 15
5.2 SW patch installation

(1) Install the latest SW patch, in case a recommended SW patch for the
printer is available. Refer to chapter 3.8, Software Releases, Patches.


How? (1) Select in key-operator menu
Calibration'
display.
536336as.cdr
Figure 16
5.4 Density Reproduction Check
Background With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type
Information between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the
printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked.
This is a plausibility check for the CDM: In case the measured density values
are out of the specified range, the CDM requires a re-calibration.
This procedure must be carried out with every used film type:
(1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print Testimage"
(2) Print out LinCheck.zip and measure the density of the eleven 100 % –
0% fields with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite
301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
(3) To check linearity fill in the measured values in the corresponding
Density Reproduction Check Excel Sheet:
- Page "DS5300 DT2B" for DT2B films (B = Blue base film)
- Page "DS5300 DT2C" for DT2C films (C = Clear base film)
This Excel sheet can be downloaded from MedNet, GSO Library:
Hardcopy => General Hardcopy Info => General Services Info =>
Application Info '.

(4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is
calculated automatically.
(5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density
Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to
carry out a CDM calibration.
Select densitometer: X-rite 341

4 Dmax = 314
Square Measured density Target density Density diff. Check

100% 20 20 0 0
90% 47 49,4 -2,4 0
80% 73 78,8 -5,8 0
70% 104 108,2 -4,2 0
60% 133 137,6 -4,6 0
Density Reproduction = OK
50%
40%
163
189
167
196,4
-4
-7,4
0
0
No CDM calibration needed for DT2B film
30% 218 225,8 -7,8 0
20% 246 255,2 -9,2 0
10% 274 284,6 -10,6 0
0% 306 314 -8 0
When entering the measured density values the decimal point appears in a different spot,
e.g. measured value = 0.23, value to enter = 23.0
Density Lower limit Upper limit
0 0 0 Density difference LinCheck image DT2B film in Ds 5302
30 -5 5
45 -7 7
20
60 -8 8
75 -9 9 15
90 -10 10 X-rite 310
105 -11 11 10 X-rite 331
Density Difference
120 -12 12 X-rite 341

135 -12 12 5
X-rite 301 Lower limit
150 -13 13 Mac Beth TR924
0 Upper limit
165 -13 13 Gretag D200-2
180 -14 14 Density difference
-5
195 -14 14
210 -14 14 -10
225 -15 15
240 -15 15 -15
255 -15 15
-20
270 -16 16
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
285 -16 16
300 -16 16 Target Density
315 -16 16
536609af.cdr
Figure 17
NOTE:
The measured density values have to be entered without decimal point. (e.g.
measured value = .23, value to enter = 23)

5.5 Test Image Evaluation
(1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print Testimage".
(2) Print following test images on the largest format available in the film
trays:
• STI1.ZIP
• STI2.ZIP
• medical_image.ZIP
(3) Mark the test films with a waterproof pen as testfilms after maintenance
(4) Check all three images at the lightbox. Following items must been
checked:
o Line artifacts in transport direction
o Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction
o Point artifacts
o Surface artifacts
(5) Evaluate the test images at follows:

1. If no artifacts are seen on the STI1 / STI2 image continue with
step (6)
2. If artifacts seen on STI1 / STI2 image aren’t visible on the
medical_image continue with step (6).
3. In other case (i.e. artifacts which are visible in STI1 / STI2 are
visible on medical_image, too) refer to Technical Documentation
chapter "3.3 Troubleshooting”
(6) Compare the test images "after maintenance" with the test images made
"before maintenance": The image quality of the last printed
medical_image and STI1/STI2 test image must be equal or better than
the images made before maintenance.

5.6 Host System Image Quality Check
(1) Print a diagnostic image from every host system.

(2) Check images of each host at the lightbox for artifacts in diagnostic
image.
(3) In case artifacts are visible, compare with artifacts in last STI1 /STI2
image.
o In case artifacts are also visible in STI1 / STI2 image, refer to
Technical Documentation chapter "3.3 Troubleshooting”.
o In case artifact is only visible in images of a specific host but not in
STI1 / STI2 image, initiate a service call of modality service engineer

6 Completion of the Maintenance

The Completion of the maintenance comprises following tasks:
Task Details see..

Backup Data on CF Card 6.1
Reset of Maintenance Action Counters and relative 6.2
Counters in the Infocounter
Customer Conversation 6.3
6.1 Backup Data on CF Card
(1) Open the input tray

(2) Take out the "Backup CF Card"
(3) Insert the CF card in the printer
CF card reader
(4) In the Key-operator menu select
"4 Save configuration".
printer display.
536509gh.cdr
Figure 18
536532ac.cdr
Figure 19

6.2 Reset of Maintenance Action Counters and relative Counters in the

Infocounter
(1) In the Browser menu select "Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command Session - 7 Service Actions - 4 Maintenance - 4 Clear relative
counters".
(2) Select ' 7 Service Actions - 4 Maintenance - 1 Maintenance Settings'
(3) Select 'y' for yes at each desired 'Reset Item'
(4) Select "Accept Changes". Refer to Figure 20
(5) When leaving the Service menu select "Preventive maintenance" as
service action.
Welcome to this
Service - Service actions

Maintenance Action Cycles Factory Current Active Reset Item
to go settings settings
Y Y 1
Thermal head cleaning required 3504 5000 5000 N N
Y Y
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 23504 25000 25000 N N
Y Y
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62400 62500 62500 N N
Y Y
Film calibration required 1 500 100 N N
Y Y
Service Maintenance required 4855 5000 5000 N N
2
Accept Changes Discard Changes Reset Values
536509fk.cdr
Figure 20
6.3 Customer Conversation
(1) Fill out the Maintenance checklist and hand it out to the customer.
(2) Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer.

HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation Checklist
Order-No.: DD+DIS271.05E
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365/100
Work Instruction for order no. SN Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:
Every 12 months or 25 000 printed films
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions DD+DIS271.05E.
Diagnostics not
OK OK
Questioning of the • Questioning of the customer about problems with
customer the printer.
Infocounter analysis • Read-out and analyzation of the infocounter
Image quality check • Printing of STI1, STI2 and medical test image for
comparison with test images at final system check


Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS271.05E
Maintenance points - Power off not

OK OK
Check of general • Visual check of power and network cable.
condition • Visual check of covers and film magazines
Check of condition of • Visual check of all belts and gears in the printer.
belts and gears
Visual check of the • Check of cables inside the printer for damage
cables
Replacement of the Air • Remove old air filter module and mount the new
Filter Module one (part of maintenance kit)
Cleaning of Electronics • Cleaning of the Electronic rack with a vacuum
rack cleaner.
Cleaning of Power • Cleaning of the Power supply air inlet with a
supply air inlet vacuum cleaner
Check and Cleaning of • Check of the rubber of the drum for damage.
Drum • Cleaning of the rubber of the drum with a lint free
cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol or
Ethanol.
Check of Guide Pin • Check the screws of the guide pins.
Screws at Thermal At printers with SN ≤ 1715 they can be loose,
Print Head leading to slightly lighter areas at one edge of the
film.
Cleaning of Thermal • Cleaning of the Thermal print head with a lint free
print head cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol
Electrical check • Check of the protective earth resistance

Maintenence Checklist Page 2 / 4 DRYSTAR 5300 Edition 1, Revision 11
DD+DIS271.05E Maintenance Checklist
Maintenance points - Power on not

OK OK
Check of safety switch • Opening of top cover to check function of safety
switch
SW patch installation • Installation of SW patch, in case a recommended
SW patch for the printer is available
Film calibration • Calibration of the films
Density Reproduction • Density Reproduction Check to confirm proper
Check operating CDM. Execution of CDM calibration if
not okay.
Test image evaluation • Printing of STI1, STI2 and medical test image
• Comparison with test images made during printer
diagnostics
• Check for artifacts on the film. In case of artifacts
in STI1 / STI2 and medical test image
troubleshooting as described in chapter 3.3
Troubleshooting.
Host system image • Printing of diagnostic image from every host
quality check system
• Check concerning artifacts in diagnostic image.
Comparison with artifacts in last STI1 /STI2
image.
o In case artifacts are also visible in STI1 / STI2
image, troubleshooting as described in chapter
3.3 Troubleshooting.
o In case artifact is only visible in images of a
specific host but not in STI1 / STI2 image,
initiation of service call of modality service
engineer
Completion not
OK OK
Backup • Backup of machine specific parameters on
CF card
Reset of Maintenance • Reset of Maintenance action counters
action counters and
• Reset of relative infocounter
relative infocounter
• Confirmation of the maintenance in the printer
service menu.
Customer conversation • Explanation of results of preventive maintenance.

Edition 1, Revision 11 DRYSTAR 5300 Maintenence Checklist Page 3 / 4
Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS271.05E
Remarks:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ...................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer

Maintenence Checklist Page 4 / 4 DRYSTAR 5300 Edition 1, Revision 11
Imaging Services Service Bulletins
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365/100
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Hardcopy Æ Dry Printers Æ Drystar 5300 Æ Service Bulletin

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS008.04E Service Bulletins


Imaging Services Installation Planning
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365/100
r
l.cd
tite
00_
5_ 01
536
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS348.05E.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.

eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v04
1
1 2 3
DD+DIS348.05E Installation Planning
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


1 2 3
This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
• construction planning data
• technical connection and performance data
• safety instructions, listing of certificates

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.8:
1.9 12-2007 • Added detailed specifications for power cables which
are part of delivery. See section 3.1
• Corrected wrong outlet and cable specification for US:
Wrong: NEMA 6-15p outlet/cable
Correct: NEMA 5-15p outlet/cable.
See section 8.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST................................................................................6

2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................7
3 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.........................................................................8
3.1 Scope of Delivery......................................................................................................................8
3.2 Accessories...............................................................................................................................9
4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................10

5 MINIMUM FREE SPACE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .....................................12
6 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................13
6.1 Network Integration Parameters .............................................................................................13
6.2 Modality Setup Parameters.....................................................................................................15
6.3 Setup of Security and Privacy (optional).................................................................................17
6.3.1 List of Key-Operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights.............................17
6.3.2 Audit Logging Server and NTP Server Parameters................................................................19
6.3.3 Availability of Certificates ........................................................................................................19
6.4 Service Host Parameters ........................................................................................................19
6.5 Example for System Integration..............................................................................................20
7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................21

7.1 During Operation.....................................................................................................................21
7.2 During Transport and Storage ................................................................................................21
8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................22

8.1 Electrical Connections at the Printer.......................................................................................23
9 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................24
9.1 Type Overview ........................................................................................................................24
9.2 Functional Data .......................................................................................................................24
9.2.1 Pixel Matrices..........................................................................................................................25
9.3 Electrical Data .........................................................................................................................25
9.4 Climatic Data...........................................................................................................................25
9.5 Sound Emission Data .............................................................................................................25
9.6 Interface Data..........................................................................................................................26


1 2 3
9.7 Service Data............................................................................................................................26
9.8 Dimensions and Weight ..........................................................................................................26
9.8.1 Dimensions, packed Machine .................................................................................................26
9.8.2 Dimensions, closed Machine ..................................................................................................26
9.8.3 Dimensions, opened Machine.................................................................................................27
9.8.4 Weight .....................................................................................................................................27
10 SAFETY STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS .......................................................................28


1 2 3
1 Installation Planning Checklist

# Step Goal See Okay
section
1. Make yourself familiar with the To see in which surrounding the printer 2
System Overview will be installed
2. Make yourself familiar with the Basic information, to see whether 3.1
scope of delivery additional, site specific material for
installation might be required
3. Make yourself familiar with the To be able to order required accessories 3.2
available accessories before the installation
4. Have a look at the machine To be able to check, whether the printer 4
dimensions fits in the desired installation place
5. Check the required free space To see whether enough free space for 5
around the printer. operation, repair and maintenance is
available.
6. Organize the required network To have all parameters in advance, to 6
parameters to hook up the printer prevent a delay during installation
in the existing network.
7. Get up-to-date Connectivity To be prepared for modality specific 6.2
Release Documents for the adjustments at the printer
modalities which shall print on the
printer
8. Compare the required ambient To prevent installation of the printer in an 7
and climatic conditions with the inappropriate environment, leading to
condition at the installation place. functional faults.
9. Check the required electrical To be able to initiate all required 8
connection prerequisites in advance to allow proper
electrical connections
10. Make yourself familiar with the To have all printer parameters available 9
printer specifications which might be required for people who
are in involved in installation and
operation of the printer.
11. Have a look at the printer safety To have the safety standards and 10
standards and regulations regulations for which the printer is tested
available in case they are requested by
the hospital administration.
12. Confirm the installation readiness To be sure that all required pre- Last
installation conditions are fulfilled. Page


1 2 3
2 System Overview
1 3
536511JQ.CDR
Figure 1
# Item Comment
1 Modality The modality has to support the DICOM print
protocol
2 DRYSTAR 5300 Dry printer for 14x17" or 14x11" DT2 films
3 HIPAX DICOM Print queue buffer. Only required in case the 512 MB
Printbroker (optional) or 1 GB RAM are not sufficient for the application.
Refer to section 3.2.
NOTE:
Remark to an installation in a 'HIPAA conform environment':
In Figure 1 two additional, optional modules are not listed:
1) Audit logging server: This is a computer in the networking allowing to store all
communication between the different devices in the network.
2) NTP (Network Time Protocol) Server: This is a computer providing time
synchronization. It is useful for audit logging, so that all messages of all
devices have the same time reference.
Both devices are only required in a 'HIPAA' environment, where high data security is
required.
For more information refer to section 6.3.


1 2 3
3 Scope of Delivery and Accessories
3.1 Scope of Delivery

NOTE:
The printer is delivered with all parts, which are required to install it in an existing
Ethernet network.
Device name: DRYSTAR 5300

Type: 5365/100
ABC Code ENBYN
Scope of delivery
• 1 Basic DRYSTAR 5300 including:
- 1 input trays adjustable for 11 x 14” or 14 x 17” films
• 1 Compact Flash card (stored in backup CF card slot in input tray)
• 2 power cables, 3 m long (Europe / US)
• 1 UTP network cable, 5 m long (2 x RJ45 connection) incl. extension piece
• 1 Reference manual (English)
• 1 User Manual (English)
• 1 CD with all user manuals and Plug&Play installation manuals in all languages*
• 1 packing list
• 1 Plug and Play Installation manual (English)
• 25 films 14x17" DT 2B for test purposes
• 2 sets film type labels
• 1 Wrench 13 mm
• 1 pozidriv screwdriver
• 1 Output tray adjustment tool
• 1 Chinese warning sticker
• 1 CE declaration of conformity
• 1 China ROHS declaration
• 1 Installation Report
*available languages: Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Slovakian, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Vietnamese


1 2 3
IMPORTANT:
The printer is delivered with two 3 m power cables. See Figure 8.
• For US: NEMA 5-15P with IEC C13 plug (female)
• For Europe: CEE7/7 with IEC C13 plug (female)
Organize a power cable for your country locally.
See section 8 for “Mains connection in the installation room” specifications.
3.2 Accessories
Device Order Number ABC Code
1 GB RAM. Refer to note 1 below. CM+343360.0 EP5UA
Mobile installation kit. -- EO6C4
Refer to Note 2 below.
Upgrade Kit SW Rel. 2.0.0_C1 CM+343357.0 ERA3Q
NOTE 1:
The 1 GB RAM module may be required, in case extended print spooling capacity is
required. This is usually the case if one or more of the connected modalities are printing
in page mode.
In case the spooling capacity with 1 GB RAM is not enough, the installation of a HIPAX
DICOM Printbroker is recommended. Refer to section 2.
RAM Size Spooling # 1 MB images* # 22 MB images**
capacity
512 MB (default) 295 MB 295 13
1 GB (option) 645 MB 645 29
* 1 MB is a typical image size, in case a modality sends in image mode.
** 22 MB is the image size for a 14x17" film, in case the modality sends in page mode.
NOTE 2:
The mobile installation kit is required in following
cases:
• In case the DRYSTAR 5300 is installed in
a truck together with a diagnostic device
(mobile application).
• In case of an installation in areas at risk of
earthquakes
5365_reg11_007_e.cdr
Figure 2: Mobile Installation Kit


1 2 3
NOTE:
REMOTE SERVICE:
In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the printer to a certain extent remotely.
To enable remote service of the printer remote access has first to be organized.
Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System
(SRSS).
For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET – GSO Library - Technical
Services - Service Delivery - SRSS
4 Machine Dimensions
Closed machine:
14.1 inch
359 mm
5365_reg11_001_e.eps
Figure 3


1 2 3
Opened machine:
595 mm / 23.4 inch

5365_reg11_003_e.eps
Figure 4


1 2 3
5 Minimum free Space for Operation and Maintenance
536511aa.cdr
Space required for installation and repair Space required for operation
Figure 5
NOTE:
In case the minimum free space for installation and repair is not available, the printer
can be carried at a different place. The printer weight is 55 kg (121 lb). It can in
general be carried by two people.


1 2 3
6 System Integration
The system integration comprises the following tasks:
Task Refer to
Network integration of the printer 6.1
Modality setup 6.2
Setup of security and privacy (optional) 6.3
Setup of the Agfatek Link Service Host 6.4
For each of these steps various parameters are required in advance. They can be
entered in the following tables:
6.1 Network Integration Parameters
To connect the printer to the hospital network, the following parameters are required by
the hospital network administrator:
Parameter Default Value
Printer IP address 169.254.10.10 .............................................
Hostname ds5300 .............................................
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 .............................................
Router IP address - .............................................
Printer AE title* DS5300 .............................................
Domain name - .............................................
The Hospital Network Administrator needs the following information about the printer:
Network connection RJ45 UTP, 100BaseT acc. to IEC601
Transmission protocol DICOM Version 3.0; FTP, Telnet, HTTP, SNMP,
SMTP
Image formats DICOM


1 2 3
*NOTE:
• It is possible to define more than one AE title at the printer – this means it's
possible to have two or more “logical” DRYSTAR 5300 printers.
• To configure logical SCP printers can be necessary, in case for example printing is
initiated at a PACS system, which has several modalities as input.
Example:
The PACS system collects CR and CT images.
• CR images shall be printed with taste LUT Kanamori
• CT images shall be printed with linear taste LUT.
Problem:
The workstation at the PACS system has one AE title only. The DRYSTAR 5300 does
not recognize, for which type of modality (CR or CT) the user wants to print.
Solution:
• Create one logical printer 'DRYSTAR5300_CR' and one 'DRYSTAR5300_CT'.
• Create two different host profiles for the two logical printers, one with Kanamori
LUT, the other with linear taste LUT.
• In the workstation setup both printers: The user has to select the proper logical
printer, depending on the application.
⇒ The number of logical SCP printers is not limited. As each configured SCP server
consumes resources of the printer, use as little SCP servers as possible. Rule of
thumb: Define max. 4 logical printers.


1 2 3
6.2 Modality Setup Parameters
To connect the printer to the DICOM modality, the following parameters are required by
the hospital network administrator:
Modality 1: ................................................... (nickname* of the modality; max. 8

characters (letters/figures))
Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................
Modality AE_title ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................


1 2 3
NOTE:
*Nickname: The name of the modality which is used by the personnel.
Example: The workstation "Siemens Icon Power PC" could be named
"Icon" in the daily use. At the printer configuration this name is entered
as "nickname".
IMPORTANT:
For printer connectivity have the up-to-date Interface Status Report and
corresponding Connectivity Release Document available:
Interface Status Report:
The up-to-date interface status report lists all modalities, for which the connectivity to
the DRYSTAR 5300 is tested and released.
The ISR (Interface Status Report) is available on MEDNET - HealthCare Library -
General Info - Connectivity & Application - Interface Status Report - Application Info
(only via Intranet – not via Internet).
The ISR also lists the Connectivity Release Document numbers.
Example see Figure 6
PHILIPS, CR DRYSTAR 4500(M)/5500/5300

EASYVISION RAD 4.2 Image : ETHERNET II
DICOM 3.0
Control : ETHERNET II
DICOM PRINT MANAGEMENT SCU
Status : Released for installation
Document : 000874
Remarks :
5365_reg11_006_e.cdr
Connectivity Release
Document Number
Figure 6
Connectivity Release Documents:

Specific connectivity information for the DRYSTAR 5300 can be found in the
Connectivity Release Documents.
The Connectivity Release Documents are available on MEDNET (Intranet and
Internet), Imaging Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application


1 2 3
6.3 Setup of Security and Privacy (optional)

In case HIPAA compliance is required, following items have to be checked in advance:
Item Refer to
Users and service people who may have access 6.3.1
Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters 6.3.2
Availability of certificates 6.3.3
NOTE:
The parameters for 'Security and Privacy' have to be determined and entered by the
'hospital security responsible person'.
Please hand out the pages of this subsection (6.3) to the 'hospital security responsible
person'.
6.3.1 List of Key-Operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights
The list of Key-operators is limited to 50. The Key-Operator has access to the Key-
Operator webpages of the printer.
Following conventions are valid:

• Username: min. 4 characters, max 20 characters
• Network password: min. 4 characters, max 10 characters
# User name Password

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.


1 2 3
The list of service people is limited to 8. The service people have access to the
service web pages.

# Service person name Password

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The list of Specialists is limited to 1. The Specialist has access to the specialist web
pages.

# Specialist name Password

1.


1 2 3
6.3.2 Audit Logging Server and NTP Server Parameters

To setup the Audit Logging and NTP server in the printer, request the following
parameters from the hospital network administrator:
Parameter Value
Audit Logging IP address ................................................................
Audit Logging port number ................................................................
NTP server IP address ...............................................................
NTP server port number ...............................................................
6.3.3 Availability of Certificates

Check with the hospital network administrator, that certificates are available for all
devices, which shall be HIPAA compliant.
NOTE:
• Agfa devices which are according to the HIPAA specifications have Agfa
certificates already loaded.
• All certificates issued by Agfa have a validity period of 10 years
6.4 Service Host Parameters
NOTE:
The AGFATEK LINK Service Host is optional in the network.
It is an optional part of the SRSS (Secure Remote Service System).
For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET – GSO Library - Technical
Services - Service Delivery - SRSS
Parameter Default Value

Service Host IP address 192.9.200.155 .............................................
Phone Number -- .............................................


1 2 3
6.5 Example for System Integration
Figure 7


1 2 3
7 Ambient Conditions
7.1 During Operation
Ambient temperature: min.: +15°C (59°F)

max.: +30°C (86°F)
Relative humidity: min.: 20%

(non condensing) max.: 75%
7.2 During Transport and Storage
NOTE:
• Climate conditions for storage must be in accordance with
EN60721-3-1-class 1K4
• Climate conditions for transport must be in accordance with
EN60721-3-2(1993)-class 2K4
Ambient temperature min.: - 25°C (-13°F)

during storage: max.: + 55°C (131°F)
Relative humidity min.: 10%

during storage: max.: 95%
Absolute humidity min.: 0.1 g/m³

during storage: max.: 35 g/m³
Rate of temperature max.: 1 °C/min.

change during storage
Air pressure during Min. 70 kPa

storage max.: 106 kPa
Ambient temperature min.: - 40°C (-40°F)

during transport: max.: + 70°C (158°F)
Relative humidity min.: 10%

during transport: max.: 95%


1 2 3
8 Electrical Connections
Installation guidelines Electrical installations have to be done in accordance
with national regulations. Examples:
VDE (Germany) Electrical installations in the
installation room must be in compliance with the
regulations IEC 364, VDE 0100, and VDE 0107.
UL (US) Electrical installations in the installation
room must be in compliance with the regulations:
“National Electrical Code" (NEC) (NFPA70).
IMPORTANT:
A ground fault interrupter (GFI) (IN = 30 mA) must be installed at a suitable point in
the circuit (in compliance with VDE 664).
Mains connection in the VDE Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with
installation room DIN 49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II.
UL Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P plug
Mains cable Euro- CEE7/7 - H05VV - F3G - 3 x 2.5 mm² with

(part of the delivery) Version: IEC C13 plug (female); cable length 3 m
US/CAN- NEMA 5-15P - SJT, 3 x AWG 18 with
Version: IEC C13 plug (female); Cable length 3 m
US Europe
IEC C13 CEE7/7
NEMA 5-15P IEC C13

5366_chap11_001.cdr
Figure 8
Network cable UTP; AWG24; Length: 5 m

(part of the delivery)
Main switch Upon machine installation, it must be ensured that either

the mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for the
installation on site is located close to the machine and
easily accessible.


1 2 3
8.1 Electrical Connections at the Printer
5365_Reg11_005_e.cdr
1 2 3 4 5
Figure 9
1 Network connection. RJ45 UTP for 100BaseT network,

according to IEC 601.
2 Service Interface. RS232 Interface male DTE 9 pin sub D
(nullmodem)
3 Equipotential plug.
4 Ground plug. 6 mm metric thread.
5 100 - 240 V AC power supply.


1 2 3
9 Specifications
9.1 Type Overview
Printer Type
DRYSTAR 5300 5365/100
DRYPRO 821 5365/200
9.2 Functional Data
Film sizes 11x14" 14x17"

Throughput (films/hour) 11x14": 100 14x17": 70
st
Access time1 film approx. (seconds) 77
Printable area(pixels) Refer to 9.2.1
resolution(DPI) 320 (79.375 µm Pixel size)
Bits per pixel / number of grey steps 12 / 4096
Daylight film loading yes
Size of film magazine 100 films
Image recording type Direct thermography
Densitometer built in yes
Automatic density control yes
Internal Compact Flash card capacity 128 MB
RAM Memory Themis: 512 MB*
Warm-up time Approx. 5 min. (cold printer)
* optional 1 GB. Refer to 3.2


1 2 3
9.2.1 Pixel Matrices

The DRYSTAR 5300 has one supply tray that can be configured to either 11x14" or
14x17" film size. If trim is used around the images (trim is a small, white frame around
each image on the film), the diagnostic area is 10 pixels smaller at each edge of the
film.
DRYSTAR 5300 Diagnostic Printable Area in Pixels

No Annotations Annotations
Film Size Portrait Landscape Portrait Landscape
Width Height Width Height Width Height Width Height
11x14" 3300 4256 4256 3300 3300 3891 4256 2935
14x17" 4256 5174 5174 4256 4256 4809 5174 3891
Table 1: Pixel Matrices
9.3 Electrical Data
Rated voltage [~V] 100-240 AC (autosensing)

Frequency [Hz] 50/60
Power consumption [W] 70 standby
250 printing average
530 peak
9.4 Climatic Data
Heat emission [kJ/h] 252 standby

900 printing average
1908 maximum
9.5 Sound Emission Data
Noise level: in standby: 54 dB(A) maximum

in operation: 64 dB(A) maximum


1 2 3
9.6 Interface Data
Image / control data interface DICOM 3.0 Print SCP

Maximum number of simultaneous 10
DICOM associations
9.7 Service Data
InfoCounter yes
Error diagnostics built in yes
Module exchange concept yes
Remote/preventive service capable yes
9.8 Dimensions and Weight
9.8.1 Dimensions, packed Machine
Length / depth (cm / inch) 90 / 35.4

Width (cm / inch) 83 / 32.7
Height (cm / inch) 51 / 20.1
Height incl. Pallet (cm / inch) 66 / 26.0
9.8.2 Dimensions, closed Machine



1 2 3
9.8.3 Dimensions, opened Machine

9.8.4 Weight
Printer alone (kg / lb) 55 / 121

Printer with packing incl. palette (kg / lb) 82,5 / 181,9


1 2 3
10 Safety Standards and Regulations
The Drystar 5300 has been tested and found to comply with the following international
standards and regulations:
• the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC
• CFR Part 21
• The Drystar 5300 contains an automatic QC feature that has been
designed to comply with the grayscale reproduction constancy test,
according to the international standard IEC 1223-2-4.
Safety standards
• IEC 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• EN 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• UL 60601-1
• CSA 22.2 No. 601.1-M90
• GB4943-2001 (for CCC-Mark)
Radio-interference regulations (interference suppression)

• FCC Rules 47 CFR part 15 subpart B
• IEC 60601-1-2
• IEC 61000-4-3
• IEC 61000-4-4
• IEC 61000-4-5
• IEC 61000-4-6
• IEC 61000-3-2
• IEC 61000-3-3
• IEC 61000-4-11
• ETSI 300330
• GB9254-1998(Class A) (for CCC-Mark)
• GB17625.1-2003 (for CCC-Mark)
The DRYSTAR 5300 carries the FCC ID: HPL5365, CE, TUV, cULus and CCC label.


HEALTHCARE INSTALLATION SITE
Imaging Services READINESS CHECKLIST
Name of Field Service Engineer: _________________ Checking date:____________

Client name: ___________________________________________________________
Client address: __________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
Contact person,
name and title: ___________________________________________________________
Client phone number: ________________________ Extension:_________________
Type of systems: ___________________ Order /OGT number: _____________________
# Item Refer to okay
1 All parts, which are required additionally to the "scope of 3.1

delivery" are available at the installation site
3 The planned installation place has enough space for 4 and 5

installation, operation and repair
4 The required system integration parameters are available 6
5 The required connectivity Release Documents are available 6.2
6 The Host System is installed and the Host System Service --

Engineer is scheduled to setup the printer at the host system.
7 The ambient conditions are within the given limits 7
8 The electrical connection is available as specified 8
Remarks:______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Signature of the FSE or Product Specialist:
1
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany


DD+DIS008.04E Glossary and Key Word Index
Chapter 12:
List of contents
1 Glossary .................................................................. 1
2 Key Word Index ..................................................... 11

(Typ 5365/100) Agfa Group Confidential
1 Glossary
2-Propanol (Isopropyl Alcohol used for cleaning purposes.

alcohol)
A
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center.
A device developed by AGFA to scan X-ray
exposed phosphor plates.
AD Converter Analog to Digital Converter.
AE-Title Application Entity Title.
A DICOM capable device in the network is
unambiguously identified by its IP address,
hostname and AE-Title .
Drystar 5300 has the AE-Title "DS5300" by
default. The AE-Title for the Drystar 5300 in
the DICOM Host must be identical with the
AE-Title in the Drystar 5300 itself.
The AE-Title is set up during installation.
To make a clear distinction between AE-title
and IP address, it is recommended to use
only lower case characters for the hostname.
Preferably use the same name as for the AE-
title, but in lowercase.
AGFATEK LINK Device out of the AGFATEK product
spectrum for remote service. Enables to make
a dial-up-networking connection between
local PC and the AGFA network.
Anti-static wrist strap Wrist strap made of synthetic material with
integrated thread-like metal.
Used for "grounding" the service engineer
during service at printed circuit boards.
Prevents electronic components from being
destroyed by static discharge.
APIP Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol. AGFA
network protocol for communication between
medical devices. More and more DICOM
supersedes APIP.

Glossary and Key Word Index DD+DIS008.04E
B
B/W Black and White.
Battery RAM A RAM component, whose contents is being
stored by the tension of a battery.
Blue Based Film Film with a blue colored support layer.
The fog level of this film is approx. 0.2 O.D.
See also "Clear Based Film"
Browser Application used for reading Internet pages.
The commonly used browsers are Microsoft
Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator.
C
Calibration Process which determines a reproducible
correlation between input and output values.
CAN-Bus Controlled Area Network Bus.
Bus system, originally developed by Bosch
and Intel for motor vehicles. It is a multimaster
system, which enables data transfer directly
between any number of systems.
Clear Based Film Film with a transparent support layer.
The fog level of this film is approx. 0.15 O.D.
See also "Blue Based Film"
COM1, COM2 Names for the first two serial interfaces of a
computer
CPU (MEC) Board Printed circuit board to control the main
functions of the printer, CPU.
CRIUS board Printed circuit board to control the main
functions of the printer, CPU..
D
DA Converter Digital Analog Converter.

DCE Data Communications Equipment.

Term out of the RS232 specification. DCE
equipment sends data on pin 3 and receives
on pin 2. The RS232 interface from modems
or PC's is almost always DCE. To connect a
DCE with a DTE device, a standard RS232
cable is required. To establish a DCE - DCE
connection, respectively a DTE - DTE
connection a null- modem cable is required.
See also DTE.
Densitometer Device used for measuring the optical density
of the film.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in
Medicine.
A network protocol, which is wide spread in
the medical world, and used for interchanging
text and images.
DICOM PMS DICOM Print Management Service.
A device which provides DICOM PMS
(= provider) makes it possible to print DICOM
images. A device which uses DICOM PMS
(= user) is able to control a DICOM printer.
The Drystar 5300 is a DICOM PMS Provider.
DIGINET HTTP-based web server from MI CSO.
Can be reached via:
"http://year2000.agfa.com/BU/MI/index.nsf".
Dmin / Dmax Minimal / maximal optical density on the film.
DNS Domain Name System).
The DNS server builds up the connection
between IP-address and Domain name.
Domain Name The Domain Name is the name for a device in
the network.
It provides for a more comfortable contact to a
network node by calling it via name instead of
the IP address. In the internet for example the
IP address 19.5.6.121 can be contacted by
the name 'johnson.com'. To identify a device
in the network via a name it has to be
registered in a DNS server. The network
system administrator determines the domain
name for Drystar 5300.
DPI Dots Per Inch.
Pixels per Inch (1 inch = 2,54 cm)
DRA Direct Remote Access.
Remote service

DSH1 Density Sensor Head board.

Part of the MDM (macrodensitometer).
"1" stands for the version of the board.
DTE Data Terminal Equipment.
Term out of the RS232 Specification. DTE
equipment sends data on pin 2 and receives
on pin 3.
See also DCE.
E
EEPROM Electrically Erasable, Programmable Read
Only Memory.
Memory chip that can be electronically erased
and programmed again.
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility.
EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference.
EPROM Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory.
Memory chip that can be erased by ultraviolet
light and be electronically programmed again.
Ethernet Network carrier technology for LANs (Local
Area Networks).
F
FIFO First In, First Out.
Way of storing data that first selects the data
that have been entered first.
Used in (print) queues.
Film batch Number printed on the film packet.
It changes with every new film emulsion. Only
the films with the same film batch have
exactly the same characteristics.
Film Sensitometry Calibration of the film.
By calibrating, the printer gets a table with
certain density values for certain control
values.
Film type Film of a certain producer or a similar
producer but with different characteristics
(sensitivity, contrast).
FireWire Serial bus standard also known as
IEEE1394. Data rate up to 400 Mb/s.
Flash EPROM An EPROM in which data have to be deleted
in fixed blocks instead of separate bytes.

Fog level Lowest optical density that can be measured

on the film.
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array.
A logic chip, which can be programmed. An
FPGA can be programmed after its
production.
FSE Field Service Engineer. Service technician.
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
A network protocol required for file transfer
within the network.
H
Heat sink Assembly to absorb and dissipate heat.
It is used with the thermal print head to
dissipate its surplus heat energy.
HTTP HyperText Transmission Protocol.
Protocol that determines the data format and
the way of transmission of HTML-pages in the
World Wide Web (WWW).
Host In the computer world a host computer is a
device, which provides services and settings
for other computers.
Especially in the world of medical devices a
host system is the device at which the printer
is going to be connected to.
Hyper Terminal A Windows program used for serial data
communication between two computers.
I
ICM Image Composition Map.
Complete image data for a complete film.
These image data correspond to the several
pixels on the film that is going to be printed.
IEC International Electro technical Commission

Infocounter File in the printer, which logs lots of

information and events.
The infocounter contains for example the date
of the installation, the SW version and all the
errors that have occurred.
IR Sensor InfraRed-temperature sensor
IP-Address Internet Protocol Address.
A 32 Bit address, which is assigned to each
TCP/IP host. Example: 192.9.200.201.
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network.
Telecommunication network which allows
different ways of communication (language,
text, data, images) to be transferred in one
united public net.
J
Java An object oriented programming language
developed by the American company Sun
Microsystems. It is independent of the
computer system used.
Java is used for browsers in the WWW.
K
KEY5 Assy Printed circuit board to control the printer
keypad.
L
LCD-Display Liquid Crystal Display.
By supplying a voltage the liquid crystals are
arranged such that a contrast is visible.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
Diode which emits green, yellow or red light.
LUT Look-Up Table,
contrast reference curve, e.g. Kanamori LUT.
M
MEC board Main Engine Controller board.
Printed circuit board that controls the printing
process. It has following main functions:
Reading the sensors; control of the motors;
serial interface to the power supply; control of
the thermal head. The MEC board has the
THEMIS board as a plug-in board.

N
Netmask Also called subnet mask. A 32 bit mask that
displays which bits are in use for the subnet
address. Subnets are used in a network to
keep it well-structured.
Null Modem Cable A RS232 cable where all the wires are
crossed over. This way for example the
receive wire at the one side is connected with
the transmit wire of the other side.
O
O.D. Optical Density
P
PACS Picture Archiving and Communication
System.
PCB Printed Circuit Board.
Pick-up Assembly Assembly in the printer that takes in 100 films
and provides for the transport of a film out of
the input tray.
Pixel One of the individual dots that make up an
image on the film.
E.g. a 10x12" film contains 4968 x 5900
pixels.
PMS DICOM Print Management Service.
A device that provides DICOM PMS
(= provider), makes printing of DICOM
images possible. A device using DICOM
PMS (= user) can control a DICOM printer.
Drystar 5300 is a DICOM PMS provider.
Portex AGFA own operating system for medical
devices.
Postscript Imperative programming language for the
device independent description of print pages
which brings the complete data (text, images,
graphics) and their positions to a standardized
data structure. PostScript was developed in
1982 by the American company Adobe
Systems and evolved in the meantime to a
quasi-standard. A further development is
PostScript Level 2, which has got among
others things an optimized data compression.

Print drum A rubber drum in the printer that guides the

film along the thermal print head.
Prompt A symbol that appears on a computer
terminal screen. Example: C:\>
PWM Pulse Width Modulation.
A method to encode information by varying
the length of a pulse.
R
RAM Random Access Memory
Free accessible memory. The RAM-board is
used to store intermediate data.
RJ45 Recommended Jack 45.
A connector specification used with UTP
cables. The connectors are 8-pole flat
connectors.
Router A device in the network to connect two or
more networks. It routes incoming data
packages to the corresponding network. The
network system administrator defines the IP-
address of the router for the printer. Only if
the router IP-address is known by the printer
it is possible for the printer to send
information via the network back to devices
which are located in another segment of the
network.
RS232 Interface Computer interface to convert computer
internal parallel data into serial data and vice
versa. The interface is defined via RS232
(Recommended Standard).
RS232 cable Cable following the RS232 standard
(Recommended Standard) to connect two
RS232 interfaces (for example connection
between modem and PC).
S
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface.
Service Interface RS232 Interface at the printer.
Service key Service tool.
Used to bridge safety switches to make it
possible to control all the devices despite the
device is opened.

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television

Engineers.
The printer is able to print out the black/white
test image named after the SMPTE for test
purposes.
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
Protocol to send e-mails between computers
in the internet.
SQM Service Quality Management.
T
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol.
Widespread network protocol.
Telnet A network protocol that provides for logging in
to a network computer system.
TIF Tagged Image Format.
A standard format to store pixel oriented
images. GIF and JPG are more and more
superseding TIF.
TH Abbreviation of Thermal Print Head.
THEMIS board Board on the MEC Board. Contains among
other things the power PC processor and the
Fire wire interface to the Crius CPU.
Thermal Print Head Resistor line that transfers the image to the
film.
U
USB Universal Serial Bus.
PC bus system to attach peripherals like
scanner, keyboards etc. to PC's. Data rate
12 Mb/s and up to 480 Mb/s for USB-2.
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair.
A network cable where the wires are twisted
and without additional shielding.
V
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker.
Association of German Electro-Technicians

XT X-Terminal.
An Agfa program for serial data
communication between two computers.

2 Key Word Index
Error codes
---A---
Camshaftmodule 3.3-EC-16
Air filter CoolingFanmodule 3.3-EC-21
Replacement 3.5-17 DisplayKeypadmodule 3.3-EC-23
DrumDrivemodule 3.3-EC-8
---B--- InputSensormodule 3.3-EC-17
Backup InputTraymodule 3.3-EC-12
Save Configuration 1-29 OSBmodule 3.3-EC-20
Outputmodule 3.3-EC-9
---C--- Pickupmodule 3.3-EC-14
PowerSupplymodule 3.3-EC-6
Calibration
PrintDrummodule 3.3-EC-22
Automatic film calibration 1-14
TPHmodule 3.3-EC-19
CDM 9-21. 3.6-11
Vilismodule 3.3-EC-2
Density reproduction check 9-18. 3.6-8
Film Calibration 9-17. 3.6-6 ---F---
Macro TPH profile Calibration 3.6-13
TPH alignment 3.6-3 Front cover
TPH replacement 3.6-2 Replacement 3.5-1
Functional description
Cam shaft drive
Error handling 2-5
Replacement 3.5-85
Film run 2-4
Cam shaft gear wheel Software 2-5
Replacement 3.5-89 Technical data 2-2
Cleaning the print head 9-15
---I---
Cleaning the print head resistor line 9-15.
3.3-19 Infocounter 9-5
Codings Reset 9-23
Fuses 3.4-1 Input block module
LEDs 3.4-1 Replacement 3.5-53
Compact Flash card Input sensors module
Replacement 3.5-21 Replacement 3.5-69
Covers Input tray
Replacement 3.5-1 Replacement 3.5-60
Installation
---D---
Checklist 1-3
Drum drive module Film loading 1-10. 1-9. 1-9
Replacement 3.5-78 Installation Checklist 1-32
Prerequisites 1-3
---E--- Printer hook up 1-24
Error catalogue 3.3 Printer Installation Wizard 1-15

Printer settings set-up 1-19 Replacement 3.5-57

Printer set-up 1-6 Power supply
Removal of transport protection locks 1-34 Replacement 3.5-43
---K--- Print drum module

Replacement 3.5-73
Key-operator
Local keypad 3.2-5 ---R---
Keypad & Display module Reference diagrams
Replacement 3.5-19 E-labels 4-4
Fans 4-4
---L---
Motors 4-4
Left side cover PCBs 4-4
Replacement 3.5-8 Sensors 4-2
Logging Right side cover
Get files 3.2-35 Replacement 3.5-5
Setup 3.2-33
View 3.2-36 ---S---
Safety
---M---
Check after work 3.1-6
Main board (VILIS - Themis) General instructions 1-1
Replacement 3.5-39 Machine-specific 3.1-1
Main board cooling fan Maintenance 9-1
Replacement 3.5-35 Service work 3.1-4
Supplementary ground cable 3.1-3
Main drive pulley & Drum belt
Replacement 3.5-66 Safety switch
Replacement 3.5-24
Maintenance
Cleaning material 9-3 Safety Switch 3.1-2
Infocounter analysis 9-4 Service PC
Interview of the customer 9-4 Configuration 3.2-3
Power OFF 9-11 Service tools
Power ON 9-17 Show errors and warnings 3.2-18
View general reports 9-10 use 3.2-18
---O--- Software installation 3.2-30
OSB switch board ---T---

Replacement 3.5-46
Thermal print head unit
Output module Replacement 3.5-81
Replacement 3.5-55
Tools
Output tray cover DICOM profile editor 3.2-39
Replacement 3.5-13 Infocounter 3.2-19
Logging 3.2-33
---P--- Maintenance actions 3.2-32
Pick up module Mandatory 3.2-1

Optional 3.2-2 Troubleshooting procedures

Printer terminal 3.2-47 Image quality 3.3-11
Software 3.2-4 System info on film 3.3-9
Test images 3.2-25
View general info 3.2-38 ---W---
WebPages 3.2-6 Webpages
Top cover module Connectivity tools 3.2-16
Replacement 3.5-11 General information 3.2-13
TPH cooling fan Module Repair 3.2-17
Replacement 3.5-48 Remote sessions 3.2-14
Service level 3.2-12
TPH flat cable
Replacement 3.5-29 WebPages
Setup 3.2-7
Troubleshooting
Flow chart 3.3-1
WebPages setup
Connections 3.2-7
Symptoms 3.3-3
Tools 3.3-2

(Typ 5365/100) Agfa Group Confidential

Order no.: DD+DIS008.04E
DRYSTAR 5300
Type 5365 / 100
POWER
1st Edition
HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.



Agfa Drystar-5300 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agfa Drystar-5300 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical

printed in Germany 03 / 2004

To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified

AGFA-GEVAERT AG - MI CSO / Information & Projects

printed in Germany 03 / 2004

1. Controls, Connections and

2. Functional Description High Voltage ! Waiting Time

3. Repair and Service

4. Reference and Circuit

5. Spare Parts List

8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Activity Writing style Example

Explanation for an action, Switch on the device Switch on the device

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12

10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14

13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17

14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18

15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18

16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23

20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27

23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27

25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28

26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Icon Name and Circumstances

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

3.2 System Labels

Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation

Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT

Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct